SlideShare a Scribd company logo
Table of Contents 
Introduction 3 
Instrument Cluster 10 
Warning and control lights 10 
Gauges 15 
Entertainment Systems 19 
AM/FM stereo cassette with CD 19 
AM/FM stereo with CD 28 
AM/FM stereo cassette (CD changer compatible) 43 
Climate Controls 63 
Lights 67 
Headlamps 67 
Turn signal control 70 
Bulb replacement 71 
Driver Controls 76 
Windshield wiper/washer control 76 
Steering wheel adjustment 77 
Power windows 78 
Mirrors 80 
Speed control 80 
Locks and Security 89 
Keys 89 
Locks 89 
Anti-theft system 91 
Seating and Safety Restraints 99 
Seating 99 
Safety restraints 102 
Air bags 114 
Child restraints 119 
Driving 133 
Starting 133 
1
Table of Contents 
Brakes 138 
Traction control/AdvanceTrac 142 
Transmission operation 144 
Vehicle loading 154 
Trailer towing 156 
Roadside Emergencies 157 
Getting roadside assistance 157 
Hazard flasher switch 158 
Fuel pump shut-off switch 159 
Fuses and relays 160 
Changing tires 165 
Jump starting 170 
Wrecker towing 175 
Customer Assistance 176 
Reporting safety defects (U.S. only) 186 
Cleaning 187 
Maintenance and Specifications 194 
Engine compartment 197 
Engine oil 199 
Battery 203 
Fuel information 214 
Part numbers 237 
Refill capacities 238 
Lubricant specifications 240 
Accessories 245 
Index 248 
All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or 
mechanical including photocopying, recording or by any 
information storage and retrieval system or translation in 
whole or part is not permitted without written authorization 
from Ford Motor Company. Ford may change the contents 
without notice and without incurring obligation. 
Copyright © 2002 Ford Motor Company 
2
Introduction 
The following warning may be required by California 
law: 
CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning 
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its 
constituents, and certain vehicle 
components contain or emit chemicals known to 
the State of California to cause cancer and birth 
defects or other reproductive harm. In addition, 
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain 
products of component wear contain or emit 
chemicals known to the State of California to 
cause cancer and birth defects or other 
reproductive harm. 
CONGRATULATIONS 
Congratulations on acquiring your new Ford. Please 
take the time to get well acquainted with your vehicle 
by reading this handbook. The more you know and 
understand about your vehicle the greater the safety 
and pleasure you will derive from driving it. 
For more information on Ford Motor Company and 
its products visit the following website: 
² In the United States: www.ford.com 
² In Canada: www.ford.ca 
² In Australia: www.ford.com.au 
² In Mexico: www.ford.com.mx 
Additional owner information is given in separate 
publications. 
3
Introduction 
This Owner’s Guide describes every option and 
model variant available and therefore some of the 
items covered may not apply to your particular 
vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may 
describe options before they are generally available. 
Remember to pass on the Owner’s Guide when 
reselling the vehicle. It is an integral part of the 
vehicle. 
Fuel pump shut-off switch In the event of 
an accident the safety switch will 
automatically cut off the fuel supply to the engine. 
The switch can also be activated through sudden 
vibration (e.g. collision when parking). To reset 
the switch, refer to the Fuel pump shut-off 
switch in the Roadside emergencies chapter. 
SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION 
Warning symbols in this guide 
How can you reduce the risk of personal injury and 
prevent possible damage to others, your vehicle and 
its equipment? In this guide, answers to such 
questions are contained in comments highlighted by 
the warning triangle symbol. These comments 
should be read and observed. 
4
Introduction 
Warning symbols on your vehicle 
When you see this 
symbol, it is imperative 
that you consult the 
relevant section of this 
guide before touching or attempting adjustment of 
any kind. 
Protecting the environment 
We must all play our 
part in protecting the 
environment. Correct 
vehicle usage and the 
authorized disposal of waste cleaning and lubrication 
materials are significant steps towards this aim. 
Information in this respect is highlighted in this 
guide with the tree symbol. 
BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE 
There are no particular guidelines for breaking-in 
your vehicle. During the first 1,600 km (1,000 miles) 
of driving, vary speeds frequently. This is 
recommended to give the moving parts a chance to 
break in. 
5
Introduction 
SPECIAL NOTICES 
Emission warranty 
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty includes 
Bumper-to-Bumper Coverage, Safety Restraint 
Coverage, Corrosion Coverage, and 7.3L Power 
Stroke Diesel Engine Coverage. In addition, your 
vehicle is eligible for Emissions Defect and 
Emissions Performance Warranties. For a detailed 
description of what is covered and what is not 
covered, refer to the Warranty Guide that is 
provided to you along with your Owner’s Guide. 
Special instructions 
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with 
sophisticated electronic controls. 
By operating other electronic equipment 
(e.g. mobile telephone without exterior 
aerial) electromagnetic fields can occur which can 
cause malfunctions of the vehicle electronics. 
Therefore you should observe the instructions of 
the equipment manufacturers. 
Please read the section Air bag in the 
Seating and safety restraints chapter. 
Failure to follow the specific warnings and 
instructions could result in personal injury. 
Front seat mounted rear-facing child or 
infant seats should NEVER be used in front 
of a passenger side air bag. 
6
Introduction 
Notice to owners of Cobra vehicles 
Before you drive your vehicle, be sure to read the 
“SVT Cobra Owner’s Guide Supplement.” This book 
contains important operation and maintenance 
information. 
MIDDLE EAST/NORTH AFRICA VEHICLE 
SPECIFIC INFORMATION 
For your particular global region, your vehicle may 
be equipped with features and options that are 
different from the ones that are described in this 
Owner Guide; therefore, a supplement has been 
supplied that complements this book. By referring to 
the pages in the provided supplement, you can 
properly identify those features, recommendations 
and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. 
Refer to this Owner Guide for all other 
required information and warnings. 
7
These are some of the symbols you may see on your 
vehicle. 
Vehicle Symbol Glossary 
Safety Alert See Owner’s Guide 
Fasten Safety Belt Air Bag-Front 
Air Bag-Side Child Seat 
Child Seat 
Installation Warning 
Child Seat Tether 
Anchorage 
Brake System 
Anti-Lock Brake 
System 
Brake Fluid - 
Non-Petroleum 
Based 
Traction Control 
AdvanceTrac 
Master Lighting 
Switch 
Hazard Warning 
Flasher 
Fog Lamps-Front 
Fuse Compartment Fuel Pump Reset 
Windshield 
Wash/Wipe 
Windshield 
Defrost/Demist 
Rear Window 
Defrost/Demist 
Power Windows 
Front/Rear 
Power Window 
Lockout 
Child Safety Door 
Lock/Unlock 
Introduction 
8
Vehicle Symbol Glossary 
Interior Luggage 
Compartment 
Release Symbol 
Panic Alarm 
Engine Oil Engine Coolant 
Engine Coolant 
Temperature 
Do Not Open When 
Hot 
Battery 
Avoid Smoking, 
Flames, or Sparks 
Battery Acid Explosive Gas 
Fan Warning 
Power Steering 
Fluid 
Maintain Correct 
Fluid Level 
MAX 
MIN Emission System 
Engine Air Filter 
Passenger 
Compartment Air 
Filter 
Jack Check fuel cap 
Low tire warning 
Introduction 
9
Instrument Cluster 
WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES 
Base instrument cluster 
40 
30 
50 
60 
60 70 
80 100 120 
80 
90 
140 
160 
180 
100 
110 
120 
4 
5 
3 
2 
RPMX1000 
H L H 
0 
C 
E F 
20 
10 
40 
20 
1 
MPH km/h 
FUEL DOOR 
THEFT 
LOW 
FUEL 
AIR 
BAG 
SERVICE 
ENGINE 
SOON 
Optional instrument cluster 
6 
BRAKE 
! P 
L 
SELECT/RESET 
. 
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
7 
H 
O/D 
OFF 
ABS 
CHECK 
FUEL 
CAP 
50 
40 
60 
80 
70 90 
100120 140 
80 
100 
160 
110 
120 
180 
200 
220 
240 
4 
5 
6 
3 
2 
RPMX1000 
H L H 
7 
BRAKE 
! P 
L 
0 
SELECT/RESET 
. 
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
C 
E F 
30 
20 
60 
40 
10 
20 
130 
140 
150 
8 
1 
H 
MPH km/h 
FUEL DOOR 
THEFT 
LOW 
FUEL 
O/D 
OFF 
AIR 
BAG 
SERVICE 
ENGINE 
SOON 
CHECK 
FUEL 
CAP 
ABS 
Turn signals 
Illuminates when the 
turn signals or the 
hazard lights are 
turned on. If the lights stay on continuously or flash 
faster, check for a burned-out bulb. 
High beams 
Illuminates when the 
high beam headlamps 
are turned on. 
Safety belt 
Illuminates to remind 
you to fasten your 
safety belts. For more 
information, refer to 
the Seating and safety restraints chapter. 
10
Instrument Cluster 
Charging system 
Illuminates when the 
battery is not charging 
properly. 
Air bag readiness 
Illuminates to confirm 
AIR 
that the air bags (front 
BAG 
or side) are 
operational. If the light fails to illuminate, continues 
to flash or remains on, have the system serviced 
immediately. 
Anti-theft system 
Illuminates when the 
SecuriLocky Passive 
Anti-theft System is 
armed. If the light fails to illuminate, continues to 
flash or remains on, have the system serviced. 
Service engine soon 
Illuminates briefly to 
SERVICE 
ensure the system is 
ENGINE 
functional. If it comes 
SOON 
on after the engine is 
started, one of the engine’s emission control systems 
may be malfunctioning. The light may illuminate 
without a driveability concern being noted. The 
vehicle will usually be drivable and will not require 
towing. 
Light turns on solid: 
Temporary malfunctions may cause the light to 
illuminate. Examples are: 
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel. 
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel. 
3. The fuel cap may not have been properly installed 
and securely tightened. 
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by 
filling the fuel tank with high quality fuel of the 
11
recommended octane and/or properly installing and 
securely tightening the fuel cap. After three driving 
cycles without these or any other temporary 
malfunctions present, the light should turn off. (A 
driving cycle consists of a cold engine startup 
followed by mixed city/highway driving.) No 
additional vehicle service is required. 
If the light remains on, have your vehicle serviced at 
the first available opportunity. 
Light is blinking: 
Engine misfire is occurring which could damage your 
catalytic converter. You should drive in a moderate 
fashion (avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration) 
and have your vehicle serviced at the first available 
opportunity. 
Under engine misfire conditions, excessive 
exhaust temperatures could damage the 
catalytic converter, the fuel system, interior floor 
coverings or other vehicle components, possibly 
causing a fire. 
Check fuel cap 
Illuminates when the 
CHECK 
fuel cap is not installed 
FUEL 
correctly. Check the 
CAP 
fuel cap for proper 
installation. When the fuel filler cap is properly 
re-installed, the light(s) will turn off after a period of 
normal driving. Continuing to operate the vehicle 
with the check fuel cap light on, or a mis-installed 
fuel cap can activate the Service Engine 
Soon/Check Engine warning light. 
It may take a long period of time for the 
system to detect an improperly installed fuel 
filler cap. 
For more information, refer to Fuel filler cap in the 
Maintenance and specifications chapter. 
Instrument Cluster 
12
Instrument Cluster 
Low fuel 
Illuminates when the 
fuel level in the fuel 
LOW 
tank is at, or near, 
FUEL 
empty (refer to Fuel 
gauge in this chapter for more information). 
O/D off (if equipped) 
Illuminates when the 
O/D 
overdrive function has 
OFF 
been turned OFF using 
the transmission control switch (TCS) on the 
gearshift. If the light does not come on or the light 
flashes steadily, have your vehicle serviced as soon 
as possible, damage to the transmission could occur. 
Traction ControlY active 
Illuminates when the 
Traction Controly 
system is active. It will 
be lit for a minimum of 
four seconds or for the duration of the Traction 
Controly event. 
For more information, refer to the Driving chapter. 
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) 
To confirm the 
anti-lock brake system 
ABS 
(ABS) warning light is 
functional it will 
momentarily illuminate when the ignition is turned 
to the ON position (alternatively for some vehicles 
when the ignition is moved from the ON position to 
the START position, the light will momentarily 
illuminate just prior to reaching the START 
position). If the light remains on, continues to flash 
or fails to illuminate, have the ABS serviced 
immediately. If the ABS light remains on, it means 
the anti-lock brake system has malfunctioned and is 
disabled, however, the normal brake system will still 
function unless the brake warning light also remains 
13
illuminated and parking brake is off. Refer to Brakes 
in the Driving chapter for more information. 
Brake system warning 
To confirm the brake 
BRAKE 
system warning light is 
functional, it will 
! P 
momentarily illuminate 
when the ignition is turned to the ON position 
(alternatively for some vehicles when the ignition is 
moved from the ON position to START position, the 
light will momentarily illuminate prior to reaching 
the START position). It also illuminates if the 
parking brake is engaged. If the brake system 
warning light does not illuminate as described, seek 
service immediately. Illumination after the parking 
brake is released indicates low brake fluid level or a 
brake system malfunction and the brake system 
should be serviced immediately by a qualified 
technician. Refer to Brakes in the Driving chapter 
for more information. 
Safety belt warning chime 
Sounds to remind you to fasten your safety belts. 
BeltMinderY chime 
Sounds intermittently to remind you to fasten your 
safety belts. 
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) warning 
chime 
Sounds when a malfunction in the supplemental 
restraint system (front or side airbags) has been 
detected. Have the supplemental restraint system 
inspected immediately. 
Key-in-ignition warning chime 
Sounds when the key is left in the ignition and the 
driver’s door is opened. 
Instrument Cluster 
14
Instrument Cluster 
Headlamps on warning chime 
Sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are 
on, the key is removed from the ignition and the 
driver’s door is opened. 
GAUGES 
Base instrument cluster gauges 
40 
30 
50 
60 
60 70 
80 100 120 
80 
90 
140 
160 
180 
100 
110 
120 
4 
5 
3 
2 
RPMX1000 
H L H 
6 
BRAKE 
! P 
C 
E F 
20 
10 
40 
20 
7 
1 
MPH km/h 
FUEL DOOR 
THEFT 
SELECT/RESET 
LOW 
FUEL 
0 0 0 0 0 0.0 
O/D 
OFF 
AIR 
BAG 
SERVICE 
ENGINE 
SOON 
ABS 
Optional instrument cluster gauges 
L 
H 
CHECK 
FUEL 
CAP 
50 
40 
60 
80 
70 90 
100120 140 
80 
100 
160 
110 
120 
180 
200 
220 
240 
4 
5 
6 
3 
2 
RPMX1000 
H H 
7 
BRAKE 
! P 
0 
SELECT/RESET 
. 
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
F 
30 
20 
60 
40 
10 
20 
130 
140 
150 
8 
1 
H 
MPH km/h 
FUEL DOOR 
THEFT 
LOW 
FUEL 
O/D 
OFF 
AIR 
BAG 
SERVICE 
ENGINE 
SOON 
ABS 
L 
L 
CHECK 
FUEL 
CAP 
Engine coolant temperature gauge 
Indicates the 
temperature of the 
C H 
engine coolant. At 
normal operating 
temperature, the needle remains within the normal 
area (the area between the “H” and “C”). If it enters 
the red section, the engine is overheating. Stop the 
vehicle as soon as safely possible, switch off the 
engine immediately and let the engine cool. Refer to 
Engine coolant in the Maintenance and 
specifications chapter. 
15
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap 
while the engine is running or hot. Steam 
and scalding liquid from a hot cooling system can 
burn you badly. 
This gauge indicates the temperature of the engine 
coolant, not the coolant level. If the coolant is not at 
its proper level the gauge indication will not be 
accurate. 
Engine oil pressure gauge 
Indicates engine oil 
pressure. At normal 
L H 
operating temperature, 
the needle will be in 
the normal range (the area between the “L” and 
“H”); if the needle goes below the normal range, 
stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and 
switch off the engine immediately. Check the oil 
level. Add oil if needed (refer to Engine oil in the 
Maintenance and specifications chapter). If the oil 
level is correct, have your vehicle checked at your 
dealership or by a qualified technician. 
Battery voltage gauge 
Indicates battery 
voltage. If the pointer 
L H 
moves and stays 
outside the normal 
operating range, have the vehicle’s electrical system 
checked as soon as possible. 
Fuel gauge 
Displays approximately 
how much fuel is in the 
F 
fuel tank. The fuel 
gauge may vary slightly 
when the vehicle is in motion or on a grade. 
Instrument Cluster 
16
Instrument Cluster 
When refueling the vehicle from empty indication, 
the amount of fuel that can be added will be less 
than the advertised capacity due to the reserve fuel. 
The FUEL DOOR icon and arrow indicates which 
side of the vehicle the fuel filler door is located. 
Speedometer 
Indicates the current vehicle speed. 
² Base instrument 
cluster gauge 
² Optional instrument 
cluster gauge 
Odometer 
Registers the total 
kilometers (miles) of 
the vehicle. 
Tachometer 
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per 
minute. 
Driving with your tachometer pointer at the top of 
the scale or in the red zone may damage the engine. 
17
² Base instrument 
cluster gauge 
² Optional instrument 
cluster gauge 
Trip odometer 
Registers the 
4 
kilometers (miles) of 
3 
5 
RPMX1000 
2 
6 
individual journeys. 
Press and release the 
1 
7 
reset button until a ’T’ 
0 
8 
SELECT/RESET 
appears in the display 
0 0 0 0 0 0 . 
0 
(this represents the 
trip mode). Press and hold the button for three 
seconds to reset. 
Instrument Cluster 
18
Entertainment Systems 
PREMIUM AM/FM STEREO/CASSETTE/SINGLE 
CD 
DISC 
FM 1 
AMC 
BL RF 
EJ TAPE 
CD 
DOLBY B NR 
ST 
SCAN BASS TREB SEL BAL 
VOL PUSH ON 
AM FM 
SEEK 
TUNE 
REW FF 
FADE 
SIDE 1-2 COMP SHUFFLE 
1 2 3 4 5 6 
Volume/power control 
Press the control to 
turn the audio system 
on or off. 
Audio power can also 
be turned on by 
pressing the AM/FM 
select control or the TAPE/CD select control. 
Turn control to raise or 
lower volume. 
EJ 
MUTE 
AUTO 
CLK 
VOL - PUSH ON 
VOL - PUSH ON 
If the volume is set above a certain level and the 
ignition is turned off, the volume will come back on 
at a “nominal” listening level when the ignition 
switch is turned back on. 
Bass adjust 
The bass adjust control 
allows you to increase 
BASS TREB 
or decrease the audio 
system’s bass output. 
19
Entertainment Systems 
Press the BASS control then press: 
² to decrease the 
bass output and 
² to increase the 
bass output. 
Treble adjust 
The treble adjust 
control allows you to 
increase or decrease 
the audio system’s treble output. 
Press the TREB control then press: 
² to decrease the 
treble output and 
² to increase the 
treble output. 
Speaker balance adjust 
Speaker sound 
distribution can be 
adjusted between the 
right and left speakers. 
Press the BAL control then press: 
² to shift sound to 
the left and 
² to shift sound to 
the right. 
Speaker fade adjust 
Speaker sound can be 
adjusted between the 
front and rear 
speakers. 
BASS TREB 
BAL FADE 
BAL FADE 
20
Entertainment Systems 
Press the FADE control then press: 
² to shift the 
sound to the front 
and 
² to shift the sound to the rear. 
Seek function 
The seek function control works in radio, tape or CD 
mode. 
Seek function in radio mode 
² Press to find the 
next listenable 
station down the 
frequency band. 
² Press to find the next listenable station up 
the frequency band. 
Seek function in tape mode 
² Press to listen to the previous selection on 
the tape. 
² Press to listen to the next selection on the 
tape. 
Seek function for CD or CD changer 
(if equipped) 
² Press to seek to 
the previous track of 
the current disc. If a 
selection has been playing for three seconds or 
more and you press , the CD changer will 
replay that selection from the beginning. 
² Press to seek forward to the next track of the 
current disc. After the last track has been 
completed, the first track of the current disc will 
automatically replay. 
21
Scan function 
The scan function 
SCAN 
works in radio, tape or 
CD mode. 
Scan function in radio mode 
Press the SCAN control to hear a brief sampling of 
all listenable stations on the frequency band. Press 
the control again to stop the scan mode. 
Scan function in tape mode 
Press the SCAN control to hear a short sampling of 
all selections on the tape. (The tape scans in a 
forward direction. At the end of the tape’s first side, 
direction automatically reverses to the opposite side 
of the tape.) To stop on a particular selection, press 
the control again. 
Scan function in CD or CD changer mode 
(if equipped) 
Press the SCAN control to hear a short sampling of 
all selections on the CD. (The CD scans in a forward 
direction, wrapping back to the first track at the end 
of the CD.) To stop on a particular selection, press 
the control again. 
AM/FM select 
The AM/FM select 
control works in radio, 
AM FM 
tape and CD modes. 
AM/FM select in radio mode 
This control allows you to select AM or FM 
frequency bands. Press the control to switch 
between AM, FM1 or FM2 memory preset stations. 
AM/FM select in tape mode 
Press this control to stop tape play and begin radio 
play. 
AM/FM select in CD or CD changer mode 
(if equipped) 
Press this control to stop CD play and begin radio 
play. 
Entertainment Systems 
22
Entertainment Systems 
Radio station memory preset 
The radio is equipped with six station memory 
preset controls. These controls can be used to select 
up to six preset AM stations and twelve FM stations 
(six in FM1 and six in FM2). 
Setting memory preset stations 
1. Select the frequency 
band with the AM/FM 
AM FM 
select control. 
2. Select a station. Refer to Tune adjust or Seek 
function for more information on selecting a station. 
3. Press and hold a memory preset control until the 
sound returns, indicating the station is held in 
memory of the control you selected. 
Autoset memory preset 
Autoset allows you to set strong radio stations 
without losing your original manually set preset 
stations. This feature is helpful on trips when you 
travel between cities with different radio stations. 
Starting autoset memory preset 
1. Select a frequency using the AM/FM select 
controls. 
2. Press the control. 
3. When the first six 
AUTO 
strong stations are 
filled, the station stored 
in memory preset 
CLK 
control 1 will start 
playing. 
If there are less than six strong stations available on 
the frequency band, the remaining memory preset 
controls will all store the last strong station 
available. 
23
These stations are temporarily stored in the memory 
preset controls (until deactivated) and are accessed 
in the same manner as your original presets. 
To deactivate autoset and return to your audio 
system’s manually set memory stations, press the 
AUTO control again. 
Setting the clock 
To set the hour, press 
and hold the CLK 
control and press 
SEEK: 
² to decrease 
hours and 
² to increase 
hours. 
To set the minute, 
press and hold the CLK 
control and press 
TUNE: 
² to decrease 
minutes and 
² to increase 
minutes. 
AUTO 
CLK 
AUTO 
CLK 
If your vehicle has a separate clock, (other than the 
digital radio display), the CLK control will not 
function in the above manner. 
The CLK control will 
allow you to switch 
AUTO 
between media display 
mode (radio station, 
stereo information, 
CLK 
etc.) and clock display 
mode (time). When in 
Entertainment Systems 
24
Entertainment Systems 
clock mode, the media information will display for 10 
seconds, when the radio is turned on, and then 
revert to clock information. Any time that the media 
is changed, (new radio station, etc.), the media 
information will again display for 10 seconds before 
reverting back to the clock. In media mode, the 
media information will always be displayed. 
Tune adjust 
The tune control works in radio mode. 
Tune adjust in radio mode 
² Press to move to 
the next frequency 
down the band 
(whether or not a listenable station is located 
there). Hold the control to move through the 
frequencies quickly. 
² Press to move to the next frequency up the 
band (whether or not a listenable station is 
located there). Hold for quick movement. 
Tape/CD select 
² To begin tape play 
TAPE CD 
(with a tape loaded 
into the audio 
system) while in the radio or CD mode, press the 
TAPE control. Press again during rewind or fast 
forward to stop the rewind or fast forward 
function. 
² To begin CD play (if 
TAPE CD 
CD(s) are loaded), 
press the CD 
control. The first track of the disc will begin 
playing. If returning from radio or tape mode, CD 
play will begin where it stopped last. 
Press the CD control to toggle between single CD 
and CD changer (if equipped). 
25
Rewind 
The rewind control 
works in tape and CD 
modes. 
² In tape mode, radio play will continue until 
rewind is stopped (with the TAPE control) or the 
beginning of the tape is reached. 
² In CD mode, pressing the REW control rewinds 
the CD within the current track. 
Fast forward 
The fast forward 
control works in tape 
and CD modes. 
² In the tape mode, tape direction will automatically 
reverse when the end of the tape is reached. 
² In CD mode, pressing the FF control fast forwards 
the CD within the current track. 
Tape direction select 
Press to play the 
alternate side of the 
tape. 
Eject function 
Press the EJ control to 
stop and eject a tape. 
Press the EJ control to 
stop and eject a CD. 
REW 
1 
FF 
2 
SIDE 1-2 
3 
EJ 
EJ 
Entertainment Systems 
26
Entertainment Systems 
DolbyT noise reduction 
Dolbyt noise reduction 
operates in tape mode. 
4 
Dolbyt noise reduction 
reduces the amount of 
hiss and static during tape playback. 
Press the control to activate (and deactivate) 
the Dolbyt noise reduction. 
Dolbyt noise reduction is manufactured under 
license from Dolbyt Laboratories Licensing 
Corporation. “Dolbyt” and the double-D symbol 
are registered trademarks of Dolbyt Laboratories 
Licensing Corporation. 
Compression adjust 
Compression adjust 
COMP 
brings soft and loud 
5 
CD passages together 
for a more consistent listening level. 
Press the COMP control to activate and deactivate 
compression adjust. 
Shuffle feature 
The shuffle feature 
SHUFFLE 
operates in CD mode 
6 
and plays all tracks on 
the current disc in random order. If equipped with 
the CD changer, the shuffle feature continues to the 
next disc after all tracks on the current disc are 
played. 
Press to start this feature. Random order play will 
continue until the control is pressed again. 
27
Entertainment Systems 
Mute mode 
Press the MUTE 
control to mute the 
playing media. Press 
the MUTE control 
again to return to the 
playing media. 
MACHT MP3 MUSIC SYSTEM 
1. ON/OFF and volume 
control 
2. AM/FM control 
3. Bass control 
4. Treble control 
5. Fade control 
6. Balance control 
7. Seek control 
8. Scan control 
9. Clock control 
10. Tune/Directory 
control 
EJ 
MUTE 
11. CD control 
12. MP3 directory control 
13. Eject control 
14. CD rewind control 
15. CD fast forward 
control 
16. Shuffle control 
17. Compression control 
18. Track control 
19. Repeat control 
28
Entertainment Systems 
Volume/power control 
Press the control to 
turn the audio system 
on or off. 
Turn the control to 
raise or lower the 
volume. 
If the volume is set above a certain level and the 
ignition is turned off, the volume will come back on 
at a “nominal” listening level when the ignition 
switch is turned back on. 
AM/FM select 
The AM/FM select control works in radio mode. 
AM/FM select in radio mode 
This control allows you 
to select AM or FM 
frequency bands. Press 
the control to switch 
between AM, FM1 or FM2 memory preset stations. 
Bass adjust 
The bass adjust control 
allows you to increase 
or decrease the audio 
system’s bass output. 
Treble adjust 
The treble adjust 
control allows you to 
increase or decrease 
the audio system’s 
treble output. 
29
Entertainment Systems 
Speaker fade adjust 
Speaker sound can be 
adjusted between the 
front and rear 
speakers. 
Speaker balance adjust 
Speaker sound 
distribution can be 
adjusted between the 
right and left speakers. 
MP3 functions 
Your audio system is equipped with MP3 capability 
which allows you to listen to songs in MP3 flat file 
mode and MP3 directory mode. 
To engage MP3 flat file mode, insert an MP3 disc. If 
an MP3 disc is already present in the player, press 
the CD control. The MP3 icon will display while the 
player is in MP3 mode. 
While in MP3 flat file 
mode, press the MP3 
DIR control to enter 
into MP3 directory mode. The MP3 icon and the DIR 
icon will display while the player is in directory 
mode. 
Your MACHt MP3 player is also equipped with an 
anti-shock buffer for MP3 discs. 
MP3 file directory structure 
The MACHt MP3 music system recognizes MP3 disc 
file and directory (folder) structure as follows: 
² There are two different modes for MP3 disc 
playback: MP3 flat file mode (default) and MP3 
directory mode. 
² MP3 flat file mode ignores any directory structure 
present on the MP3 disc. The player sequentially 
30
Entertainment Systems 
numbers each MP3 track on the disc (denoted by 
the .mp3 file extension) from T001 to T255. 
² MP3 directory mode represents a directory 
structure consisting of one level of directories 
(folders). The CD player sequentially numbers all 
MP3 tracks on the disc (denoted by .mp3 
extension) and all directories containing MP3 
files, from 01–01 to 99–99. The first two digits 
denote the directory number and the last two 
digits denote the track number within that 
directory. 
² Creating discs with only one level of 
subdirectories will help with navigation through 
the disc files. 
Seek function 
The seek function control works in radio, CD, MP3 
flat file mode and MP3 directory modes. 
Seek function in radio mode 
² Press to find the 
next listenable 
station down the 
frequency band. 
² Press to find the 
next listenable station up the frequency band. 
Seek function in CD, MP3 flat file and MP3 
directory modes 
² Press to select 
and play the 
previous track on 
the disc. If the 
current track is the 
first track on the disc, pressing will select the 
last track on the disc. 
² Press to select and play the next track on the 
disc. If the current track is the last track on the 
disc, pressing will select the first track on the 
disc. 
31
Entertainment Systems 
Press and hold the SEEK control to quickly seek 
through all tracks in MP3 flat file mode or all tracks 
in the current MP3 directory. 
Note: If a track has been playing for three seconds 
or more and you press on the SEEK control, the 
player will replay that track from the beginning. 
Scan function 
The scan function works in radio, CD, MP3 flat file 
and MP3 directory modes. 
Scan function in radio mode 
Press SCN to engage 
scan mode and to hear 
a brief sampling of all 
listenable stations on 
the frequency band. When the top of the band is 
reached, the tuner will continue to scan from the 
lowest frequency upward. 
Press SCN again to disengage scan mode. 
Scan function in CD mode 
Press SCN to engage 
scan mode and to hear 
a brief sampling of all 
tracks on the disc. The 
track number in the display will blink while the scan 
function is enabled. When the end of the disc is 
reached, the player will continue to scan from the 
first track forward. 
Press SCN again to disengage scan mode. 
Scan function in MP3 flat file mode 
The scan function in MP3 flat file mode allows you 
to briefly audition all tracks on the MP3 disc. 
Press SCN to engage 
scan mode and to hear 
a brief sampling of all 
tracks on the MP3 disc. 
The track number in the display will blink while the 
32
Entertainment Systems 
scan function is enabled. When the end of the disc is 
reached, the player will continue to scan from the 
first track forward. 
Press SCN again to disengage scan mode. 
Scan function in MP3 directory mode 
The scan function in MP3 directory mode allows you 
to briefly audition all tracks within the current 
directory on the MP3 disc. 
Press SCN to engage 
scan mode and to hear 
a brief sampling of all 
tracks in the current 
directory. The track number in the display will blink 
while the scan function is enabled. When the last 
track is reached, the player will continue to scan 
from the first track in the current directory forward. 
Press SCN again to disengage scan mode. 
To scan tracks in another directory, press or 
on the TUNE DIR control to select the desired 
directory. The scan function will be disabled when 
you change directories. 
Press the SCN control again to enable the scan 
function for the selected directory. 
Radio station memory preset 
The radio is equipped with six station memory 
preset controls. These controls can be used to select 
up to six preset AM stations and twelve FM stations 
(six in FM1 and six in FM2). 
33
Entertainment Systems 
Setting memory preset stations 
1. Select the frequency 
band with the AM/FM 
select control. 
2. Select a station. Refer to Tune adjust or Seek 
function for more information on selecting a station. 
3. Press and hold a memory preset control until the 
sound returns, indicating the station is held in 
memory on the control you selected. 
Accessing memory preset stations 
1. Select the desired 
frequency band with 
the AM/FM select 
control. 
2. Press the preset control which contains the 
desired station frequency. The desired station will 
begin to play. 
Setting the clock 
To set the hour, press 
and hold the CLK 
control while 
performing the 
following functions: 
34
Entertainment Systems 
² Press on the 
SEEK control to 
decrease the hours. 
² Press on the 
SEEK control to 
increase the hours. 
To set the minutes, press and hold the CLK control 
while performing the following functions: 
² Press on the 
TUNE DIR control to 
decrease the 
minutes. 
² Press on the TUNE DIR control to increase 
the minutes. 
Release the CLK control to save the clock settings. 
Press the CLK control again to return the display to 
radio mode. 
Tune adjust 
The tune adjust control works in radio mode. 
Tune adjust in radio mode 
² Press to move to 
the next frequency 
down the band. Hold 
for quick movement through the frequencies. 
² Press to move to the next frequency up the 
band. Hold for quick movement through the 
frequencies. When the top of the band is reached, 
the tuner will continue to select from the lowest 
frequency upward. 
When a radio frequency is in tune, the ST icon will 
appear in the display for stereo broadcasts. 
CD select 
The CD select function allows you to play CDs. 
35
Entertainment Systems 
Playing a CD 
² If a CD is already 
loaded, press the CD 
control. CD play will 
begin where it 
stopped last. 
² If a CD is not already loaded, insert the CD into 
the system. CD will briefly appear in the display 
and then the first track on the disc will begin 
playing. 
Playing an MP3 disc in MP3 flat file mode and 
MP3 directory mode 
² Insert an MP3 disc into the player. CD and LOAD 
will appear in the display. Initialization may take 
up to two minutes for discs containing complex 
file directories. 
² The display will briefly show the total number of 
tracks on the disc as TXXX (XXX= number of 
tracks). 
² If an MP3 disc is 
already present in 
the player, press the 
CD control to begin 
play. 
² Press the MP3 DIR 
control to engage 
MP3 directory mode, 
if desired. The track number format on the 
display will change from TXXX (XXX=current 
track number) to XX-XX (directory —track 
number). 
Note: If the car’s ignition is turned off and on again, 
play will begin at the beginning of the last song 
played. If the radio was powered off by the VOL 
control, play will start where it last left off. 
² To stop MP3 disc 
play, eject the disc 
or press the AM/FM 
control. The player 
will return to radio mode. 
36
Entertainment Systems 
Selecting a directory in MP3 directory mode 
The TUNE DIR control allows you to select a 
different directory to play on the MP3 disc. 
² Press on the 
TUNE DIR control to 
advance to the next 
directory on the MP3 disc. If the current directory 
is the last directory on the disc, pressing will 
select the first directory on the disc. Press and 
hold for fast selection. 
² Press on TUNE DIR to revert to the previous 
directory on the MP3 disc. If the current directory 
is the first directory on the disc, pressing will 
select the last directory on the disc. Press and 
hold for fast selection. 
Eject function 
Press the control to 
stop and eject a disc. 
If a disc is ejected and 
not removed from the player, the player will 
automatically reload the disc and return to radio 
mode. This feature will operate when the ignition is 
on or off. 
Rewind 
The rewind control works in CD mode. It is not 
enabled in MP3 flat file mode or MP3 directory 
mode. 
Press and hold the 
rewind control until the 
desired selection point 
is reached. The display 
will show the elapsed time for each track as you 
reverse through it. When the beginning of the disc is 
reached, the first track on the disc will begin to play. 
Release the rewind control again to disengage 
rewind mode. 
37
Entertainment Systems 
Fast forward 
The fast forward control works in CD mode. It is not 
enabled in MP3 flat file mode or MP3 directory 
mode. 
Press and hold the 
control until the 
desired selection point 
is reached. The display will show the elapsed time 
for each track as you fast-forward through it. When 
the end of the disc is reached, the player will 
continue fast-forwarding from the first track forward. 
Release the control to disengage fast-forwarding. 
Shuffle feature 
The shuffle feature works in CD mode, MP3 flat file 
mode and MP3 directory mode. 
Shuffle feature in CD mode 
The shuffle feature plays all tracks on the current 
disc in random order. 
² Press the SHUFFLE 
control to engage 
random play. SHF 
and then ON will 
briefly appear in the display. The player will then 
begin random play. 
² To select another 
random track on the 
disc, press 
or on the SEEK 
control. 
² Press the SCN 
control to scan 
through random 
tracks. The track 
number will flash in the display. The shuffle 
feature will remain enabled. 
Press the SHUFFLE control again to disable the 
shuffle function. SHF and then OFF will briefly 
appear in the display. 
38
Entertainment Systems 
Shuffle feature in MP3 flat file mode 
The shuffle feature in MP3 flat file mode allows you 
to play all the tracks on the MP3 disc in random 
order. 
² Press the SHUFFLE 
control to engage 
random play. SHF 
and then ON will 
briefly appear in the display. The player will then 
begin random play. 
² To select another 
random track on the 
disc, press 
or on the SEEK 
control. 
² Press SCN to scan 
through random 
tracks. The track 
number will flash in 
the display. The shuffle function will remain 
enabled. 
² Press SHUFFLE 
again to disengage 
the shuffle feature. 
SHF and then OFF 
will briefly display and the current track will 
continue to play. 
Shuffle feature in MP3 directory mode 
The shuffle feature in MP3 directory mode allows 
you to play all the tracks in the current directory in 
random order. 
² Press the SHUFFLE 
control to engage 
random play in the 
current directory. 
SHF and then ON will briefly appear in the 
display. The player will then begin random play. 
39
Entertainment Systems 
² To select another 
random track in the 
current directory, 
press or on 
the SEEK control. 
² Press the SCN 
control to scan 
through random 
tracks in the current 
directory. The track number will flash in the 
display. The shuffle feature will remain enabled. 
To shuffle tracks in 
another directory, 
press or on the 
TUNE DIR control to select the desired directory. 
The shuffle function still remains enabled. 
Press the SHUFFLE control again to disengage the 
SHUFFLE feature. SHUF and OFF will briefly 
display and the current track will continue to play. 
Compression feature 
The compression feature works in CD, MP3 flat file 
mode and MP3 directory mode. 
Compression adjust 
brings soft and loud CD 
passages together for a 
more consistent listening level. 
Press the COMP control to activate compression 
adjust. The compression icon (c) will illuminate in 
the display while the compression function is 
enabled. 
Press the COMP control again to disengage the 
feature. 
MACHT Track function 
The MACHt track function allows you to quickly 
search through a large number of tracks or 
directories on the MP3 disc. The function works in 
MP3 flat file mode and MP3 directory mode. 
40
Entertainment Systems 
Track function in MP3 flat file mode and MP3 
directory mode 
² Press the TRACK 
control. TRAC will 
appear in the 
display. 
² Rotate the volume 
control to advance 
or reverse through 
the tracks. 
The MP3 icon will blink in the display while the 
MACHt track function is enabled. 
When the desired track is reached, the selected 
track will begin play after a two second delay. 
To disengage the MACHt track function, press the 
TRACK control again. 
Repeat track function 
This function works in MP3 flat file mode or MP3 
directory mode and allows you repeat the current 
track on the MP3 disc. 
Repeat track function in MP3 flat file mode and 
MP3 directory mode. 
Press the REPEAT 
control to repeat the 
current track. The 
repeat icon will display 
and the current track will continue to repeat until 
the repeat function is disengaged. 
Press the REPEAT control again to disengage the 
feature. 
41
Entertainment Systems 
Error messages 
You may experience an error message for the 
following situations: 
² NO DISC when the CD control is pressed and 
there is not a CD present. 
² DISC ERR when there is a damaged or unreadable 
disc. Such as, data discs containing no .mp3 files, 
or for data discs containing more than 255 files or 
directories. 
² CD ERR for any other disc malfunction. 
Saving and naming MP3 files 
² Your MACHt MP3 music system supports discs 
containing up to 255 files in 255 directories. Discs 
containing more than 255 files will not play. 
² Always save MP3 files with the .mp3 extension. 
The player recognizes an MP3 file by the .mp3 
extension, so MP3 files saved with different 
extensions will not be played. Never save a 
non-MP3 file with the .mp3 extension as the 
file will not play properly and damage may 
occur to the player or your sound system. 
² The player supports multi session discs. However, 
be sure to import the previous session of the disc 
before you add new files. If you do not import the 
previous session, only the last session will be 
played. 
² When burning a disc, ensure that you 
close/finalize the disc before playback, or the disc 
may not play properly or an error message may 
appear. 
² The player supports DAM (Digital Automatic 
Music) discs. 
42
Entertainment Systems 
MACHT 460 SOUND SYSTEM RADIO 
(CD CHANGER COMPATIBLE) 
DISC SEEK REW FF 
TUNE 
SHUF DSP 
MUTE 
SCAN 
LOAD EJ 
BASS BAL 
TREB FADE 
PUSH ON 
AM CD 1 2 3 4 5 6 MENU 
FM 
MACHT 1000 SOUND SYSTEM RADIO 
(CD CHANGER COMPATIBLE) 
SEL 
MACH 1000T AUDIO SYSTEM 
Your vehicle may be equipped with the MACH 
1000t audio system. This system is equipped with a 
rack of amplifiers in the trunk of the vehicle. Do not 
store or rest items on the amplifier rack, as this 
could cause damage to the amplifiers and void your 
warranty. 
The MACH 1000t audio system is capable of 
producing very high sound pressure levels. For your 
43
Entertainment Systems 
listening comfort and protection, it is not 
recommended to listen to the MACH 1000t audio 
system at high volume levels for extended periods of 
time. 
Volume/power control 
Press the control to 
turn the audio system 
on or off. Turn the 
control to raise or 
lower volume. 
If the volume is set above a certain level and the 
ignition is turned off, the volume will come back on 
at a “nominal” listening level when the ignition 
switch is turned back on. 
Speed sensitive volume 
With this feature, radio volume changes 
automatically and slightly with vehicle speed to 
compensate for road and wind noise. 
The recommended level for speed sensitive volume 
is from level 1 through level 3. Level 0 turns the 
speed sensitive volume off and level 7 is the 
maximum setting. 
To engage the speed 
sensitive volume 
feature, press and hold 
the volume control for 
five seconds (with the radio on), then press: 
² to increase 
volume 
compensation. 
² to decrease or 
shut off the volume 
compensation. 
PUSH ON 
PUSH ON 
SEL 
The selected level will appear in the display. 
44
Entertainment Systems 
Bass adjust 
The bass adjust control 
BASS 
allows you to increase 
+ 
SEL 
or decrease the audio 
TREB 
system’s bass output. 
Press the BASS control. Use the SEL control to 
increase or decrease the amount of bass. 
Treble adjust 
The treble adjust 
BASS 
control allows you to 
+ 
SEL 
increase or decrease 
TREB 
the audio system’s 
treble output. 
Press the TREB control. Use the SEL control to 
increase or decrease the amount of treble. 
Speaker balance adjust 
Speaker sound 
BAL 
distribution can be 
+ SEL 
adjusted between the 
FADE 
right and left speakers. 
Press the BAL control. Use the SEL control to adjust 
the sound between the left and right speakers. 
Speaker fade adjust 
Speaker sound can be 
BAL 
adjusted between the 
+ SEL 
front and rear 
FADE 
speakers. 
Press the FADE control. Use the SEL control to 
adjust the sound between the front and rear 
speakers. 
MACH mode (if equipped) 
MACH mode is available with the MACH 1000 Sound 
System. This mode allows you to toggle between 
occupancy modes (DRIVER SEAT, ALL SEATS) and 
MACH 1000 mode. MACH 1000 mode engages the 
extra speakers and amplifiers that are included in 
this package. 
45
Entertainment Systems 
Press the MACH control 
to toggle between 
occupancy modes. 
Seek function 
The seek function works in radio or CD mode. 
Seek function in radio mode 
² Press to find the 
next listenable 
station down the 
frequency band. SEEK DOWN will display. 
² Press to find the next listenable station up 
the frequency band. SEEK UP will display. 
Seek function in CD mode 
² Press to seek to 
the previous track of 
the current disc. If 
the beginning of the disc is reached, the CD 
player seeks to the beginning of the last track on 
the current disc and begins playing. 
² Press to seek forward to the next track of the 
current disc. After the last track has been 
completed, the first track of the current disc will 
automatically replay. 
Scan function 
The scan function works 
in radio or CD mode. 
Scan function in radio mode 
Press the SCAN control to hear a brief sampling of 
all listenable stations on the frequency band. Press 
the SCAN control again to stop the scan mode. 
Scan function in CD mode 
Press the SCAN control to hear a short sampling of 
all selections on the CD. (The CD scans in a forward 
direction, wrapping back to the first track at the end 
of the CD.) To stop on a particular selection, press 
the control again. 
46
Entertainment Systems 
AM/FM select 
The AM/FM select 
AM control works in radio 
FM 
CD 
and CD modes. 
AM/FM select in radio mode 
This control allows you to select AM or FM 
frequency bands. Press the control to switch 
between AM, FM1 or FM2 memory preset stations. 
AM/FM select in CD mode 
Press this control to stop CD play and begin radio 
play. 
Radio station memory preset 
The radio is equipped with six station memory 
preset controls. These controls can be used to select 
up to six preset AM stations and twelve FM stations 
(six in FM1 and six in FM2). 
Setting memory preset stations 
1. Select the frequency band with the AM/FM select 
control. Press the AM/FM control to toggle between 
AM, FM1, or FM2. 
2. Press the SEEK control to access the next 
listenable station up or down the frequency band. 
Press the TUNE control to go up or down the 
listening band in individual increments. 
3. Select a station. Refer to Seek function for more 
information on selecting a station. 
4. Press and hold a memory preset control. The 
playing media will mute momentarily. When the 
sound returns, the station is held in memory on the 
control you selected. The display will read SAVED. 
Autostore 
Autostore allows you to set the strongest local radio 
stations without losing your original manually set 
47
Entertainment Systems 
preset stations. This feature is helpful on trips when 
you travel between cities with different radio 
stations. 
Starting autostore 
1. Press and momentarily hold the AM/FM control. 
2. AUTOSET will flash 
in the display as the 
frequency band is 
scrolled through. 
3. When the six strongest stations are filled, the 
station stored in memory preset control 1 will start 
playing. 
If there are fewer than six strong stations available 
on the frequency band, the remaining memory 
preset controls will all store the last strong station 
available. 
To deactivate autoset and return to your audio 
system’s manually set memory stations, press the 
AM/FM control again. 
Setting the clock 
Press the MENU 
control until SELECT 
HOUR or SELECT 
MINUTE is displayed. (The menu mode must be 
engaged to enable clock mode). 
Use the SEL control to 
manually set the time. 
² Press to 
increase 
hours/minutes. 
AM CD 
FM 
SEL 
² Press to decrease hours/minutes. 
Press the MENU control again to disengage the 
clock mode. 
Tune/disc adjust 
The tune control works in radio or CD mode. 
48
Entertainment Systems 
Tune adjust in radio mode 
² Press to move to 
DISC 
TUNE 
the next frequency 
down the band 
(whether or not a listenable station is located 
there). Hold the control to move through the 
frequencies quickly. 
² Press to move to the next frequency up the 
band (whether or not a listenable station is 
located there). Hold for quick movement. 
Disc adjust for CD mode 
² Press to select 
DISC 
TUNE 
the previous disc. 
(Play will begin on 
the first track of the disc unless shuffle mode is 
engaged.) Refer to Shuffle feature for more 
information. Hold the control to continue 
reversing through the discs. 
² Press to select the next disc. Hold the control 
to fast-forward through the remaining discs. 
CD select 
CD mode may be 
AM entered by pressing the 
FM 
CD 
CD control and the 
LOAD control. Load the CD into the audio system. 
The first track of the disc will begin playing. After 
that, CD play will begin where it stopped last. 
If an alternative CD is desired, press the 
corresponding preset control (1–6) of a loaded CD, 
or press the TUNE control to access the other 
loaded CDs. 
NO CD will display if the CD control is activated 
when there is not a CD present in the audio system. 
NO CD will illuminate in the display if the CD 
control and a present number (that is currently 
empty) are pressed. The system will play the next 
available disc. 
49
If your vehicle is equipped with a CD changer, 
pressing the CD control again will allow you to 
toggle between accessing the multi disc system and 
the CD changer. The display will read CD or CDDJ. 
Display description 
Six circles are always lit in the digital display. These 
signify the six CD slots in the audio system. When a 
disc is loaded into a particular slot (1–6), the 
number inside that specific circle lights. If the circle 
is empty, there is no CD in that particular slot. 
Rewind 
The rewind control 
REW FF 
works in CD modes. 
Press and hold the 
REW control until the desired selection is reached. If 
the beginning of the disc is reached, the CD will 
begin play at the first track. Release the control to 
disengage rewind mode. 
When in rewind mode, your audio system will 
automatically lower the volume level of the playing 
media. 
Fast forward 
The fast forward 
REW FF 
control works in CD 
modes. 
Press and hold the FF control until the desired 
selection is reached. If the end of the disc is 
reached, the CD will return to the first track. 
Release the control to disengage fast forward mode. 
When in fast forward mode, your audio system will 
automatically lower the volume level of the playing 
media. 
Entertainment Systems 
50
Entertainment Systems 
Load 
The load feature allows 
LOAD 
you to load single CDs 
into the player internal 
to the radio. 
This six disc CD player is equipped with a CD 
door. Compact discs should only be inserted 
into the player after the CD door has been 
opened by the player. Do not attempt to force 
the door open. Compact discs should only be 
loaded by pressing the LOAD control. 
Press the LOAD control. (You can choose which slot 
will be loaded by pressing the desired preset 
number. If you do not choose a slot, the system will 
choose the next available one.) Wait until the CD 
door opens. Load the CD into the player. LOADING 
CD# is displayed. When the CD has been loaded, the 
door will close and the CD will begin to play. For 
example, to load a CD into slot 2, press the LOAD 
control and then press preset 2. 
Auto load 
This feature allows you 
LOAD 
to autoload up to 6 
discs into the multi 
disc CD player internal to the radio. 
Press and hold the LOAD control until AUTOLOAD 
# is displayed. The CD door will open. Load the 
desired discs, one at a time. The CD is loaded into 
position and the audio system will display CD#. Each 
time the CD door opens, INSERT CD# is displayed. 
The door will close and the player will move to the 
next slot after each disc has been loaded. The 
process is repeated until all 6 slots are full. The 
audio system plays the last CD loaded and the 
display is updated. If some slots are already full and 
autoload is activated, the system will fill all empty 
slots. 
51
Eject 
Press the EJ control to 
EJ 
stop and eject a CD. 
You can choose which 
CD will be ejected by pressing the EJ control and 
the desired preset number (1–6). For example, to 
eject CD 2, press the EJ control and then press the 
preset 2 control. If you do not choose a specific CD, 
the player will eject the current CD. 
If a CD is ejected and not removed from the door of 
the CD player, the player will automatically reload 
the CD. This feature may be used when the ignition 
is ON or OFF. 
Auto eject 
Press and momentarily 
EJ 
hold the EJ control to 
engage auto eject. All 
CDs which are present in the player will be ejected 
one at a time. If a CD is ejected and not removed 
from the door of the CD player, the player will 
automatically reload the CD. This feature may be 
used when the ignition is ON or OFF. 
Shuffle feature 
Press the SHUF control 
until the desired 
shuffle mode is 
displayed. The audio system will then engage the 
desired shuffle mode. 
When engaged, the shuffle feature has two different 
modes: SHUFFLE DISC and SHUFFLE TRK. 
SHUFFLE DISC randomly plays tracks from all the 
discs presently in the audio system. 
SHUFFLE TRK plays all the tracks on the current 
disc in random order. 
Entertainment Systems 
52
Entertainment Systems 
Compression feature (if equipped) 
The compression 
feature operates in CD 
mode and brings soft 
and loud CD passages 
together for a more 
consistent listening level. 
On Audiophile audios, press the MENU control until 
compression status is displayed. Press the SEL 
control to enable the compression feature when 
COMP OFF is displayed. Press the SEL control again 
to disable the feature when COMP ON is displayed. 
On Premium audios, 
press the COMP 
control until COMP ON 
is displayed. 
Menu mode 
The MENU control 
allows you to access 
many different features 
within your audio system. There are three sets of 
menus available depending upon which mode or 
feature is activated. 
While in FM mode, two menus are available. If RDS 
is turned OFF, you can access the following: 
² SELECT HOURS — Refer to Setting the clock. 
² SELECT MINUTES — Refer to Setting the clock. 
² RDS OFF — Refer to Radio data system feature. 
If RDS is turned ON, you can access the following: 
² TRAFFIC ON/OFF-Refer to Traffic 
announcements. 
MENU + SEL 
² FIND type-Refer to Program type. 
² SHOW (NAME, TYPE, NONE)- Refer to Radio 
data system feature. 
² RDS ON— Refer to Radio data system feature. 
53
Entertainment Systems 
² SELECT HOURS — Refer to Setting the clock. 
² SELECT MINUTES —Refer to Setting the clock. 
When in CD mode, you can access: SELECT HOURS, 
SELECT MINUTES or COMP ON/OFF. 
SELECT HOURS, SELECT MINUTES— Allows you 
to adjust the hours and minutes. Refer to Setting 
the clock. 
TRAFFIC ON/OFF— Traffic announcements can be 
programmed as local or distant. Refer to Traffic 
announcements. 
RDS ON/OFF— This feature allows your audio 
system to receive text information from 
RDS-equipped FM radio stations. Refer to Radio 
Data System feature. 
FIND type — Allows you to select your desired FM 
program type and search for that selection. 
SHOW — Allows you to select from NAME (displays 
the name of the radio station), TYPE (displays the 
RDS program type: rock, jazz, etc.), or NONE 
(deactivates the RDS display). 
Radio data system (RDS) feature 
This feature allows 
your audio system to 
receive text 
information from 
RDS-equipped FM 
radio stations. 
To activate RDS: 
² When in FM mode, press the MENU control until 
RDS OFF displays. 
² Press the SEL control to engage this feature 
(RDS ON). 
MENU + SEL 
54
Entertainment Systems 
RDS features: 
Once the RDS feature is on, press the MENU control 
to scroll through the following selections: 
Traffic announcements 
This feature allows you to hear traffic 
announcements while in CD mode. These 
announcements are broadcast by traffic capable RDS 
stations. 
When in this mode, traffic announcements will 
interrupt radio and CD play. 
² Press the MENU control until TRAFFIC is 
displayed. 
² Press the SEL control to engage the feature. The 
display will read TRAFFIC ON. 
This feature also allows you to control the volume of 
traffic announcements. With the display reading 
TRAFFIC ON, adjust the volume using the volume 
control to the desired level. The volume level will 
show at the bottom of the display. Interrupting 
traffic announcements will be at the selected volume 
level. 
To disengage the feature, press the MENU control 
until TRAFFIC ON displays. Press the SEL control. 
The display will read TRAFFIC OFF. 
Traffic announcements are not available in 
most U.S. markets. 
Program type 
This feature allows you to search for RDS stations 
selectively by their program type. 
Press the MENU 
control until FIND 
MENU + SEL 
program type is 
displayed. 
55
Entertainment Systems 
Use the SEL control to select the program type. 
With the feature on, use the SEEK or SCAN control 
to find the desired program type from the following 
selections: 
² Classic 
² Country 
² Info 
² Jazz 
² Oldies 
² R & B 
² Religious 
² Rock 
² Soft 
² Top 40 
Show 
This feature allows you 
to select the type of 
MENU + SEL 
RDS broadcast 
information the radio 
will regularly show in 
the display. 
With RDS activated, 
press the MENU 
MENU + SEL 
control until SHOW is 
displayed. 
Use the SEL control to select TYPE (displays the 
RDS program type: rock, jazz, etc), NAME (displays 
the name of the radio station) or NONE (deactivates 
the RDS display). 
Digital signal processing 
The digital signal processing (DSP) feature allows 
you to change the signal mode to suit your listening 
tastes. 
Press the DSP control 
to access the DSP 
DSP + SEL 
menu. 
56
Entertainment Systems 
Use the SEL control to select the desired signal 
mode (the selected mode will appear in the display). 
The following can be selected: 
² DSP 
OFF—disengages 
the feature 
² STADIUM—outdoor 
SEL 
stadium with a capacity of about 30 000 
² CHURCH—church with a high vault 
² HALL—rectangular concert hall capacity of about 
2 000 
² JAZZ CLUB—jazz club with clearly reflected 
sounds 
² NEWS—”voice-only” type of sound with a limited 
audio band 
Press the DSP control again to access the occupancy 
modes. Use the SEL control to optimize the sound 
based upon the occupants in the vehicle. 
The following occupancy modes can be selected for 
the MACH 460 Sound System: 
² ALL SEATS 
² DRIVER SEAT 
² REAR SEATS 
The following occupancy modes can be selected for 
the MACH 1000 Sound System: 
² ALL SEATS 
² DRIVER SEAT 
² MACH 1000 
MACH 1000 mode raises the bass response of the 
trunk mounted subwoofers. 
Mute mode 
Press the control to 
mute the playing 
media. Press the 
control again to return to the playing media. 
57
Entertainment Systems 
CD CARE 
CD units are designed to play commercially 
pressed 12cm audio compact discs only. Due to 
technical incompatibility, certain recordable 
and re-recordable compact discs may not 
function correctly when used in Ford CD 
players. Irregular shaped CDs, CDs with a 
scratch protection film attached, and CDs with 
homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not 
be inserted into the CD player. The label may 
peel and cause the CD to become jammed. It is 
recommended that homemade CDs be identified 
with permanent marker rather than adhesive 
labels. Please contact your dealer for further 
information. 
TROUBLESHOOTING THE CD PLAYER 
(IF EQUIPPED) 
The laser beam used in the compact disc 
player is harmful to the eyes. Do not 
attempt to disassemble the case. 
If sound skips: 
² You may be traveling on a rough road, playing 
badly scratched discs or the disc may be dirty. 
Skipping will not scratch the discs or damage the 
player. 
If your changer does not work, it may be that: 
² A disc is already loaded where you want to insert 
a disc. 
² The disc is inserted with the label surface 
downward. 
² The disc is dusty or defective. 
² The player’s internal temperature is above 60°C 
(140°F). Allow the player to cool down before 
operating. 
² A disc with format and dimensions not within 
industry standards is inserted. 
58
Entertainment Systems 
MP3 DISC QUALITY FACTORS 
The MACHt MP3 music system is designed for use 
with CD-DA (regular audio discs), CD-R and CD-RW 
discs. Discs must comply with ISO 9660 and Joliet 
standards. 
Several factors can effect disc playback quality: 
² Disc capacity — Each disc contains about 650 MB 
of storage capacity. We do not recommend using 
high capacity discs containing 700MB of storage. 
² Disc type — Some CD-RW discs may operate 
inconsistently and may cause an error message to 
appear. We recommend burning MP3 files onto 
CD-R discs. 
² Disc finalization — The disc may be left open for 
the purpose of adding sessions to it at a later 
time, but be sure to close each session or the disc 
will not play. 
² Bit rate — The player supports bit rates from 
56–320 kbps, as well as variable bit rate MP3 files, 
but lower bit rates will have a noticeable effect on 
sound quality and are recommended only for 
speech or low fidelity music material. We 
recommend that you encode MP3 files using a 
high quality encoder. 
² PC configuration — Encoding MP3 files requires 
intensive use of your computer’s resources. Follow 
the PC configuration recommendations of the 
encoder software vendor. We recommend that you 
avoid running other software applications on your 
PC during MP3 encoding to avoid undesirable 
noise and distortion. 
CLEANING COMPACT DISCS 
Inspect all discs for contamination before playing. If 
necessary, clean discs only with an approved CD 
cleaner and wipe from the center out to the edge. 
Do not use circular motion. 
59
Entertainment Systems 
CD, MP3 AND CD PLAYER CARE 
² Handle discs by their edges only. Never touch the 
playing surface. 
² Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat 
sources for extended periods of time. 
² Do not insert more than one disc into the slot of 
the CD player (if equipped). 
² Always store discs out of direct sunlight. 
Excessive heat may damage or warp discs. 
² Use care when handling and playing CD-R and 
CD-RW discs, which are more susceptible to 
damage from heat, light and stress than are 
regular CDs. 
² Always insert and remove a disc by holding the 
disc flat, with the playing surface facing down, in 
order to prevent damage to the disc or the player. 
² Never insert any object other than a compact disc 
into the player, as doing so may damage the 
player and may cause injury to you. 
² Do not disassemble the player. The laser used in 
disc playback is extremely harmful to the eyes. 
CLEANING CASSETTE PLAYER (IF EQUIPPED) 
Clean the tape player head with a cassette cleaning 
cartridge after 10 to 12 hours of play in order to 
maintain the best sound and operation. 
60
Entertainment Systems 
CASSETTE AND CASSETTE PLAYER CARE 
² Use only cassettes that are 90 minutes long or 
less. 
² Do not expose tapes to direct sunlight, high 
humidity, extreme heat or extreme cold. Allow 
tapes that may have been exposed to extreme 
temperatures to reach a moderate temperature 
before playing. 
² Tighten very loose tapes by inserting a finger or 
pencil into the hole and turning the hub. 
² Remove loose labels before inserting tapes. 
² Do not leave tapes in the cassette player for a 
long time when not being played. 
RADIO FREQUENCY INFORMATION 
The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) 
and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications 
Commission(CRTC) establish the frequencies AM 
and FM stations may use for their broadcasts. 
Allowable frequencies are: 
AM 530, 540–1600, 1610 kHz 
FM 87.7, 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz 
Not all frequencies are used in a given area. 
61
Entertainment Systems 
RADIO RECEPTION FACTORS 
Three factors can affect radio reception: 
² Distance/strength. The further an FM signal 
travels, the weaker it is. The listenable range of 
the average FM station is approximately 40 km 
(24 miles). This range can be affected by “signal 
modulation.” Signal modulation is a process radio 
stations use to increase their strength/volume 
relative to other stations. 
² Terrain. Hills, mountains and tall buildings 
between your vehicle’s antenna and the radio 
station signal can cause FM reception problems. 
Static can be caused on AM stations by power 
lines, electric fences, traffic lights and 
thunderstorms. Moving away from an interfering 
structure (out of its “shadow”) returns your 
reception to normal. 
² Station overload. Weak signals are sometimes 
captured by stronger signals when you pass a 
broadcast tower. A stronger signal may 
temporarily overtake a weaker signal and play 
while the weak station frequency is displayed. 
The audio system automatically switches to single 
channel reception if it will improve the reception of 
a station normally received in stereo. 
AUDIO SYSTEM WARRANTIES AND SERVICE 
Refer to the Warranty Guide for audio system 
warranty information. 
If service is necessary, see your dealer or a qualified 
technician. 
62
Climate Controls 
MANUAL HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 
SYSTEM 
Fan speed control 
Controls the volume of 
air circulated in the 
vehicle. 
Temperature control knob 
Controls the 
temperature of the 
airflow inside the 
vehicle. 
Mode selector control 
Controls the direction 
of the airflow to the 
inside of the vehicle. 
A/C 
MAX 
A/C 
A/C 
MAX 
A/C 
² MAX A/C – Distributes recirculated air through 
the instrument panel registers. The A/C 
compressor will only function if the outside 
temperature is above approximately 6°C (43°F). 
MAX A/C is noisier than A/C, but more 
economical and efficient. This mode may prevent 
undesirable odors from entering the vehicle. 
² A/C – Distributes outside air through the 
instrument panel registers. The A/C compressor 
will only function if the outside temperature is 
above approximately 6°C (43°F) . 
63
Climate Controls 
² (Panel) – Distributes outside air through the 
instrument panel registers. The air can not be 
cooled below the outside temperature. 
² O (Off) – Outside air is shut out and the fan will 
not operate. This mode may reduce undesirable 
odors from entering the vehicle but may increase 
the possibility of interior window fogging. 
² (Floor) – Distributes outside air through the 
floor ducts. The air cannot be cooled below the 
outside temperature. 
² (Floor and defrost) – Distributes outside air 
through the windshield defroster ducts and the 
floor duct and the side window demisters. The 
A/C compressor will operate automatically if the 
outside temperature is above approximately 6°C 
(43°F) . The air distributed through the floor 
ducts will be slightly warmer than the air sent to 
the windshield defrost ducts and the side window 
demisters. 
² (Defrost) – Distributes outside air through 
the windshield defroster ducts and the side 
window demisters. The A/C compressor will 
operate automatically if the outside temperature 
is above approximately 6°C (43°F). This mode will 
clear ice and fog from the windshield. 
Since the air conditioner removes moisture 
from the air, it is considered normal operation 
if water drips on the ground under the air 
conditioner drain. 
64
Climate Controls 
Operating tips 
² To reduce fogging in humid weather, place the 
climate control system in Defrost and Rear 
Defrost mode (if equipped) before driving. 
² To reduce humidity buildup inside the vehicle 
under warm weather conditions, do not drive with 
the climate control system in the Off mode. 
² To reduce humidity buildup inside the vehicle 
under cold weather conditions, do not drive with 
he climate control system in Max A/C (if 
equipped), recirculation mode (if equipped) or 
Off mode. 
² Under normal weather conditions, do not leave 
your vehicle in the Max A/C (if equipped), 
recirculation mode (if equipped) or Off mode 
when turning off the vehicle. 
² Under snowy or dirty weather conditions, leave 
your vehicle in the Max A/C (if equipped), 
recirculation mode (if equipped) or Off mode 
when turning off the ignition. 
² Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the exterior 
base of the windshield. 
² To increase the efficiency of the A/C (if equipped), 
drive with the windows slightly open for two to 
three minutes. or until the vehicle has been “aired 
out”. 
² Do not place objects under the front seat or over 
the defroster ducts. They may reduce visibility, 
fall into the ducts, or degrade the performance of 
your climate control system. 
Do not place objects on top of the 
instrument panel, as these objects may 
become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop. 
65
Climate Controls 
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER 
(IF EQUIPPED) 
The rear defroster 
control is located on 
the instrument panel. 
Press the rear defroster 
control to clear the 
rear window of thin ice 
and fog. 
² A small LED will illuminate when the rear 
defroster is activated. 
The ignition must be in the ON position to operate 
the rear window defroster. 
The defroster turns off automatically after 10 
minutes or when the ignition is turned to the OFF 
position. To manually turn off the defroster before 
10 minutes have passed, push the control again. 
66
HEADLAMP CONTROL 
² Pull the headlamp 
control toward you 
to the first position 
to turn on the 
parking lamps, tail 
lamps, license plate 
lamps and marker 
lamps. 
Lights 
² Pull the headlamp control toward you to the outer 
position to turn on the headlamps (in addition to 
the previous lamps). 
Foglamp control (if equipped) 
The foglamps can be 
turned on when the 
headlamp control is in 
either of the following 
positions: 
² Parking lamps 
² Low beams 
Press the foglamp control to activate the foglamps. 
Press the foglamp control again to deactivate the 
foglamps. 
When the highbeams are activated, the foglamps will 
not operate. 
Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped) 
Turns the headlamps on with a reduced output. To 
activate: 
² the ignition must be turned on 
² the headlamp control is in the OFF or Parking 
lamps position 
² the high beam headlamps must be turned off 
² the parking brake is released 
67
Lights 
Always remember to turn on your 
headlamps at dusk or during inclement 
weather. The Daytime Running Light (DRL) 
System does not activate your tail lamps and 
generally may not provide adequate lighting during 
these conditions. Failure to activate your 
headlamps under these conditions may result in a 
collision. 
High beams 
Push the lever toward 
the instrument panel to 
activate. Pull the lever 
towards you to 
deactivate. 
Flash to pass 
Pull toward you slightly 
to activate and release 
to deactivate. 
PANEL DIMMER CONTROL 
To adjust the 
brightness of the 
instrument panel: 
² Rotate clockwise/ 
ounterclockwise 
when the headlamp 
control is in the 
parking lamp or low-beam position. 
HI 
LO 
OFF 
HI 
LO 
OFF 
To turn on the courtesy lamps: 
² Rotate fully counterclockwise. 
AIMING THE HEADLAMPS 
The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed 
at the assembly plant. 
68
Lights 
If your vehicle has been in an accident the alignment 
of your headlamps should be checked by a qualified 
service technician. 
Headlamp vertical aim adjustment 
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface approximately 
7.6 meters (25 feet) from a vertical wall or screen 
directly in front of it. 
² (1) Eight feet 
² (2) Center height of lamp to ground 
² (3) Twenty five feet 
² (4) Horizontal reference line 
2. Measure the height from the center of your 
headlamp to the ground and mark a 2.4 meter 
(8 foot) horizontal reference line on the vertical wall 
or screen at this height (a piece of masking tape 
works well). The center of the lamp is marked by a 
3.0 mm circle on the headlamp lens. 
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the 
wall or screen and open the hood. 
69
4. On the wall or 
screen you will observe 
a light pattern with flat 
edges at the top of the 
beam pattern. If the 
flat edges are not at 
the horizontal 
reference line, the beam will need to be adjusted. 
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each headlamp, 
then use a 6 mm allen wrench or screwdriver to 
adjust the headlamp up or down. 
6. HORIZONTAL AIM IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THIS 
VEHICLE AND IS NON-ADJUSTABLE. 
7. Close the hood and turn off the lamps. 
TURN SIGNAL CONTROL 
² Push down to 
activate the left turn 
signal. 
² Push up to activate 
the right turn signal. 
INTERIOR LAMPS 
Map lamps (if equipped) 
If equipped with a 
convertible top the 
map lamps and 
controls are located on 
the rearview mirror. 
Press the controls on 
the bottom of the 
mirror to activate the 
lamps. 
HI 
LO 
OFF 
Lights 
70
Lights 
BULBS 
Replacing exterior bulbs 
Check the operation of the following lamps 
frequently: 
² Headlamps 
² Tail lamps 
² Brakelamps 
² High-mount brakelamp 
² Turn signal lamps 
² Backup lamps 
² License plate lamp 
Do not remove lamp bulbs unless they will be 
replaced immediately. If a bulb is removed for an 
extended period of time, contaminants may enter 
the lamp housings and affect performance. 
Using the right bulbs 
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. 
Headlamp bulbs must be marked with an authorized 
“D.O.T.” for North America and an “E” for Europe to 
assure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern 
and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage 
the lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly 
warranty and will provide quality bulb burn time. 
Function Trade Number 
Tail lamp, brakelamp, turn lamp 3157K 
Park lamp, turn lamp, side marker (front) 3157 AK (amber) 
Backup lamp 3156K 
License plate lamp 168 
High-mount brakelamp 906 
Headlamps 9007 
Luggage compartment lamp 906 
Dome lamp 575 
Map lamp 575 
Visor vanity lamp 74 
Glove compartment 194 
Rearview mirror map lamps 192 
Fog lamp 899 
All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted. 
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your dealer. 
71
Lights 
Interior bulbs 
Check the operation of the following interior bulbs 
frequently: 
² interior overhead lamp 
² map lamp 
For bulb replacement, see a dealer or qualified 
technician. 
Map lamps 
For bulb replacement, see a qualified service 
technician or your dealer. 
Replacing headlamp bulbs 
To remove the headlamp bulb: 
1. Make sure headlamp switch is in OFF position, 
then open the hood. 
2. At the back of the 
headlamp, pull two 
retainer pins up to 
release the headlamp 
assembly. 
3. Pull headlamp 
assembly forward 
disengaging the lamp 
from the rear hidden snap retainers to expose the 
back of the bulb. 
4. Disconnect the 
electrical connector 
from the bulb by 
pulling rearward. 
5. Remove the bulb 
retaining ring by 
rotating it 
counterclockwise 
(when viewed from the 
rear) to free it from the 
bulb socket, and slide the ring off the plastic base. 
Keep the ring to retain the new bulb. 
72
6. Without turning, 
remove the old bulb 
from the lamp assembly 
by gently pulling it 
straight out of the lamp 
assembly. 
To install the new bulb: 
Lights 
Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully 
and keep out of children’s reach. Grasp the 
bulb only by its plastic base and do not touch the 
glass. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb 
to break the next time the headlamps are 
operated. 
1. With the flat side of the new bulb’s plastic base 
facing upward, insert the glass end of the bulb into 
the lamp assembly. You may need to turn the bulb 
left or right to align the grooves in the plastic base 
with the tabs in the lamp assembly. When the 
grooves are aligned, push the bulb into the lamp 
assembly until the plastic base contacts the rear of 
the lamp assembly. 
2. Install the bulb retaining ring over the plastic base 
until it contacts the rear of the socket by rotating 
clockwise until you feel a “stop.” 
3. Connect the electrical connector into the plastic 
base until it snaps, locking it into position. 
4. Install the headlamp on vehicle by aligning the 
lamp with the rear snap retainers, push to seat and 
secure with two retainer pins. 
5. Turn the headlamps on and make sure they work 
properly. If the headlamp was correctly aligned 
before you changed the bulb, you should not need to 
align it again. 
Replacing front parking lamp/turn signal bulbs 
1. Make sure the headlamp control is in the OFF 
position. 
2. Open the hood. 
73
Lights 
3. At the back of the 
headlamp, pull two 
retainer pins up to 
release the headlamp 
assembly. 
4. Pull headlamp 
assembly forward 
disengaging the lamp 
from the rear snap retainers to expose the back of 
the bulb. 
5. Rotate the bulb 
socket 
counterclockwise and 
remove from lamp 
assembly. 
6. Carefully pull the 
bulb straight out from the socket and push in the 
new bulb. 
7. To complete installation, follow the removal 
procedure in reverse orer. 
Replacing high-mount brakelamp bulbs 
1. Open trunk. 
2. Inside trunk, locate 
access hole under the 
rear decklid. 
3. Remove the bulb 
socket by rotating it 45 
degrees and pulling it 
out of the lamp 
assembly. 
4. Carefully pull bulb 
straight out of socket and push in new bulb. 
5. To complete installation, follow the removal 
procedure in reverse order. 
74
Lights 
Replacing foglamp bulbs 
The halogen bulb contains gas under pressure. 
The bulb may shatter if the glass envelope is 
scratched or if the bulb is dropped. Handle the 
bulb carefully. Grasp the bulb only by its base. 
Avoid touching the glass envelope. 
1. Rotate the foglamp 
bulb counterclockwise 
and remove from 
foglamp (the rear side 
of the foglamp is 
shown). 
2. Disconnect the 
electrical connector 
from the foglamp bulb. 
3. Connect the electrical connector to the new 
foglamp bulb. 
4. Install the foglamp bulb in foglamp by rotating 
clockwise. 
Replacing license plate lamp bulbs 
1. Open trunk and 
remove bulb socket 
from the trunk lid by 
turning 
counterclockwise. 
2. Pull the bulb straight 
out of the socket. 
Install the new bulb in reverse order. 
Replacing tail lamp/backup bulbs 
For bulb replacement, see a dealer or qualified 
technician. 
75
WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHER CONTROLS 
Rotate the windshield 
wiper control to the 
desired interval, low or 
HI 
LO 
high speed position. 
OFF 
The bars of varying 
length are for 
intermittent wipers. When in this position rotate the 
control upward for fast intervals and downward for 
slow intervals. 
Push the control on 
HI 
the end of the stalk to 
LO 
activate washer. Push 
OFF 
and hold for a longer 
wash cycle. The washer will automatically shut off 
after ten seconds of continuous use. 
Mist Function 
To operate the Mist 
HI 
function of the 
LO 
windshield wipers, 
OFF 
push and release the 
windshield washer control quickly. The wipers will 
cycle one or two times. 
Windshield wiper blades 
Check the wiper blades for wear at least twice a 
year or when they seem less effective. Substances 
such as tree sap and some hot wax treatments used 
by commercial car washes reduce the effectiveness 
of wiper blades. 
Checking the wiper blades 
If the wiper blades do not wipe properly, clean both 
the windshield and wiper blades using undiluted 
windshield wiper solution or a mild detergent. Rinse 
thoroughly with clean water. To avoid damaging the 
blades, do not use fuel, kerosene, paint thinner or 
other solvents. 
Driver Controls 
76
Driver Controls 
Changing the wiper blades 
To replace the wiper blades: 
1. Pull the wiper arm 
away from the 
windshield and lock 
into the service 
position. 
2. Turn the blade at an 
angle from the wiper 
arm. Push the lock pin 
manually to release the 
blade and pull the 
wiper blade down 
toward the windshield 
to remove it from the arm. 
3. Attach the new wiper to the wiper arm and press 
it into place until a click is heard. 
TILT STEERING WHEEL (IF EQUIPPED) 
Pull the tilt steering 
control toward you to 
move the steering 
wheel up or down. 
Hold the control while 
adjusting the wheel to 
the desired position, 
then release the control 
to lock the steering 
wheel in position. 
Never adjust the steering wheel when the 
vehicle is moving. 
77
Driver Controls 
OVERHEAD STORAGE NET (IF EQUIPPED) 
Be sure to 
secure objects 
when placed in the 
storage net in order 
to help reduce the 
risk that they become 
projectiles in the 
event of a collision. 
AUXILIARY POWER POINT 
The power point is an 
additional power 
source for electrical 
accessories. 
Power outlets are 
designed for 
accessory plugs only. 
Do not hang any type 
of accessory or accessory bracket from the 
plug. Improper use of the power outlet can 
cause damage not covered by your warranty. 
A power point is located inside the center console 
storage bin. 
POWER WINDOWS 
Press and hold the rocker switches to open and 
close windows. 
² Press the top portion 
of the rocker switch 
to close. 
78
² Press the bottom 
portion of the rocker 
switch to open. 
Driver Controls 
Express down 
To make the driver 
window open fully 
without holding the 
window control, press 
the bottom portion of 
the driver window 
control completely 
down and release 
quickly. Depress again 
to stop window operation. 
Window lock (if equipped) 
The window lock 
feature allows only the 
driver to operate the 
power windows. 
LOCK 
To lock out all the 
window controls except 
for the driver’s press the control. Press the control 
again to restore the window controls. 
79
POWER SIDE VIEW MIRRORS 
(IF EQUIPPED) 
To adjust your mirrors: 
1. Move the mirror 
selector control all the 
way to the left to 
adjust the left mirror 
or all the way to the 
right to adjust the right 
mirror. 
2. Move the control in the direction you wish to tilt 
the mirror. 
3. Return the control to the center position. 
SPEED CONTROL 
To turn speed control on 
² Press ON. 
Vehicle speed cannot 
be controlled until the 
ON 
vehicle is traveling at 
or above 48 km/h 
(30 mph). 
Do not shift the 
gearshift lever into N (Neutral) with the speed 
control on. 
Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic 
or on roads that are winding, slippery, or 
unpaved. 
OFF 
Driver Controls 
80
To turn speed control off 
² Press OFF or 
² Turn off the vehicle 
ignition. 
Once speed control is 
switched off, the 
previously programmed 
set speed will be 
erased. 
To set a speed 
² Press SET ACCEL. 
For speed control to 
operate, the speed 
control must be ON 
and the vehicle 
speed must be 
greater than 48 km/h 
(30 mph). 
Driver Controls 
ON 
If you drive up or down a steep hill, your vehicle 
speed may vary momentarily slower or faster than 
the set speed. This is normal. 
Speed control cannot reduce the vehicle speed if it 
increases above the set speed on a downhill. If your 
vehicle speed is faster than the set speed while 
driving on a downhill, you may want to shift to the 
next lower gear or apply the brakes to reduce your 
vehicle speed. 
If your vehicle slows down more than 16 km/h 
(10 mph) below your set speed on an uphill, your 
speed control will disengage. This is normal. 
Pressing RESUME will re-engage it. 
Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic 
or on roads that are winding, slippery, or 
unpaved. 
OFF 
RESUME 
SET 
ACCEL 
COAST 
81
To set a higher set speed 
² Press and hold SET 
ACCEL. Release the 
control when the 
desired vehicle 
speed is reached or 
² Press and release 
SET ACCEL to 
operate the Tap-Up 
function. Each press will increase the set speed 
by 1.6 km/h (1 mph) or 
² Accelerate with your accelerator pedal. When the 
desired vehicle speed is reached, press and 
release SET ACCEL. 
You can accelerate with the accelerator pedal at any 
time during speed control usage. Releasing the 
accelerator pedal will return your vehicle to the 
previously programmed set speed. 
To set a lower set speed 
² Press and hold 
COAST. Release the 
control when the 
desired speed is 
reached or 
² Press and release 
COAST to operate 
the Tap-Down 
function. Each press will decrease the set speed 
by 1.6 km/h (1 mph) or 
² Depress the brake 
pedal. When the 
desired vehicle 
speed is reached, 
press SET ACCEL. 
RESUME 
SET 
ACCEL 
COAST 
RESUME 
SET 
ACCEL 
COAST 
RESUME 
SET 
ACCEL 
COAST 
Driver Controls 
82
Driver Controls 
To disengage speed control 
² Depress the brake 
pedal or 
² Depress the clutch 
pedal (if equipped). 
Disengaging the speed 
control will not erase 
the previously 
programmed set speed. 
Pressing OFF will erase 
the previously 
programmed set speed. 
To return to a previously set speed 
² Press RESUME. For 
RESUME to operate, 
the vehicle speed 
must be faster than 
48 km/h (30 mph). 
ON 
OFF 
RESUME 
SET 
ACCEL 
COAST 
83
Driver Controls 
OVERDRIVE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED) 
Activating overdrive 
(Overdrive) is the normal drive position for the 
best fuel economy. 
The overdrive function allows automatic upshifts and 
downshifts through all available gears. 
Deactivating overdrive 
Press the Transmission 
Control Switch (TCS) 
located on the 
gearshift. The O/D OFF 
indicator light will 
illuminate on the 
instrument cluster. The 
transmission will 
operate in all gears 
except overdrive. 
To return to normal overdrive mode, press the 
Transmission Control Switch again. The O/D OFF 
indicator light will no longer be illuminated. 
When you shut off and re-start your vehicle, the 
transmission will automatically return to normal 
(Overdrive) mode. 
For additional information about the gearshift and 
the transmission control switch operation refer to 
the Automatic Transmission Operation section of 
the Driving chapter. 
CENTER CONSOLE 
Your vehicle may be equipped with a variety of 
console features. These include: 
² Dual cupholders 
² Auxiliary power point 
² Coin holder slots (if equipped) 
² Convertible top control (if equipped) 
84
Driver Controls 
Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard 
objects can injure you in a collision. 
POSITIVE RETENTION FLOOR MAT 
(IF EQUIPPED) 
Position the floor mat so 
that the eyelet is over the 
pointed end of the 
retention post and rotate 
forward to lock in. Make 
sure that the mat does not 
interfere with the operation 
of the accelerator or the 
brake pedal. To remove the 
floor mat, reverse the installation procedure. 
TRUNK REMOTE CONTROL 
The remote trunk release control is located in the 
glove compartment. Press to open trunk. 
CONVERTIBLE (IF EQUIPPED) 
Do not store articles behind rear seat. Articles 
stored in the convertible top stowage compartment 
may break the rear glass window when the top is 
lowered. 
Lowering the convertible top 
The convertible top can be lowered with the side 
windows either up or down. 
The convertible top will not operate unless the 
parking brake is engaged. Do not lower the top while 
the vehicle is moving because the top may be 
severely damaged. Also, do not lower the top when 
the top material is wet. 
To lower the convertible top: 
1. Bring vehicle to a complete stop. Engage the 
parking brake. Key must be in the ON position. 
2. Check the convertible top stowage compartment 
behind the rear seat to be sure it is empty and ready 
to receive the top. 
85
3. Unclamp the top from the windshield header at 
both the right and left sides by pulling each clamp 
rearward until the hook in the windshield header is 
free. The clamps are flush with the header when in 
the closed position. 
4. Close the windshield header clamps immediately 
after disengagement, to avoid cutting the top 
material and to permit installation of the vinyl boot. 
5. If the top has not 
been lowered for some 
time and sticks to the 
windshield header, 
push the front of the 
top up slightly with 
your hand to loosen it. 
6. Push the convertible 
top switch on the 
PARK SET BRAKE 
console in front of the 
armrest and hold until 
the top is completely 
stored. 
7. Disengage the 
parking brake. 
Installation of the boot 
1. Push boot rearward 
and engage boot under 
the body molding at 
the rear and sides. 
Driver Controls 
86
2. Fasten snap on boot 
to quarter trim panel 
on both sides of the 
vehicle. 
3. Insert boot tongue 
into groove located on 
rear of seat. 
4. To remove, unfasten 
the snaps and the boot 
tongue. 
5. Pull forward and lift 
off. 
Driver Controls 
Raising the convertible top 
The convertible top will not operate unless the 
parking brake is engaged. Do not raise the top while 
the vehicle is moving because the top may be 
severely damaged. 
To raise the convertible top: 
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop. Engage the 
parking brake. Key must be in the ON position. 
2. Remove the boot cover and store it in the luggage 
compartment. 
3. Lower the front and rear side windows. 
4. Push the convertible top button, holding it until 
the top unfolds and moves forward toward the 
windshield header. 
87
Driver Controls 
5. Open both top clamps before the top meets the 
windshield header 
6. Continue to use the top motor to raise the top 
until it has reached the fully closed position flush to 
the header. 
7. The two pins under the forward edge of the top 
should seat themselves in the matching holes in the 
header. 
8. To fasten both clamps securely, push the clamp 
handles into the header on the top until they are 
flush with the header. Pulling down on the header at 
the center grip while closing the latches may assist 
in fastening the clamps. 
9. Raise the front and rear side windows. 
10. Disengage the parking brake. 
88
Locks and Security 
KEYS 
The key operates all locks on your vehicle. In case of 
loss, replacement keys are available from your 
dealer. 
You should always carry a second key with you in a 
safe place in case you require it in an emergency. 
Refer to SecuriLocky Passive Anti-Theft System 
for more information. 
POWER DOOR LOCKS 
Press U to unlock all 
doors and L to lock all 
doors. 
U L 
INTERIOR LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT 
RELEASE 
Your vehicle is equipped with a mechanical interior 
luggage compartment release handle that provides a 
means of escape for children and adults in the event 
they become locked inside the luggage 
compartment. 
Adults are advised to familiarize themselves with the 
operation and location of the release handle. 
89
Locks and Security 
To open the luggage 
compartment door (lid) 
from within the 
luggage compartment, 
pull the illuminated “T” 
shaped handle and 
push up on the trunk 
lid. The handle is 
composed of a material 
that will glow for hours 
in darkness following 
brief exposure to 
ambient light. 
The “T” shaped handle will be located either on the 
luggage compartment door (lid) or inside the 
luggage compartment near the tail lamps. 
Keep vehicle 
doors and 
luggage compartment 
locked and keep keys 
and remote 
transmitters out of a 
child’s reach. 
Unsupervised 
children could lock 
themselves in an 
open trunk and risk 
injury. Children 
should be taught not 
to play in vehicles. 
90
Locks and Security 
On hot days, the temperature in the trunk 
or vehicle interior can rise very quickly. 
Exposure of people or animals to these high 
temperatures for even a short time can cause 
death or serious heat-related injuries, including 
brain damage. Small children are particularly at 
risk. 
REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM 
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules 
and with RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is 
subject to the following two conditions: (1) This 
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) 
This device must accept any interference received, 
including interference that may cause undesired 
operation. 
Changes or modifications not expressly 
approved by the party responsible for 
compliance could void the user’s authority to 
operate the equipment. 
The remote entry system allows you to: 
² lock or unlock all vehicle doors without a key 
² open the trunk 
² activate the panic alarm 
² confirms that the vehicle is locked with a short 
“beep” from the horn. 
The remote entry features only operate with the 
ignition in the LOCK position. 
If there is any potential remote keyless entry 
problem with your vehicle, ensure ALL remote 
entry transmitters are brought to the dealership, 
to aid in troubleshooting. 
91
Locks and Security 
Unlocking the doors 
Press this control to 
unlock the driver’s 
door. The interior 
lamps will illuminate. 
With the all-door 
remote entry system, 
press the control a 
second time within 
three seconds to unlock the passenger door. 
Locking the doors 
Press this control to 
lock all doors. 
To confirm all doors 
are closed and locked, 
press the control a 
second time within 
three seconds. The 
doors will lock again, 
the horn will chirp and the lamps will flash. 
If any of the doors are ajar, the horn will make two 
quick chirps and the chime may sound, reminding 
you to properly close all doors. 
Sounding a panic alarm 
Press this control to 
activate the alarm. 
To deactivate the 
alarm, press the 
control again or turn 
the ignition to ACC or 
ON. 
Panic alarm will only 
operate with the ignition in the OFF position. 
92
Locks and Security 
Opening the trunk 
Press the control once 
to open the trunk. 
Ensure that the trunk 
is closed and latched 
before driving your 
vehicle. Failure to latch 
the trunk may cause 
objects to fall out of 
the trunk or block the rear view. This feature will 
not work with the transmission out of P (Park) or N 
(Neutral) if the ignition is in either the ACC or ON 
position. 
Replacing the batteries 
The transmitter is powered by two coin type 
three-volt lithium batteries. Typical operating range 
will allow you to be up to 10 meters (33 feet) away 
from your vehicle. A decrease in operating range can 
be caused by: 
² Weather conditions 
² Nearby radio towers 
² Structures around the vehicle 
² Other vehicles parked next to the vehicle 
To replace the 
batteries: 
1. Twist a thin coin 
between the two halves 
of the transmitter near 
the key ring. DO NOT 
TAKE THE FRONT 
PART OF THE 
TRANSMITTER 
APART. 
2. Place the positive 
(+) side of new batteries down. Refer to the diagram 
inside the transmitter unit. 
3. Snap the two halves back together. 
93
Locks and Security 
Replacement of the battery will not cause the 
remote transmitter to become deprogrammed from 
your vehicle. The remote transmitter should operate 
normally after battery replacement. 
Replacing lost transmitters 
² Take all your 
vehicle’s transmitters 
to your dealer if 
service is required. 
² If you purchase 
additional 
transmitters (up to 
four may be 
programmed into memory), perform the following 
procedure. 
To reprogram the transmitters yourself, place the 
key in the ignition and turn from LOCK to OFF and 
cycle between OFF and ON eight times in rapid 
succession (within 10 seconds) ending in ON. After 
doors lock/unlock, press any control on all 
transmitters (up to four). With each control press of 
the transmitters, the door should cycle (lock/unlock) 
to confirm programming. When completed, turn the 
ignition to OFF. The door locks should cycle 
(lock/unlock) one last time to confirm completion of 
programming. 
All transmitters must be programmed at the same 
time. 
Illuminated entry 
The interior lamps illuminate when the remote entry 
system is used to unlock the door(s) or sound the 
personal alarm. 
The system automatically turns off after 25 seconds 
or when the ignition is turned to the START/RUN or 
ACC position. The dome lamp control (if equipped) 
must not be set to the OFF position for the 
illuminated entry system to operate. 
94
Locks and Security 
The inside lights will not turn off if: 
² they have been turned on with the dimmer 
control, or 
² any door is open. 
The battery saver will shut off the interior lamps 30 
minutes after the ignition has been turned to the 
OFF position, 10 minutes after if the door is left 
open, and 30 minutes after if the trunk is left open 
or the dome lamp control is left on. 
SECURILOCKY PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM 
SecuriLocky passive anti-theft system is an engine 
immobilization system. This system is designed to 
prevent the engine from being started unless a 
coded key programmed to your vehicle is used. 
The SecuriLocky passive anti-theft system is not 
compatible with non-Ford aftermarket remote start 
systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle 
starting problems and a loss of security protection. 
THEFT INDICATOR 
The theft indicator is the flashing red indicator 
located on top of the instrument panel. 
² When the ignition is in the OFF position, the 
indicator will flash once every 2 seconds to 
indicate the SecuriLocky system is functioning as 
a theft deterrent. 
² When the ignition is in the ON position, the 
indicator will glow for 3 seconds to indicate 
normal system functionality. 
If a problem occurs with the SecuriLocky system, 
the indicator will flash rapidly or glow steadily when 
the ignition is in the ON position. If this occurs, the 
vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer for 
service. 
95
Locks and Security 
Automatic arming 
The vehicle is armed 
immediately after 
4 
switching the ignition 
3 
to the 3 (OFF) 
position. The THEFT 
2 
indicator in the 
instrument cluster will 
1 
flash every two 
seconds when the vehicle is armed. 
Automatic disarming 
Switching the ignition to the 4 (ON) position with a 
coded key disarms the vehicle. The THEFT 
indicator will illuminate for three seconds and then 
go out. If the THEFT indicator stays on for an 
extended period of time or flashes rapidly, have the 
system serviced by your dealership or a qualified 
technician. 
Key information 
Your vehicle is supplied with two coded keys. Only 
a coded key will start your vehicle. Spare coded 
keys can be purchased from your dealership. Your 
dealership can program your key or you can “do it 
yourself.” Refer to Programming spare keys. 
The following items may prevent the vehicle from 
starting: 
² Large metallic objects 
² Electronic devices on the key chain that can be 
used to purchase gasoline or similar items 
5 
² A second key on the same key ring as the coded 
key 
If any of these items are present, you need to keep 
these objects from touching the coded key while 
starting the engine. These objects and devices 
cannot damage the coded key, but can cause a 
momentary “no start” condition if they are too close 
to the key during engine start. If a problem occurs, 
96
Locks and Security 
turn ignition OFF and restart the engine with all 
other objects on the key ring held away from the 
ignition key. Check to make sure the coded key is 
an approved Ford coded key. 
If your keys are lost or stolen you will need to do 
the following: 
² Use your spare key to start the vehicle, or 
² Have your vehicle towed to a dealership or a 
locksmith. The key codes will need to be erased 
from your vehicle and new key codes will need to 
be re-coded. 
Replacing coded keys can be very costly and you 
may want to store an extra programmed key away 
from the vehicle in a safe place to prevent an 
unforeseen inconvenience. 
The correct coded key must be used for your 
vehicle. The use of the wrong type of coded key 
may lead to a “no start” condition. 
If an unprogrammed key is used in the ignition 
it will cause a “no start” condition. 
Programming spare keys 
A maximum of eight keys can be coded to your 
vehicle. Only SecuriLocky keys can be used. To 
program a coded key yourself, you will need two 
previously programmed coded keys (keys that 
already operate your vehicle’s engine) and the new 
unprogrammed key(s) readily accessible for timely 
implementation of each step in the procedure. 
If two previously programmed coded keys are not 
available, you must bring your vehicle to your 
dealership to have the spare coded key(s) 
programmed. 
Please read and understand the entire procedure 
before you begin. 
97
1. Insert the first 
previously programmed 
4 
coded key into the 
3 
ignition and turn the 
5 
ignition from 3 (OFF) 
2 
to 4 (ON) (maintain 
ignition in 4 (ON) for 
1 
at least one second). 
2. Turn ignition to 3 (OFF) then 2 (LOCK) and 
remove the first coded key from the ignition. 
3. Within ten seconds of removing the first coded 
key, insert the second previously programmed 
coded key into the ignition and turn the ignition 
from 3 (OFF) to 4 (ON) (maintain ignition in 4 
(ON) for at least one second but no more than ten 
seconds). 
4. Turn the ignition to 3 (OFF) then 2 (LOCK) and 
remove the second coded key from the ignition. 
5. Within 20 seconds of removing the second coded 
key, insert the new unprogrammed key (new 
key/valet key) into the ignition and turn the ignition 
from 3 (OFF) to 4 (ON) (maintain ignition in 4 
(ON) for at least one second). This step will 
program your new key to a coded key. 
6. To program additional new unprogrammed key(s), 
repeat this procedure from step 1. 
If successful, the new coded key(s) will start the 
vehicle’s engine and the theft indicator will 
illuminate for three seconds and then go out. 
If not successful, the new coded key(s) will not start 
the vehicle’s engine and the theft indicator will flash 
on and off and you may repeat steps 1 through 6. If 
failure repeats, bring your vehicle to your dealership 
to have the new spare key(s) programmed. 
Locks and Security 
98
Seating and Safety Restraints 
SEATING 
Adjustable head restraints (if equipped) 
Your vehicle’s seats may be equipped with head 
restraints which are vertically adjustable. The 
purpose of these head restraints is to help limit head 
motion in the event of a rear collision. To properly 
adjust your head restraints, lift the head restraint so 
that it is located directly behind your head or as 
close to that position as possible. Refer to the 
following to raise and lower the head restraints. 
The head restraints can 
be moved up and 
down. 
Adjusting the front manual seat 
Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback 
when the vehicle is moving. 
Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks 
to reduce the risk of injuring people in a 
collision or sudden stop. 
Always drive and ride with your seatback 
upright and the lap belt snug and low across 
the hips. 
Reclining the seatback can cause an 
occupant to slide under the seat’s safety 
belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the 
event of a collision. 
99
Seating and Safety Restraints 
Lift handle to move 
seat forward or 
backward. 
Pull lever up to adjust 
seatback. 
Using the power lumbar support (if equipped) 
The power lumbar 
control is located on 
the outboard side of 
the seat. 
Press one side of the control to adjust firmness. 
Press the other side of the control to adjust 
softness. 
Adjusting the front power seat (if equipped) 
Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback 
when the vehicle is moving. 
Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks 
to avoid injuring people in a collision or 
sudden stop. 
Always drive and ride with your seatback 
upright and the lap belt snug and low across 
the hips. 
100
Seating and Safety Restraints 
Reclining the seatback can cause an 
occupant to slide under the seat’s safety 
belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the 
event of a collision. 
The control is located on the front outboard corner 
of the driver’s seat. 
Press front to raise or 
lower the front portion 
of the seat cushion. 
Press rear to raise or 
lower the rear portion 
of the seat cushion. 
Press the control to 
move the seat forward, 
backward, up or down. 
REAR SEATS 
Use the seatback 
release to fold the back 
of the front seat 
forward for rear seat 
passenger entry or exit. 
This release handle is 
located on the lower 
101
Seating and Safety Restraints 
outboard back of the seat. The seatback locks 
automatically when returned to the normal position. 
The rotating boot on the front seat belt is designed 
to allow rear seat entry/exit. To enter the rear seat: 
1. Remove safety belt 
from safety belt guide 
on top of front seat. 
2. Rotate the safety 
belt boot rearward. 
3. Enter the rear seat in front of the safety belt. 
4. Rotate the safety belt boot forward and place the 
belt in the belt guide on the seat back to allow use 
by the front driver/passenger. 
2nd seat/split-folding rear seat (if equipped) 
One or both rear seatbacks can be folded down to 
provide additional cargo space. 
To lower the 
seatback(s) from inside 
the vehicle, pull tab to 
release seat back and 
then fold seatback 
down. 
When raising the seatback(s), make sure you hear 
the seat latch into place. 
SAFETY RESTRAINTS 
Safety restraints precautions 
Always drive and ride with your seatback 
upright and the lap belt snug and low across 
the hips. 
102
Seating and Safety Restraints 
To reduce the risk of injury, make sure 
children sit where they can be properly 
restrained. 
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or 
her lap while the vehicle is moving. The 
passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a 
collision. 
All occupants of the vehicle, including the 
driver, should always properly wear their 
safety belts, even when an air bag (SRS) is 
provided. 
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo 
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a 
collision, people riding in these areas are more 
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow 
people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is 
not equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure 
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a 
safety belt properly. 
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is 
significantly more likely to die than a person 
wearing a safety belt. 
Each seating position in your vehicle has a 
specific safety belt assembly which is made 
up of one buckle and one tongue that are designed 
to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on 
the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder 
belt under the arm. 2) Never swing the safety belt 
around your neck over the inside shoulder. 3) Never 
use a single belt for more than one person. 
103
Seating and Safety Restraints 
Always transport children 12 years old and 
under in the back seat and always properly 
use appropriate child restraints. 
Safety belts and seats can become hot in a 
vehicle that has been closed up in sunny 
weather; they could burn a small child. Check seat 
covers and buckles before you place a child 
anywhere near them. 
Combination lap and shoulder belts 
Before fastening the 
safety belt, make sure 
the shoulder belt 
passes through the belt 
guide on the top of the 
seatback. 
Coupe shown, 
convertible is similar 
and safety belt must also pass through the belt 
guide. 
1. Insert the belt 
tongue into the proper 
buckle (the buckle 
closest to the direction 
the tongue is coming 
from) until you hear a 
snap and feel it latch. 
Make sure the tongue 
is securely fastened in 
the buckle. 
104
Seating and Safety Restraints 
2. To unfasten, push 
the release button and 
remove the tongue 
from the buckle. 
The front and rear outboard safety restraints in the 
vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts. The 
front passenger and rear seat outboard safety belts 
have two types of locking modes described below: 
Energy Management Feature 
² This vehicle has a safety belt system with an 
energy management feature at the front seating 
positions to help further reduce the risk of injury 
in the event of a head-on collision. 
² This safety belt system has a retractor assembly 
that is designed to pay out webbing in a 
controlled manner. This feature is designed to 
help reduce the belt force acting on the 
occupant’s chest. 
After any vehicle collision, the safety belt 
system at all outboard seating positions 
(except driver, which has no “automatic locking 
retractor” feature) must be checked by a qualified 
technician to verify that the “automatic locking 
retractor” feature for child seats is still functioning 
properly. In addition, all safety belts should be 
checked for proper function. 
BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST 
BE REPLACED if the safety belt assembly 
“automatic locking retractor” feature or any other 
safety belt function is not operating properly when 
checked according to the procedures in Workshop 
Manual. 
105
Seating and Safety Restraints 
Failure to replace the Belt and Retractor 
assembly could increase the risk of injury in 
collisions. 
Vehicle sensitive mode 
The vehicle sensitive mode is the normal retractor 
mode, allowing free shoulder belt length adjustment 
to your movements and locking in response to 
vehicle movement. For example, if the driver brakes 
suddenly or turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle 
receives an impact of approximately 8 km/h (5 mph) 
or more, the combination safety belts will lock to 
help reduce forward movement of the driver and 
passengers. 
The safety belt system can also be made to lock 
manually by quickly pulling on the shoulder belt. 
Automatic locking mode 
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically 
pre-locked. The belt will still retract to remove any 
slack in the shoulder belt. 
The automatic locking mode is not available on the 
driver safety belt. 
When to use the automatic locking mode 
² Any time a child safety seat is installed in a 
passenger front or outboard rear seating position 
(if equipped). Children 12 years old and under 
should be properly restrained in the rear seat 
whenever possible. Refer to Safety Restraints for 
Children or Safety Seats for Children later in 
this chapter. 
106
Seating and Safety Restraints 
How to use the automatic locking mode 
² Buckle the 
combination lap and 
shoulder belt. 
² Grasp the shoulder 
portion and pull 
downward until the 
entire belt is 
extracted. 
² Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you 
will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the 
safety belt is now in the automatic locking mode. 
How to disengage the automatic locking mode 
Ford Motor Company recommends that all 
safety belt assemblies and attaching 
hardware should be inspected by a qualified 
technician after any collision. Safety belt 
assemblies not in use during a collision should also 
be inspected and replaced if either damage or 
improper operation is noted. 
107
Seating and Safety Restraints 
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and 
allow it to retract completely to disengage the 
automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle 
sensitive (emergency) locking mode. 
After any vehicle collision, the front 
passenger and rear outboard seat belt 
systems must be checked by a qualified technician 
to verify that the “automatic locking retractor” 
feature for child seats is still functioning properly. 
In addition, all seat belts should be checked for 
proper function. 
BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST 
BE REPLACED if the seat belt assembly 
“automatic locking retractor” feature or any other 
seat belt function is not operating properly when 
checked according to the procedures in Workshop 
Manual. 
Failure to replace the Belt and Retractor 
assembly could increase the risk of injury in 
collisions. 
Safety belt warning light and indicator 
chime 
The seat belt warning light illuminates in the 
instrument cluster and a chime sounds to remind 
the occupants to fasten their safety belts. 
108
Seating and Safety Restraints 
Conditions of operation 
If... Then... 
The driver’s safety belt is 
not buckled before the 
ignition switch is turned 
to the ON position... 
The safety belt warning light 
illuminates1-2 minutes and the 
warning chime sounds 4-8 
seconds. 
The driver’s safety belt is 
buckled while the 
indicator light is 
illuminated and the 
warning chime is 
sounding... 
The safety belt warning light 
and warning chime turn off. 
The driver’s safety belt is 
buckled before the 
ignition switch is turned 
to the ON position... 
The safety belt warning light 
will turn on for 3 seconds and 
then turn off. The indicator 
chime will remain off. 
BeltMinder 
The BeltMinder feature is a supplemental warning to 
the safety belt warning function. This feature 
provides additional reminders to the driver that the 
driver’s safety belt is unbuckled by intermittently 
sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt 
warning lamp in the instrument cluster. 
If... Then... 
The driver’s safety belt is 
not buckled 
approximately 5 seconds 
after the safety belt 
warning light has turned 
off... 
The BeltMinder feature is 
activated - the safety belt 
warning light illuminates and 
the warning chime sounds for 6 
seconds every 30 seconds, 
repeating for approximately 5 
minutes or until safety belt is 
buckled. 
The driver’s safety belt is 
buckled while the safety 
belt indicator light is 
illuminated and the safety 
belt warning chime is 
sounding... 
The BeltMinder feature will not 
activate. 
109
Seating and Safety Restraints 
If... Then... 
The driver’s safety belt is 
buckled before the 
ignition switch is turned 
to the ON position... 
The BeltMinder feature will not 
activate. 
The purpose of the BeltMinder is to remind 
occasional wearers to wear safety belts all of the 
time. 
The following are reasons most often given for not 
wearing safety belts: (All statistics based on U.S. 
data) 
Reasons given... Consider... 
“Crashes are rare 
events” 
36700 crashes occur every day. The 
more we drive, the more we are 
exposed to “rare” events, even for good 
drivers. 1 in 4 of us will be seriously 
injured in a crash during our 
lifetime. 
“I’m not going far” 3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25 
miles of home. 
“Belts are 
uncomfortable” 
We design our safety belts to enhance 
comfort. If you are uncomfortable - try 
different positions for the safety belt 
upper anchorage and seatback which 
should be as upright as possible; this 
can improve comfort. 
“I was in a hurry” Prime time for an accident. 
BeltMinder reminds us to take a few 
seconds to buckle up. 
“Seat belts don’t 
work” 
Safety belts, when used properly, 
reduce risk of death to front seat 
occupants by 45% in cars, and by 60% 
in light trucks. 
“Traffic is light” Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in 
single-vehicle crashes, many when no 
other vehicles are around. 
“Belts wrinkle my 
clothes” 
Possibly, but a serious crash can do 
much more than wrinkle your clothes, 
particularly if you are unbelted. 
110
Seating and Safety Restraints 
Reasons given... Consider... 
“The people I’m 
with don’t wear 
belts” 
Set the example, teen deaths occur 4 
times more often in vehicles with TWO 
or MORE people. Children and younger 
brothers/sisters imitate behavior they 
see. 
“I have an air 
bag” 
Air bags offer greater protection when 
used with safety belts. Frontal airbags 
are not designed to inflate in rear and 
side crashes or rollovers. 
“I’d rather be 
thrown clear” 
Not a good idea. People who are 
ejected are 40 times more likely to 
DIE. Safety belts help prevent ejection, 
WE CAN’T “PICK OUR CRASH”. 
Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt to 
avoid the Belt Minder chime. Sitting on the 
safety belt will increase the risk of injury in an 
accident. To disable (one-time) or deactivate the 
Belt Minder feature please follow the directions 
stated below. 
One time disable 
Any time the safety belt is buckled and then 
unbuckled during an ignition ON cycle, BeltMinder 
will be disabled for that ignition cycle only. 
Deactivating/activating the BeltMinder feature 
Read steps 1 - 9 thoroughly before proceeding 
with the deactivation/activation programming 
procedure. 
The BeltMinder feature can be deactivated/activated 
by performing the following procedure: 
Before following the procedure, make sure that: 
² The parking brake is set. 
² The gearshift is in P (Park) (automatic 
transmission) or the neutral position (manual 
transmission). 
² The ignition switch is in the OFF position. 
² All vehicle doors are closed. 
111
Seating and Safety Restraints 
² The driver’s safety belt is unbuckled. 
² The parklamps/headlamps are in OFF position (If 
vehicle is equipped with Autolamps, this will not 
affect the procedure). 
To reduce the risk of injury, do not 
deactivate/activate the Belt Minder feature 
while driving the vehicle. 
BeltMinder activation and deactivation 
procedure 
1. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN (or ON) 
position. (DO NOT START THE ENGINE.) 
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off. 
(Approximately 1–2 minutes.) 
² Steps 3–5 must be completed within 60 seconds 
or the procedure will have to be repeated. 
3. Buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three times, 
ending with the safety belt unbuckled. This can be 
done before or during BeltMinder warning activation. 
4. Turn on the parklamps/headlamps, turn off the 
parklamps/headlamps. 
5. Buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three times, 
ending with the safety belt unbuckled. 
² After step 5 the safety belt warning light will be 
turned on for three seconds. 
6. Within seven seconds of the safety belt warning 
light turning off, buckle then unbuckle the safety 
belt. 
² This will disable BeltMinder if it is currently 
enabled, or enable BeltMinder if it is currently 
disabled. 
7. Confirmation of disabling BeltMinder is provided 
by the safety belt warning light flashing four times 
per second for three seconds. 
8. Confirmation of enabling BeltMinder is provided 
by: 
² The safety belt warning light flashing four times 
per second for three seconds. 
112
Seating and Safety Restraints 
² Followed by three seconds with the safety belt 
warning light off. 
² Once again, the safety belt warning light will flash 
four times per second for three seconds. 
9. After receiving confirmation, the 
deactivation/activation procedure is complete. 
Safety belt extension assembly 
If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, 
there is a 20 cm (8 inch) safety belt extension 
assembly that can be added (part number 611C22). 
This assembly can be obtained from your dealer at 
no cost. 
Use only extensions manufactured by the same 
supplier as the safety belt. Manufacturer 
identification is located at the end of the webbing on 
the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if 
the safety belt is too short for you when fully 
extended. 
Do not use extensions to change the fit of the 
shoulder belt across the torso. 
Safety belt maintenance 
Inspect the safety belt systems periodically to make 
sure they work properly and are not damaged. 
Inspect the safety belts to make sure there are no 
nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary. All safety 
belt assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front 
seat belt buckle assemblies, buckle support 
assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt 
height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder belt guide 
on seatback (if equipped), child safety seat tether 
bracket assemblies (if equipped), LATCH child seat 
tether anchors and lower anchors (if equipped), and 
attaching hardware, should be inspected after a 
collision. Ford Motor Company recommends that all 
safety belt assemblies used in vehicles involved in a 
collision be replaced. However, if the collision was 
minor and a qualified technician finds that the belts 
do not show damage and continue to operate 
properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety 
113
Seating and Safety Restraints 
belt assemblies not in use during a collision should 
also be inspected and replaced if either damage or 
improper operation is noted. 
Failure to inspect and if necessary replace 
the safety belt assembly under the above 
conditions could result in severe personal injuries 
in the event of a collision. 
Refer to Cleaning and maintaining the safety 
belts in the Cleaning chapter. 
AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM 
(SRS) 
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and 
diagnostic module which records information about 
the air bag and sensor systems. In the event of a 
collision this module may save information related to 
the collision including information about the air bag 
system and impact severity. This information will 
assist Ford Motor Company in servicing the vehicle 
and in helping to better understand real world 
collisions and further improve the safety of future 
vehicles. 
114
Seating and Safety Restraints 
Important supplemental restraint system (SRS) 
precautions 
The supplemental 
restraint system is 
designed to work with 
the safety belt to help 
protect the driver and 
right front passenger 
from certain upper 
body injuries. 
Air bags DO NOT 
inflate slowly or gently 
and the risk of injury 
from a deploying air bag is greatest close to the trim 
covering the air bag module. 
All occupants of the vehicle, including the 
driver, should always properly wear their 
safety belts, even when an air bag (SRS) is 
provided. 
Always transport children 12 years old and 
under in the back seat and always properly 
use appropriate child restraints. 
National Highway Traffic Safety 
Administration (NHTSA) recommends a 
minimum distance of at least 25 cm (10 inches) 
between an occupant’s chest and the driver air bag 
module. 
Never place your arm over the air bag 
module as a deploying air bag can result in 
serious arm fractures or other injuries. 
Steps you can take to properly position yourself 
away from the air bag: 
² Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while 
still reaching the pedals comfortably. 
115
Seating and Safety Restraints 
² Recline the seat slightly (one or two degrees) 
from the upright position. 
Do not put anything on or over the air bag 
module. Placing objects on or over the air 
bag inflation area may cause those objects to be 
propelled by the air bag into your face and torso 
causing serious injury. 
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify 
the air bag supplemental restraint systems 
or its fuses. See your Ford or Lincoln Mercury 
dealer. 
Modifications to the front end of the vehicle, 
including frame, bumper, front end body 
structure and tow hooks may affect the 
performance of the air bag sensors increasing the 
risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of the 
vehicle. 
Children and air bags 
For additional 
important safety 
information, read all 
information on safety 
restraints in this guide. 
Children must always 
be properly restrained. 
Accident statistics 
suggest that children 
are safer when 
properly restrained in 
the rear seating 
positions than in the front seating position. Failure 
to follow these instructions may increase the risk of 
injury in a collision. 
116
Seating and Safety Restraints 
Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child 
seat. NEVER place a rear-facing child seat 
in front of an active air bag. If you must use a 
forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move 
the seat all the way back. 
How does the air bag supplemental restraint 
system work? 
The air bag SRS is 
designed to activate 
when the vehicle 
sustains longitudinal 
deceleration sufficient 
to cause the sensors to 
close an electrical 
circuit that initiates air 
bag inflation. 
The fact that the air bags did not inflate in a 
collision does not mean that something is wrong 
with the system. Rather, it means the forces were 
not of the type sufficient to cause activation. Air 
bags are designed to inflate in frontal and 
near-frontal collisions, not rollover, side-impact, or 
rear-impacts unless the collision causes sufficient 
longitudinal deceleration. 
The air bags inflate and 
deflate rapidly upon 
activation. After air bag 
deployment, it is 
normal to notice a 
smoke-like, powdery 
residue or smell the 
burnt propellant. This 
may consist of 
cornstarch, talcum 
powder (to lubricate 
the bag) or sodium 
compounds (e.g., baking soda) that result from the 
combustion process that inflates the air bag. Small 
117
Seating and Safety Restraints 
amounts of sodium hydroxide may be present which 
may irritate the skin and eyes, but none of the 
residue is toxic. 
While the system is designed to help reduce serious 
injuries, contact with a deploying air bag may also 
cause abrasions, swelling or temporary hearing loss. 
Because air bags must inflate rapidly and with 
considerable force, there is the risk of death or 
serious injuries such as fractures, facial and eye 
injuries or internal injuries, particularly to occupants 
who are not properly restrained or are otherwise out 
of position at the time of air bag deployment. Thus, 
it is extremely important that occupants be properly 
restrained as far away from the air bag module as 
possible while maintaining vehicle control. 
The SRS consists of: 
² driver and passenger air bag modules (which 
include the inflators and air bags) 
² one or more impact and safing sensors 
² a readiness light and tone 
² a diagnostic module 
² and the electrical wiring which connects the 
components 
The diagnostic module monitors its own internal 
circuits and the supplemental air bag electrical 
system warning (including the impact sensors), the 
system wiring, the air bag system readiness light, the 
air bag back up power and the air bag ignitors. 
Several air bag system components get hot 
after inflation. Do not touch them after 
inflation. 
If the air bag has deployed, the air bag will 
not function again and must be replaced 
immediately. If the air bag is not replaced, the 
unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a 
collision. 
118
Seating and Safety Restraints 
Determining if the system is operational 
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument 
cluster or a tone to indicate the condition of the 
system. Refer to Air bag readiness section in the 
Instrument cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of 
the air bag is not required. 
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or 
more of the following: 
² The readiness light 
will either flash or 
stay lit. 
AIR 
BAG 
² The readiness light will not illuminate immediately 
after ignition is turned on. 
² A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone 
pattern will repeat periodically until the problem 
and/or light are repaired. 
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, 
have the SRS serviced at your dealership or by a 
qualified technician immediately. Unless serviced, 
the system may not function properly in the event of 
a collision. 
Disposal of air bags and air bag equipped 
vehicles (including pretensioners) 
For disposal of air bags or air bag equipped vehicles, 
see your local dealership or qualified technician. Air 
bags MUST BE disposed of by qualified personnel. 
SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN 
See the following sections for directions on how to 
properly use safety restraints for children. Also see 
Air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) in 
this chapter for special instructions about using air 
bags. 
Important child restraint precautions 
You are required by law to use safety restraints for 
children in the U.S. and Canada. If small children 
ride in your vehicle (generally children who are four 
119
Seating and Safety Restraints 
years old or younger and who weigh 18 kg [40 lbs] 
or less), you must put them in safety seats made 
especially for children. Check your local and state or 
provincial laws for specific requirements regarding 
the safety of children in your vehicle. 
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or 
her lap while the vehicle is moving. The 
passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a 
collision. 
Always follow the instructions and warnings that 
come with any infant or child restraint you might 
use. 
When possible, always place children under age 
12 in the rear seat of your vehicle. Accident 
statistics suggest that children are safer when 
properly restrained in the rear seating positions than 
in the front seating positions. 
Children and safety belts 
If the child is the proper size, restrain the child in a 
safety seat. Children who are too large for child 
safety seats (as specified by your child safety seat 
manufacturer) should always wear safety belts. 
Follow all the important safety restraint and air bag 
precautions that apply to adult passengers in your 
vehicle. 
If the shoulder belt portion of a combination lap and 
shoulder belt can be positioned so it does not cross 
or rest in front of the child’s face or neck, the child 
should wear the lap and shoulder belt. Moving the 
child closer to the center of the vehicle may help 
provide a good shoulder belt fit. 
Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or 
pets unattended in your vehicle. 
Child booster seats 
Children outgrow a typical convertible or toddler 
seat when they weigh 40 pounds and are around 4 
120
years of age. Although the lap/shoulder belt will 
provide some protection, these children are still too 
small for lap/shoulder belts to fit properly, which 
could increase the risk of serious injury. 
To improve the fit of both the lap and shoulder belt 
on children who have outgrown child safety seats, 
Ford Motor Company recommends use of a 
belt-positioning booster. 
Booster seats position a child so that safety belts fit 
better. They lift the child up so that the lap belt 
rests low across the hips and the knees bend 
comfortably. Booster seats also make the shoulder 
belt fit better and more comfortably for growing 
children. 
When children should use booster seats 
Children need to use booster seats from the time 
they outgrow the toddler seat until they are big 
enough for the vehicle seat and lap/shoulder belt to 
fit properly. Generally this is when they weigh about 
80 lbs (about 8 to 12 years old). 
Booster seats should be used until you can answer 
YES to ALL of these questions: 
² Can the child sit all 
the way back against 
the vehicle seat back 
with knees bent 
comfortably at the 
edge of the seat 
without slouching? 
² Does the lap belt rest low across the hips? 
² Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and 
chest? 
² Can the child stay seated like this for the whole 
trip? 
Seating and Safety Restraints 
121
Seating and Safety Restraints 
Types of booster seats 
There are two types of belt-positioning booster 
seats: 
² Those that are 
backless. 
If your backless 
booster seat has a 
removable shield, 
remove the shield 
and use the 
lap/shoulder belt. If a 
seating position has a low seat back and no head 
restraint, a backless booster seat may place your 
child’s head (top of ear level) above the top of the 
seat. In this case, move the backless booster to 
another seating position with a higher seat back 
and lap/shoulder belts. 
² Those with a high 
back. 
If, with a backless 
booster seat, you 
cannot find a seating 
position that 
adequately supports 
your child’s head, a 
high back booster seat would be a better choice. 
Both can be used in any vehicle in a seating position 
equipped with lap/shoulder belts if your child is over 
40 lbs. 
The shoulder belt should cross the chest, resting 
snugly on the center of the shoulder. The lap belt 
should rest low and snug across the hips, never up 
high across the stomach. 
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing 
a rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner under 
the booster seat may improve this condition. 
The importance of shoulder belts 
Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases 
the risk of a child’s head hitting a hard surface in a 
122
Seating and Safety Restraints 
collision. For this reason, you should never use a 
booster seat with a lap belt only. It is best to use a 
booster seat with lap/shoulder belts in the back seat-the 
safest place for children to ride. 
Follow all instructions provided by the 
manufacturer of the booster seat. 
Never put the shoulder belt under a child’s 
arm or behind the back because it 
eliminates the protection for the upper part of the 
body and may increase the risk of injury or death 
in a collision. 
Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost 
a child. They can slide around and increase 
the likelihood of injury or death in a collision. 
SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN 
Child and infant or child safety seats 
Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size 
and weight of the child. Carefully follow all of the 
manufacturer’s instructions with the safety seat you 
123
Seating and Safety Restraints 
put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the 
safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a 
sudden stop or collision. 
When installing a child safety seat: 
² Review and follow 
the information 
presented in the Air 
bag supplemental 
restraint system 
(SRS) section in this 
chapter. 
² Use the correct 
safety belt buckle for that seating position (the 
buckle closest to the direction the tongue is 
coming from). 
² Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until 
you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the 
tongue is securely fastened in the buckle. 
² Keep the buckle release button pointing up and 
away from the safety seat, with the tongue 
between the child seat and the release button, to 
prevent accidental unbuckling. 
² Place seat back in upright position. 
² Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. 
Refer to Automatic locking mode (passenger 
side front and outboard rear seating positions) (if 
equipped) section in this chapter. 
Ford recommends the use of a child safety seat 
having a top tether strap. Install the child safety seat 
in a seating position which is capable of providing a 
tether anchorage. For more information on top 
tether straps, refer to Attaching child safety seats 
with tether straps. in this chapter. 
Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s 
instructions included with the safety seat 
you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and 
use the safety seat properly, the child may be 
injured in a sudden stop or collision. 
124
Seating and Safety Restraints 
Installing child safety seats in combination lap 
and shoulder belt seating positions 
If you must use a 
forward facing child 
seat in the front seat 
(reminder - children 12 
years old and under 
should always be 
properly restrained in 
the rear seat) the 
shoulder belt must 
be routed through 
the belt guide at the 
top of the seatback, 
refer to Safety 
Restraints earlier in 
this chapter for routing 
through the belt holder. 
Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child 
seat. NEVER place a rear-facing child seat 
in front of an active air bag. If you must use a 
forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move 
the seat all the way back. 
1. Position the child 
safety seat in a seat 
with a combination lap 
and shoulder belt. 
Children 12 and under should be properly 
restrained in the rear seat whenever 
possible. 
125
Seating and Safety Restraints 
2. Pull down on the 
shoulder belt and then 
grasp the shoulder belt 
and lap belt together. 
3. While holding the 
shoulder and lap belt 
portions together, route 
the tongue through the 
child seat according to 
the child seat 
manufacturer’s 
instructions. Be sure 
the belt webbing is not 
twisted. 
4. Insert the belt 
tongue into the proper 
buckle (the buckle 
closest to the direction 
the tongue is coming 
from) for that seating 
position until you hear 
a snap and feel the 
latch engage. Make 
sure the tongue is 
latched securely by 
pulling on it. 
5. To put the retractor 
in the automatic 
locking mode, grasp the 
shoulder portion of the 
belt and pull downward 
until all of the belt is 
extracted and a click is 
heard. 
126
Seating and Safety Restraints 
6. Allow the belt to retract. The belt will click as it 
retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking 
mode. 
7. Pull the lap belt 
portion across the child 
seat toward the buckle 
and pull up on the 
shoulder belt while 
pushing down with 
your knee on the child 
seat. 
8. Allow the safety belt to retract to remove any 
slack in the belt. 
9. Before placing the 
child in the seat, 
forcibly move the seat 
forward and back to 
make sure the seat is 
securely held in place. 
To check this, grab the 
seat at the belt path 
and attempt to move it 
side to side and forward. There should be no more 
than one inch of movement for proper installation. 
10. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make 
sure the retractor is in the automatic locking mode 
(you should not be able to pull more belt out). If the 
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat 
steps two through nine. 
Check to make sure the child seat is properly 
secured before each use. 
Attaching child safety seats with tether straps in 
addition to the safety belt 
Most new forward-facing child safety seats include a 
tether strap which goes over the back of the seat 
and hooks to an anchoring point. Tether straps are 
available as an accessory for many older safety seats. 
Contact the manufacturer of your child seat for 
information about ordering a tether strap. 
127
Seating and Safety Restraints 
The rear seats of your vehicle are equipped with 
built-in tether strap anchors located behind the seats 
on the package tray behind the speakers (coupe) or 
on the lower backside of the seatback (convertible). 
The tether anchors in your vehicle are either located 
under a cover marked with the child tether anchor 
symbol (shown with title) or are under a flap in the 
convertible top boot. 
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the 
following positions (shown from top view): 
Attach the 
tether strap 
only to the 
appropriate tether 
anchor as shown. 
The tether strap may 
not work properly if 
attached somewhere 
other than the 
correct tether 
anchor. 
1. Position the child safety seat on the seat cushion. 
2. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the 
back of the seat. 
For vehicles with adjustable head restraints, route 
the tether strap under the head restraint and 
between the head restraint posts, otherwise route 
the tether strap over the top of the seatback. 
3. Locate the correct 
anchor for the selected 
seating position as 
shown previously. 
128
Seating and Safety Restraints 
For Coupe only: 
4. Open the tether 
anchor covers. 
5. Clip the tether strap 
to the anchor as 
shown. 
For Convertible only: 
The tether anchors on 
the convertible are 
located on the lower 
backside of the 
seatback. 
4. Access tether 
anchors located behind 
the seatback and pull 
away vinyl flap to 
expose anchors. 
5. Clip the tether strap 
to the anchor as 
shown. 
129
Seating and Safety Restraints 
If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly, the 
child safety seat may not be retained 
properly in the event of a collision. 
6. Refer to the Installing child safety seats in 
combination lap and shoulder belt seating 
positions section of this chapter for further 
instructions to secure the child safety seat. 
7. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap 
according to the manufacturer’s instructions. 
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, 
the risk of a child being injured in a collision 
greatly increases. 
Attaching safety seats with LATCH (Lower 
Anchors and Tethers for Children) attachments 
(if equipped) 
Some child safety seats have two rigid or webbing 
mounted attachments that connect to two anchors 
at certain seating positions in your vehicle. This type 
of child seat eliminates the need to use safety belts 
to attach the child seat. For forward-facing child 
seats, the tether strap must also be attached to the 
proper tether anchor. See Attaching safety seats 
with tether straps in this chapter. 
130
Seating and Safety Restraints 
Your vehicle has LATCH anchors for child seat 
installation at the seating positions marked with the 
child seat symbol. 
The center of 
the rear seat is 
NOT designed as a 
seating position. The 
LATCH anchors were 
not designed to be 
used with a child 
seat in the center 
position and there is 
no tether anchor 
available at the 
center. Putting a 
child seat in the 
center would also 
block access to the 
safety restraint 
buckles. Use as a 
seating position, with 
or without a child 
restraint, may 
increase the risk of 
injury or death. 
Never attach two LATCH child safety seats 
to the same anchor. In a crash, one anchor 
may not be strong enough to hold two child safety 
seat attachments and may break, causing serious 
injury or death. 
131
Seating and Safety Restraints 
The lower anchors for 
child seat installation 
are located at the rear 
section of the rear seat 
between the cushion 
and seat back. The 
LATCH anchors are 
below the locator 
symbols on the seat 
back. One pair of 
anchors are provided 
for each rear designated seating position. 
Follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions to 
properly install a child seat with LATCH 
attachments. Two plastic LATCH guides can be 
obtained at no charge from any Ford or Lincoln- 
Mercury Dealer. They snap onto the LATCH lower 
anchors in the seat to help attach a child seat with 
rigid attachments. The guides hold the seat trim 
away to expose the anchor and make it easier to 
attach some child seats. 
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the 
child seat only to the anchors shown. 
If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH 
attachments, do not tighten the tether strap enough 
to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat cushion 
when the child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap 
just snug without lifting the front of the child seat. 
Keeping the child seat just touching the vehicle seat 
gives the best protection in a severe crash. 
Each time you use the safety seat, check that the 
seat is properly attached to the lower anchors and 
tether anchor. Try to tilt the child seat from side to 
side. Also try to tug the seat forward. Check to see 
if the anchors hold the seat in place. 
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, 
the risk of a child being injured in a crash 
greatly increases. 
132
Driving 
STARTING 
Positions of the ignition 
1. ACCESSORY, allows 
4 
the electrical 
3 
accessories such as the 
5 
radio to operate while 
2 
the engine is not 
running. 
1 
2. LOCK, locks the 
steering wheel, automatic transmission gearshift 
lever and allows key removal. For vehicle equipped 
with a manual transmission, you must depress the 
ignition release lever to release the key. 
3. OFF, shuts off the engine and all accessories 
without locking the steering wheel. This position 
also allows the automatic transmission shift lever to 
be moved from the P (Park) position without the 
brake pedal being depressed. 
In the ignition OFF position, the automatic 
transmission shift lever can be moved from 
the P (Park) position without the brake pedal 
depressed. To avoid unwanted vehicle movement, 
always set the parking brake. 
4. ON, all electrical circuits operational. Warning 
lights illuminated. Key position when driving. 
5. START, cranks the engine. Release the key as 
soon as the engine starts. 
Preparing to start your vehicle 
Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain 
control system. This system meets all Canadian 
Interference-Causing Equipment standard 
requirements regulating the impulse electrical field 
strength of radio noise. 
When starting a fuel-injected engine, avoid pressing 
the accelerator before or during starting. Only use 
133
Driving 
the accelerator when you have difficulty starting the 
engine. For more information on starting the vehicle, 
refer to Starting the engine in this chapter. 
Extended idling at high engine speeds can 
produce very high temperatures in the 
engine and exhaust system, creating the risk of 
fire or other damage. 
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in 
dry grass or other dry ground cover. The 
emission system heats up the engine compartment 
and exhaust system, which can start a fire. 
Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage 
or in other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes 
can be toxic. Always open the garage door before 
you start the engine. See Guarding against 
exhaust fumes in this chapter for more 
instructions. 
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your 
vehicle, have your dealer inspect your 
vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell 
exhaust fumes. 
Important safety precautions 
A computer system controls the engine’s idle 
revolutions per minute (RPM). When the engine 
starts, the idle RPM runs higher than normal in 
order to warm the engine. If the engine idle speed 
does not slow down automatically, have the vehicle 
checked. Do not allow the vehicle to idle for more 
than 10 minutes at high engine RPM. 
Before starting the vehicle: 
1. Make sure all vehicle occupants have buckled 
their safety belts. For more information on safety 
belts and their proper usage, refer to the Seating 
and safety restraints chapter. 
134
Driving 
2. Make sure the headlamps and vehicle accessories 
are off. 
If starting a vehicle with an automatic transmission: 
² Make sure the 
parking brake is set. 
² Make sure the gearshift is in P (Park). 
If starting a vehicle with a manual transmission: 
² Make sure the parking brake is set. 
² Push the clutch 
pedal to the floor. 
3. Turn the key to 4 
(ON) without turning 
the key to 5 (START). 
1 
2 
3 
4 
5 
135
40 
30 
50 
60 
60 70 
80 100 120 
80 
90 
140 
160 
180 
100 
110 
120 
4 
5 
3 
2 
RPMX1000 
H L H 
6 
BRAKE 
! P 
L 
0 
SELECT/RESET 
. 
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
C 
E F 
20 
10 
40 
20 
7 
1 
H 
MPH km/h 
FUEL DOOR 
THEFT 
LOW 
FUEL 
O/D 
OFF 
AIR 
BAG 
SERVICE 
ENGINE 
SOON 
ABS 
CHECK 
FUEL 
CAP 
Make sure the corresponding lights illuminate or 
illuminate briefly. If a light fails to illuminate, have 
the vehicle serviced. 
² If the driver’s safety belt is fastened, the light 
may not illuminate. 
Starting the engine 
Note: Whenever you start your vehicle, release the 
key as soon as the engine starts. Excessive cranking 
could damage the starter. 
1. Turn the key to 5 
(START) without 
4 
pressing the 
3 
accelerator pedal and 
5 
release as soon as the 
2 
engine starts. The key 
will return to 4 (ON). 
1 
2. If the temperature is 
above –12° C (10° F) and the engine does not start 
within five seconds on the first try, turn the key to 
OFF, wait 10 seconds and try again. If the engine 
does not start in two attempts, press the accelerator 
all the way to the floor and hold. Turn the key to 
the START position. 
Driving 
136
Driving 
3. If the temperature is below -12° C (10° F) and 
the engine does not start in 15 seconds on the first 
try, turn the key OFF and wait 10 seconds and try 
again. If the engine does not start in two attempts, 
press the accelerator pedal all the way to floor and 
hold. Turn the key to START position. 
4. When the engine starts, release the key, then 
release the accelerator pedal gradually as the engine 
speeds up. 
5. After idling for a few seconds, apply the brake, 
shift into gear and drive. 
Using the engine block heater (if equipped) 
An engine block heater warms the engine coolant, 
which improves starting, warms up the engine faster 
and allows the heater-defroster system to respond 
quickly. Use of an engine block heater is strongly 
recommended if you live in a region where 
temperatures reach -23° C (-10° F) or below. 
For best results, plug the heater in at least three 
hours before starting the vehicle. Using the heater 
for longer than three hours will not harm the engine, 
so the heater can be plugged in the night before 
starting the vehicle. 
To prevent electrical shock, do not use your 
heater with ungrounded electrical systems 
or two-pronged (cheater) adapters. 
Guarding against exhaust fumes 
Although odorless and colorless, carbon monoxide is 
present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid 
its dangerous effects. 
If you ever smell exhaust fumes of any kind 
inside your vehicle, have your dealer inspect 
and fix your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if 
you smell exhaust fumes. These fumes are harmful 
and could kill you. 
137
Driving 
Have the exhaust and body ventilation systems 
checked whenever: 
² the vehicle is raised for service. 
² the sound of the exhaust system changes. 
² the vehicle has been damaged in a collision. 
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its 
constituents, and certain vehicle 
components contain or emit chemicals known to 
the State of California to cause cancer and birth 
defects or other reproductive harm. In addition, 
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain 
products of component wear contain or emit 
chemicals known to the State of California to 
cause cancer and birth defects or other 
reproductive harm. 
Important ventilating information 
If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped in 
an open area for long periods of time, open the 
windows at least 2.5 cm (one inch). 
Adjust the heating or air conditioning (if equipped) 
to bring in fresh air. 
Improve vehicle ventilation by keeping all air inlet 
vents clear of snow, leaves and other debris. 
BRAKES 
Your service brakes are self-adjusting. Refer to the 
scheduled maintenance guide for scheduled 
maintenance. 
Occasional brake noise is normal and often does not 
indicate a performance concern with the vehicle’s 
brake system. In normal operation, automotive brake 
systems may emit occasional or intermittent squeal 
or groan noises when the brakes are applied. Such 
noises are usually heard during the first few brake 
applications in the morning; however, they may be 
heard at any time while braking and can be 
aggravated by environmental conditions such as 
138
Driving 
cold, heat, moisture, road dust, salt or mud. If a 
“metal-to-metal,” “continuous grinding” or 
“continuous squeal” sound is present while braking, 
the brake linings may be worn-out and should be 
inspected by a qualified service technician. 
If you are driving down a long or steep hill, 
shift to a lower gear. Do not apply your 
brakes continuously, as they may overheat and 
become less effective. 
Parking brake 
Apply the parking 
brake whenever the 
vehicle is parked. To 
set the parking brake, 
apply the brake pedal 
and pull the parking 
brake handle up as far 
as possible. 
The BRAKE warning 
BRAKE 
lamp in the instrument 
cluster illuminates and 
! P 
remains illuminated 
(when the ignition is turned ON) until the parking 
brake is released. 
Always set the parking brake fully and make 
sure that the gearshift is securely latched in 
P (Park) (automatic transmission) or in 1 (First 
Gear) (manual transmission). 
The parking brake is not recommended to stop a 
moving vehicle. However, if the normal brakes fail, 
the parking brake can be used to stop your vehicle 
in an emergency. Since the parking brake applies 
only the rear brakes, the vehicle’s stopping distance 
will increase greatly and the handling of your vehicle 
will be adversely affected. 
139
Driving 
To release the parking 
brake, the brake handle 
may need to be pulled 
up slightly to release 
pressure before 
pushing in the button. 
Push the button on the 
end of the parking 
brake handle and push the handle down as far as 
possible. Driving with the parking brake applied will 
cause the brakes to wear out quickly and reduce fuel 
economy. 
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) 
On vehicles equipped with an anti-lock braking 
system (ABS), a noise from the hydraulic pump 
motor and pulsation in the pedal may be observed 
during ABS braking events. Pedal pulsation coupled 
with noise while braking under panic conditions or 
on loose gravel, bumps, wet or snowy roads is 
normal and indicates proper functioning of the 
vehicle’s anti-lock brake system. The ABS performs a 
self-check after you start the engine and begin to 
drive away. A brief mechanical noise may be heard 
during this test. This is normal. If a malfunction is 
found, the ABS warning light will come on. If the 
vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder in the 
steering wheel while braking, the vehicle should be 
inspected by a qualified service technician. 
The ABS operates by 
detecting the onset of 
wheel lockup during 
brake applications and 
compensates for this 
tendency. The wheels 
are prevented from 
locking even when the brakes are firmly applied. The 
accompanying illustration depicts the advantage of 
an ABS equipped vehicle (on bottom) to a non-ABS 
equipped vehicle (on top) during hard braking with 
loss of front braking traction. 
140
Driving 
ABS warning lamp ABS 
The ABS warning lamp in the instrument cluster 
momentarily illuminates when the ignition is turned 
to the ON position. If the light does not illuminate 
momentarily at start up, remains on or continues to 
flash, the ABS needs to be serviced. 
With the ABS light on, 
BRAKE 
the anti-lock brake 
system is disabled and 
! P 
normal braking is still 
effective unless the brake warning light also remains 
illuminated with parking brake released. (If your 
brake warning lamp illuminates, have your vehicle 
serviced immediately.) 
Using ABS 
² In an emergency or when maximum efficiency 
from the four-wheel ABS is required, apply 
continuous force on the brake. The four wheel 
ABS will be activated immediately, thus allowing 
you to retain full steering control of your vehicle 
and, providing there is sufficient space, will 
enable you to avoid obstacles and bring the 
vehicle to a controlled stop. 
² The anti-lock system does not reduce stopping 
distance. Always leave enough room between your 
vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to stop. 
² We recommend that you familiarize yourself with 
this braking technique. However, avoid taking any 
unnecessary risks. 
Hydraulic brake booster system (Hydroboost) 
The Hydroboost system receives fluid pressure from 
the power steering pump to provide power assist 
during braking. 
The sound of the pump operating may be heard by 
the driver, but this is a normal characteristic of the 
system. 
For Hydroboost-equipped vehicles operating under 
normal conditions, the noise of the fluid flowing 
141
Driving 
through the booster may be heard whenever the 
brake is applied. This condition is normal. Vehicle 
service is not required. 
If braking performance or pedal response becomes 
very poor, even when the pedal is strongly 
depressed, it may indicate the presence of air in the 
hydraulic system or leakage of fluid. Stop the vehicle 
safely as soon as possible and seek service 
immediately. 
STEERING 
Your vehicle is equipped with power steering. Power 
steering uses energy from the engine to decrease 
the driver’s effort in steering the vehicle. 
To prevent damage to the power steering pump: 
² Never hold the steering wheel to the extreme 
right or the extreme left for more than a few 
seconds when the engine is running. 
² Do not operate the vehicle with the power 
steering pump fluid level below the MIN mark on 
the reservoir. 
If the power steering system breaks down (or if the 
engine is turned off), you can steer the vehicle 
manually, but it takes more effort. 
If the steering wanders or pulls, the condition could 
be caused by any of the following: 
² Underinflated tire(s) on any wheel(s) 
² Uneven vehicle loading 
² High crown in center of road 
² High crosswinds 
² Wheels out of alignment 
² Loose or worn suspension components 
TRACTION CONTROLY 
Your vehicle may be equipped with the optional 
Traction Controly system. This system helps you 
maintain the stability and steerability of your 
vehicle. It is especially useful on slippery road 
142
Driving 
surfaces. The system operates by detecting and 
controlling wheel spin. The system borrows many of 
the electronic and mechanical elements already 
present in the anti-lock braking system (ABS). 
Wheel-speed sensors allow excess rear wheel spin to 
be detected by the Traction Controly portion of the 
ABS computer. Any excessive wheel spin is 
controlled by automatically applying and releasing 
the rear brakes in conjunction with engine torque 
reductions. Engine torque reduction is realized via 
the fully electronic spark and fuel injection systems. 
This process is very sensitive to driving conditions 
and very fast acting. The rear wheels “search” for 
optimum traction several times a second and 
adjustments are made accordingly. 
The Traction Controly system will allow your 
vehicle to make better use of available traction on 
slippery surfaces. The system is a driver aid which 
makes your vehicle easier to handle primarily on 
snow, ice covered and gravel roads. 
During Traction 
Controly operation, 
the traction control 
active light will 
illuminate, you may hear an electric motor type of 
sound coming from the engine compartment and the 
engine will not “rev-up” when you push further on 
the accelerator. This is normal system behavior. 
The Traction Controly 
on/off switch, located 
below the radio, 
illuminates when the 
system is OFF. The 
Traction Controly system will revert to the ON 
position every time the ignition is turned OFF and 
ON. 
If you should become stuck in snow or ice or on a 
very slippery road surface, try switching the Traction 
Controly system off. This may allow excess wheel 
spin to “dig” the vehicle out and enable a successful 
“rocking” maneuver. 
143
Driving 
If a system fault is detected the OFF indicator lamp 
on the traction control switch will be illuminated and 
your vehicle should be serviced. 
TRACTION-LOK AXLE (IF EQUIPPED) 
This axle provides added traction on slippery 
surfaces, particularly when one wheel is on a poor 
traction surface. Under normal conditions, the 
Traction-Lok axle functions like a standard rear axle. 
Extended use of other than the manufacturer’s 
specified size tires on a Traction-Lok rear axle could 
result in a permanent reduction in effectiveness. 
This loss of effectiveness does not affect normal 
driving and should not be noticeable to the driver. 
To reduce the risk of injury, never run the 
engine with one wheel off the ground, such 
as when changing a tire. 
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION 
(IF EQUIPPED) 
Brake-shift interlock 
This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock 
feature that prevents the gearshift lever from being 
moved from P (Park) when the ignition is in the ON 
position unless brake pedal is depressed. 
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P 
(Park) with ignition in the ON position and the 
brake pedal depressed: 
1. Apply the parking brake, turn ignition key to 
LOCK, then remove the key. 
2. Insert the key and turn it to OFF. Apply the 
brake pedal and shift to N (Neutral). 
In the ignition OFF position, the automatic 
transmission shift lever can be moved from 
the P (Park) position without the brake pedal 
depressed. To avoid unwanted vehicle movement, 
always set the parking brake. 
144
Driving 
3. Start the vehicle. 
If it is necessary to use the above procedure to 
move the gearshift lever, it is possible that a fuse 
has blown or the vehicle’s brakelamps are not 
operating properly. Refer to Fuses and relays in the 
Roadside emergencies chapter. 
Do not drive your vehicle until you verify 
that the brakelamps are working. 
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be 
rocked out by shifting from forward and reverse 
gears, stopping between shifts, in a steady pattern. 
Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear. 
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at 
normal operating temperature or damage to 
the transmission may occur. 
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few 
minutes or damage to the transmission and 
tires may occur or the engine may overheat. 
Always set the parking brake fully and make 
sure the gearshift is latched in P (Park). 
Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and remove 
the key whenever you leave your vehicle. 
If the parking brake is fully released, but the 
brake warning lamp remains illuminated, the 
brakes may not be working properly. See your 
dealer or a qualified service technician. 
145
Driving 
Driving with an automatic overdrive 
transmission with console gearshift and O/D off 
switch 
Your automatic 
overdrive transmission 
provides fully 
automatic operation in 
either D (Overdrive) or 
with the O/D OFF 
switch depressed. 
Driving with the 
gearshift lever in D 
(Overdrive) gives the 
best fuel economy for 
normal driving 
conditions. For manual control, start in 1 (First) and 
then shift manually. 
Driving with a 4–speed automatic transmission 
(if equipped) 
Use the following 
procedure to put your 
vehicle in gear. 
1. Start the engine. 
2. Depress and hold 
the brake pedal. 
3. Push and hold the 
thumb button. 
4. Move gearshift lever 
out of P (Park). 
Hold the brake pedal down while you move 
the gearshift lever from P (Park) to another 
position. If you do not hold the brake pedal down, 
your vehicle may move unexpectedly and injure 
someone. 
146
Understanding gearshift positions 
P (Park) 
Always come to a 
complete stop before 
shifting into P (Park). 
Make sure the gearshift 
lever is securely 
latched in P (Park). 
This position locks the 
transmission and 
prevents the rear 
wheels from turning. 
Always set the parking brake fully and make 
sure the gearshift lever is latched in P 
(Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and 
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle. 
R (Reverse) 
With the gearshift lever 
in R (Reverse), the 
vehicle will move 
backward. Always come 
to a complete stop 
before shifting into and 
out of R (Reverse). 
N (Neutral) 
With the gearshift lever 
in N (Neutral), the 
vehicle can be started 
and is free to roll. Hold 
the brake pedal down 
while in this gear. 
Driving 
147
Driving 
(Overdrive) 
The normal driving 
position for the best 
fuel economy. 
Transmission operates 
in gears one through 
four. 
(Overdrive) can be 
deactivated by pressing 
the transmission 
control switch on the 
gearshift lever. 
The transmission 
O/D 
control indicator light 
(TCIL) will illuminate 
OFF 
on the instrument 
cluster. 
Drive – Not shown on the display. Activate by 
pressing the transmission control switch on the 
gearshift lever with the gearshift in the position. 
The O/D OFF indicator will illuminate on the 
instrument cluster. Transmission operates in gears 
one through three. (Drive) provides more engine 
braking than (Overdrive) and is useful when: 
² driving with a heavy load. 
² towing a trailer up or down steep hills. 
² additional engine braking is desired. If towing a 
trailer, refer to Driving while you tow in this 
chapter. 
148
Driving 
To return to (Overdrive) mode, press the 
transmission control switch. The O/D OFF indicator 
will no longer be illuminated. 
Each time the vehicle is started, the transmission 
will automatically return to normal overdrive mode. 
Every time the vehicle is shut off and restarted, you 
must press the transmission control switch to cancel 
overdrive operation if driving in overdrive is not 
desired. 
2 (Second) 
Use 2 (Second) to 
start-up on slippery 
roads or to provide 
additional engine 
braking on downgrades. 
Transmission operates 
only in Second gear. 
1 (First) 
Use 1 (Low) to provide 
maximum engine 
braking on steep 
downgrades. Upshifts 
can be made by shifting 
to 2 (Second) or to 
(Overdrive). Selecting 
1 (Low) at higher 
speeds causes the transmission to shift to a lower 
gear, and will shift to 1 (Low) after vehicle 
decelerates to the proper speed. 
Forced Downshifts 
To gain acceleration in (Overdrive) or Drive 
(O/D OFF) when passing another vehicle, push the 
accelerator to the floor. The transmission will 
downshift to the appropriate gear: third, second or 
first gear. 
149
Driving 
MANUAL TRANSMISSION OPERATION 
(IF EQUIPPED) 
Using the clutch 
Vehicles equipped with a manual transmission have a 
starter interlock that prevents cranking of the 
engine unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed. 
When starting a vehicle with a manual transmission, 
you must: 
1. Make sure the 
parking brake is fully 
1 
3 5 
set. 
2 4 R 
2. Depress the clutch 
pedal fully. 
3. Put the gearshift 
lever in neutral. 
4. Start the engine and 
let it idle for a few 
4 
3 
seconds. 
5 
5. Depress the brake 
2 
pedal. 
6. Release the parking 
1 
brake. 
7. Move the gearshift 
lever to the desired 
gear. 
8. Release the brake 
pedal. 
9. Slowly release the 
clutch pedal while slowly pressing down on the 
accelerator pedal. 
² Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch 
pedal and do not use the clutch to hold your 
vehicle at a standstill while waiting on a hill. 
These actions will greatly reduce clutch life. 
150
Driving 
Recommended shift speeds 
Do not downshift into 1 (First) when your 
vehicle is moving faster then 24 km/h (15 mph). 
This will damage the clutch. 
Upshift according to the following chart: 
Upshifts when accelerating 
(recommended for best fuel economy) 
Shift from: 
1 - 2 18 km/h (11 mph) 
2 - 3 31 km/h (19 mph) 
3 - 4 48 km/h (30 mph) 
4 - 5 64 km/h (40 mph) 
Parking your vehicle 
1. Disengage the 
clutch, apply brake 
and shift into Neutral. 
2. Set parking brake. 
3. Shift into 1 (First). 
1 
3 5 
2 4 R 
151
4. Turn the ignition key 
to position 3 (OFF). 
3 
2 
1 
5 
4 
Do not park your vehicle in Neutral, it may 
move unexpectedly and injure someone. Use 
1 (First) gear and set the parking brake fully. 
Reverse 
You must be at a complete stop to shift into R 
(Reverse). You can shift into R (Reverse) only by 
moving the gearshift lever through the neutral plane. 
R (Reverse) can not be engaged directly from 5 (5th 
gear). This is a feature that protects the 
transmission from accidentally shifting into R 
(Reverse) when you downshift from 5 (Fifth). 
Make sure that your vehicle is at a complete 
stop before you shift into R (Reverse). Failure 
to do so may damage the transmission. 
To shift into R 
(Reverse): 
1 
3 5 
1. Bring your vehicle to 
2 4 R 
a complete stop. 
2. Hold the brake pedal 
down. 
3. Hold the clutch 
pedal down. 
4. Move the gearshift 
lever all the way to the 
right and pull it back 
into R (Reverse). 
5. Release the brake 
pedal. 
6. Slowly release the clutch pedal. 
Driving 
152
Removing key from ignition 
² Turn the ignition key 
to position 3 (OFF). 
² Push the release 
lever forward and 
rotate the key 
towards you and 
remove. 
Driving 
DRIVING THROUGH WATER 
Do not drive quickly through standing water, 
especially if the depth is unknown. Traction or brake 
capability may be limited and if the ignition system 
gets wet, your engine may stall. Water may also 
enter your engine’s air intake and severely damage 
your engine. 
If driving through deep or standing water is 
unavoidable, proceed very slowly. Never drive 
through water that is higher than the bottom of the 
hubs (for trucks) or the bottom of the wheel rims 
(for cars). 
Once through the water, always try the brakes. Wet 
brakes do not stop the vehicle as effectively as dry 
brakes. Drying can be improved by moving your 
vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the 
brake pedal. 
Driving through deep water where the 
transmission vent tube is submerged may allow 
water into the transmission and cause internal 
transmission damage. Have the fluid checked 
and, if water is found, replace the fluid. 
153
Driving 
VEHICLE LOADING 
Before loading a vehicle, familiarize yourself with the 
following terms: 
² Base Curb Weight: Weight of the vehicle 
including any standard equipment, fluids, 
lubricants, etc. It does not include occupants or 
aftermarket equipment. 
² Payload: Combined maximum allowable weight of 
cargo, occupants and optional equipment. The 
payload equals the gross vehicle weight rating 
minus base curb weight. 
² GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight): Base curb weight 
plus payload weight. The GVW is not a limit or a 
specification. 
² GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating): 
Maximum permissible total weight of the base 
vehicle, occupants, optional equipment and cargo. 
The GVWR is specific to each vehicle and is listed 
on the Safety Certification Label on the driver’s 
door pillar. 
² GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating): Carrying 
capacity for each axle system. The GAWR is 
specific to each vehicle and is listed on the Safety 
Certification Label on the driver’s door pillar. 
² GCW (Gross Combined Weight): The 
combined weight of the towing vehicle (including 
occupants and cargo) and the loaded trailer. 
² GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating): 
Maximum permissible combined weight of towing 
vehicle (including occupants and cargo) and the 
loaded trailer 
² Maximum Trailer Weight Rating: Maximum 
weight of a trailer the vehicle is permitted to tow. 
The maximum trailer weight rating is determined 
by subtracting the vehicle curb weight for each 
engine/transmission combination, any required 
option weight for trailer towing and the weight of 
the driver from the GCWR for the towing vehicle. 
² Maximum Trailer Weight: Maximum weight of a 
trailer the loaded vehicle (including occupants 
154
and cargo) is permitted to tow. It is determined 
by subtracting the weight of the loaded trailer 
towing vehicle from the GCWR for the towing 
vehicle. 
² Trailer Weight Range: Specified weight range 
that the trailer must fall within that ranges from 
zero to the maximum trailer weight rating. 
Remember to figure in the tongue load of your 
loaded trailer when figuring the total weight. 
Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR 
specified on the certification label. 
Do not use replacement tires with lower load 
carrying capacities than the originals because they 
may lower the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR 
limitations. Replacement tires with a higher limit 
than the originals do not increase the GVWR and 
GAWR limitations. 
The Safety Certification Label, found on the driver’s 
door pillar, lists several important vehicle weight 
rating limitations. Before adding any additional 
equipment, refer to these limitations. If you are 
adding weight to the front of your vehicle, 
(potentially including weight added to the cab), the 
weight added should not exceed the front axle 
reserve capacity (FARC). Additional frontal weight 
may be added to the front axle reserve capacity 
provided you limit your payload in other ways (i.e. 
restrict the number of occupants or amount of cargo 
carried). 
Always ensure that the weight of occupants, cargo 
and equipment being carried is within the weight 
limitations that have been established for your 
vehicle including both gross vehicle weight and front 
and rear gross axle weight rating limits. Under no 
circumstance should these limitations be exceeded. 
Exceeding any vehicle weight rating 
limitation could result in serious damage to 
the vehicle and/or personal injury. 
Driving 
155
Driving 
TRAILER TOWING 
Your vehicle is not equipped to tow. No towing 
packages are available through Ford or 
Lincoln/Mercury dealers. 
RECREATIONAL TOWING 
(ALL WHEELS ON THE GROUND) 
Follow these guidelines for your specific powertrain 
combination to tow your vehicle with all four wheels 
on the ground (such as behind a recreational 
vehicle). 
These guidelines are designed to ensure that your 
transmission is not damaged due to insufficient 
lubrication. 
All Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) vehicles: 
This applies to all cars and 4x2 trucks/sport utilities 
with rear wheel drive capability. 
An example of recreational towing is towing your 
vehicle behind a motorhome. The following 
recreational towing guidelines are designed to 
ensure that your transmission is not damaged. 
² Place the transmission in N (Neutral) 
² Maximum speed is 56 km/h (35 mph) 
² Maximum distance is 80 km (50 miles) 
If a distance of 80 km (50 miles) or a speed of 56 
km/h (35 mph) must be exceeded, you must 
disconnect the driveshaft. Ford recommends the 
driveshaft be removed/installed only by a qualified 
technician. See your local dealer for driveshaft 
removal/installation. 
Improper removal/installation of the driveshaft 
can cause transmission fluid loss, damage to 
the driveshaft and internal transmission 
components. 
156
Roadside Emergencies 
GETTING ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE 
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle 
concern, Ford Motor Company offers a 
complimentary roadside assistance program. This 
program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited 
Warranty. The service is available: 
² 24–hours, seven days a week 
² for the New Vehicle Limited Warranty period of 
three years or 60,000 km (36,000 miles), 
whichever occurs first on Ford and Mercury 
vehicles, and four years or 80,000 km (50,000 
miles) on Lincoln vehicles. 
Roadside assistance will cover: 
² changing a flat tire 
² jump-starts 
² lock-out assistance 
² limited fuel delivery 
² towing of your disabled vehicle to the nearest 
Ford Motor Company dealership, or your selling 
dealer if within 56.3 km (35 miles) of the nearest 
Ford Motor Company dealership (one tow per 
disablement). Even non-warranty related tows, 
like accidents or getting stuck in the mud or 
snow, are covered (some exclusions apply, such as 
impound towing or repossession). 
Canadian customers refer to your Owner 
Information Guide for information on: 
² Coverage period 
² Exact fuel amounts 
² Towing of your disabled vehicle 
² Emergency travel expense reimbursement 
² Travel planning benefits 
USING ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE 
Complete the roadside assistance identification card 
and place it in your wallet for quick reference. In the 
United States, this card is found in the Owner Guide 
157
Roadside Emergencies 
portfolio in the glove compartment in Ford vehicles 
and is mailed to you if you own a Mercury or 
Lincoln. In Canada, the card is found in the Owner 
Information Guide in the glove compartment. 
U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicle customers who require 
roadside assistance, call 1–800–241–3673; Lincoln 
vehicle customers call 1–800–521–4140. 
Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, 
call 1–800–665–2006. 
If you need to arrange roadside assistance for 
yourself, Ford Motor Company will reimburse a 
reasonable amount. To obtain reimbursement 
information, U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicles 
customers call 1-800-241-3673; Lincoln vehicle 
customers call 1–800–521–4140. 
Canadian customers who need to obtain 
reimbursement information, call 1–800–665–2006. 
ROADSIDE COVERAGE BEYOND BASIC 
WARRANTY 
In the United States, you may purchase additional 
roadside assistance coverage beyond this period 
through the Ford Auto Club by contacting your Ford 
or Lincoln Mercury dealer. 
Similarly in Canada, for uninterrupted Roadside 
Assistance coverage, you may purchase extended 
coverage prior to your Basic Warranty’s Roadside 
Assistance expiring. For more information and 
enrollment, contact 1–877–294–2582 or visit our 
website at www.ford.ca. 
HAZARD FLASHER 
Use only in an emergency to warn traffic of vehicle 
breakdown, approaching danger, etc. The hazard 
flashers can be operated when the ignition is off. 
158
Roadside Emergencies 
² The hazard lights 
control is located on 
top of the steering 
column. 
² Depress hazard 
lights control to 
activate all hazard 
flashers 
simultaneously. 
² Depress control again to turn the flashers off. 
FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF SWITCH FUEL 
RESET 
The fuel pump shut-off switch is a device intended 
to stop the electric fuel pump when your vehicle has 
been involved in a substantial jolt. 
After a collision, if the engine cranks but does not 
start, the fuel pump shut-off switch may have been 
activated. 
The fuel pump shut-off 
switch is located on the 
left side of the trunk 
between the left rear 
tail light and the trunk 
liner, and to the left of 
the hole in the trunk 
liner. If you are unable 
to access the switch 
through the hole, loosen the trunk liner near the 
switch by removing the cargo net hook and pulling 
the liner forward to expose the switch. 
Use the following procedure to reset the fuel pump 
shut-off switch. 
1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. 
2. Check the fuel system for leaks. 
3. If no fuel leak is apparent, reset the fuel pump 
shut-off switch by pushing in on the reset button. 
4. Turn the ignition to the ON position. Pause for a 
few seconds and return the key to the OFF position. 
5. Make a further check for leaks in the fuel system. 
159
Roadside Emergencies 
FUSES AND RELAYS 
Fuses 
If electrical 
components in the 
vehicle are not 
working, a fuse may 
have blown. Blown 
fuses are identified by a broken wire within the fuse. 
Check the appropriate fuses before replacing any 
electrical components. 
Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the 
specified amperage rating. Using a fuse with a higher 
amperage rating can cause severe wire damage and 
could start a fire. 
Standard fuse amperage rating and color 
COLOR 
Fuse 
rating 
Mini 
fuses 
Standard 
fuses 
Maxi 
fuses 
15 
Cartridge 
maxi 
fuses 
Fuse 
link 
cartridge 
2A Grey Grey — — — 
3A Violet Violet — — — 
4A Pink Pink — — — 
5A Tan Tan — — — 
7.5A Brown Brown — — — 
10A Red Red — — — 
15A Blue Blue — — — 
20A Yellow Yellow Yellow Blue Blue 
25A Natural Natural — — — 
30A Green Green Green Pink Pink 
40A — — Orange Green Green 
50A — — Red Red Red 
60A — — Blue — Yellow 
70A — — Tan — Brown 
80A — — Natural — Black 
Passenger compartment fuse panel 
The fuse panel is located below and to the left of 
the steering wheel by the brake pedal. Remove the 
panel cover to access the fuses. 
160
Roadside Emergencies 
To remove a fuse use the fuse puller tool provided 
on the fuse panel cover. 
1 2 3 4 5 
6 7 8 9 10 11 
SEE OWNERS MANUAL FOR FUSE INFO 
12 13 14 15 16 17 
18 19 20 21 22 23 
24 25 26 27 28 29 
30 31 32 33 34 35 
36 37 38 39 40 41 
The fuses are coded as follows: 
Fuse/Relay 
Fuse Amp 
Location 
Rating 
42 
44 43 
Passenger Compartment Fuse 
Panel Description 
1 20A Cigar lighter 
2 20A Engine controls 
3 — Not used 
4 10A Right-hand low beam headlamp 
5 15A Instrument cluster, Traction 
control switch 
6 20A Starter motor relay 
7 15A GEM, Interior lamps 
8 20A Engine controls 
9 30A Mach 460 subwoofers 
10 10A Left—hand low beam headlamp 
11 15A Back-up lamps 
12 — Not used 
13 15A Electronic flasher 
14 — Not used 
15 15A Power lumbar 
161
Roadside Emergencies 
Fuse/Relay 
Location 
Fuse Amp 
Rating 
Passenger Compartment Fuse 
Panel Description 
16 — Not used 
17 15A Speed control servo, Shift lock 
actuator 
18 15A Electronic flasher 
19 15A Power mirror switch, GEM, 
Anti-theft relay, Power door 
locks, Door ajar switches 
20 15A Convertible top switch 
21 5A Instrument cluster and engine 
control memory 
22 — Not used 
23 15A A/C clutch, Defogger switch 
24 30A Climate control blower motor 
25 25A Luggage compartment lid release 
26 30A Wiper/Washer motor, Wiper 
relays 
27 20A Radio 
28 15A GEM, Overdrive cancel switch 
29 15A Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) 
module 
30 15A Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) 
module 
31 10A Data link connector 
32 15A Radio, GEM 
33 15A Stop lamp switch, Speed control 
deactivation switch 
34 20A Instrument Cluster, CCRM, Data 
link connector, Securilock 
transceiver module 
35 15A Shift lock actuator, Powertrain 
Control Module (PCM), Speed 
control servo, ABS module 
36 15A Air bag control module 
37 5A Adjustable illumination 
38 20A High beams 
39 5A GEM 
40 — Not used 
162
Fuse/Relay 
Location 
Roadside Emergencies 
Fuse Amp 
Rating 
Passenger Compartment Fuse 
Panel Description 
41 15A Brake lamp 
42 — Not used 
43 20A CB Power windows 
44 — Not used 
Power distribution box 
The power distribution box is located in the engine 
compartment. The power distribution box contains 
high-current fuses that protect your vehicle’s main 
electrical systems from overloads. 
Always disconnect the battery before 
servicing high current fuses. 
Always replace the cover to the power 
distribution box before reconnecting the 
battery or refilling fluid reservoirs 
If the battery has been disconnected and 
reconnected, refer to the Battery section of the 
Maintenance and specifications chapter. 
11 
MAXI 
10 
MAXI 
9 
MAXI 
8 
MAXI 
7 
MAXI 
6 
MAXI 
5 
MAXI 
4 
MAXI 
3 
MAXI 
2 
MAXI 
1 
MAXI 
RELAY 
RELAY 
5 
RELAY 
4 
RELAY 
3 
RELAY 
2 
14 
MINI 
DIODE 
1 
12 
MAXI 29 
28 
CB 
27 
MAXI 
26 
MAXI 
25 
MAXI 
24 
MINI 
23 
MINI 
22 
MINI 
21 
MINI 
18 
MINI 
20 
MINI 
19 
MINI 
17 
MINI 
16 
MINI 
15 
MINI 
13 
MINI 
SEE OWNERS MANUAL CONSULTER LA GUIDE 
163
Roadside Emergencies 
The high-current fuses are coded as follows. 
Fuse/Relay 
Location 
Fuse Amp 
Rating 
Power Distribution Box 
Description 
Relay 1 — Fog lamp interrupt 
Relay 2 — Interval wiper 
Relay 3 — Wiper HI/LO 
Relay 4 — Starter 
Relay 5 — Fog lamps 
1 50A** (4.6L), 
30A CB 
(3.8L) 
Electric cooling fan motor 
2 30A** Headlamps 
3 40A** Starter motor relay, Ignition 
switch 
4 40A** Ignition switch 
5 40A** Ignition switch 
6 40A** Instrument cluster, 
Powertrain Control Module 
(PCM) 
7 30A** Secondary air injection 
(3.8L only) 
8 50A** Anti-lock Brake Sytsem 
(ABS) module 
9 20A** Auxiliary power point 
10 30A** Parklamps 
11 30A** Rear window defrost control 
12 40A** Power windows, Power 
locks 
13 30A* MACH 1000 left amplifiers 
14 20A* Fuel pump 
15 30A* MACH 1000 right amplifiers 
16 20A* Horn 
17 20A* ABS 
18 30A* Power seats 
19 10A* Intercooler pump (Cobra 
only) 
20 20A* Alternator 
21 — Not used 
164
Fuse/Relay 
Location 
Roadside Emergencies 
Fuse Amp 
Rating 
Power Distribution Box 
Description 
22 — Not used 
23 — Not used 
24 20A* A/C pressure 
25 — Not used 
26 30A** PCM 
27 20A** Daytime Running Lamps 
(DRL) module, Foglamp 
relay 
28 25A CB Convertible top 
29 Diode Convertible top circuit 
breaker 
* Mini Fuses ** Maxi Fuses 
CHANGING THE TIRES 
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply the 
brake heavily. Instead, gradually decrease your 
speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly and slowly 
move to a safe place on the side of the road. 
The use of tire sealants is not recommended and 
may compromise the integrity of your tires. The use 
of tire sealants may also affect your tire pressure 
monitoring system (if equipped). 
Temporary spare tire information 
Your vehicle may have a temporary spare tire. The 
temporary spare tire for your vehicle is labeled as 
such. It is smaller than a regular tire and is designed 
for emergency use only. Replace this tire with a 
full-size tire as soon as possible. 
165
Roadside Emergencies 
If you use the temporary spare tire 
continuously or do not follow these 
precautions, the tire could fail, causing you to lose 
control of the vehicle, possibly injuring yourself or 
others. 
When driving with the temporary spare tire do not: 
² use more than one temporary spare tire at a time 
² exceed 80 km/h (50 mph) or drive further than 3 
200 km (2 000 miles) total under any 
circumstances 
² load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load 
rating listed on the tire pressure label on the 
inside of the glove compartment door 
² tow a trailer 
² use tire chains 
² drive through an automatic car wash, because of 
the vehicle’s reduced ground clearance 
² try to repair the temporary spare tire or remove it 
from its wheel 
² use the wheel for any other type of vehicle 
Use of a temporary spare tire at any one wheel 
location can lead to impairment of the following: 
² handling, stability and braking performance 
² comfort and noise 
² ground clearance and parking at curbs 
² Winter driving capability 
Tire change procedure 
To prevent the vehicle from moving when 
you change a tire, be sure the parking brake 
is set, then block (in both directions) the wheel 
that is diagonally opposite (other side and end of 
the vehicle) to the tire being changed. 
166
Roadside Emergencies 
If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or 
someone else could be seriously injured. 
1. Park on a level 
surface, activate hazard 
flashers and set 
parking brake. 
2. Place gearshift lever 
in P (Park) or R (manual transmission), turn engine 
OFF, and block the diagonally opposite wheel. 
3. Remove the spare 
tire, jack and lug 
wrench. 
4. Remove the center 
ornament (if equipped) 
from the wheel. Loosen 
each wheel lug nut 
one-half turn 
counterclockwise but 
do not remove them 
until the wheel is 
raised off the ground. 
167
Roadside Emergencies 
5. Put the jack in the 
jack notch next to the 
tire you are changing. 
Turn the jack handle 
clockwise until the 
wheel is completely off 
the ground. 
Never use the rear 
differential as a 
jacking point. 
To lessen the 
risk of personal 
injury, do not put any 
part of your body 
under the vehicle 
while changing a tire. 
Do not start the 
engine when your 
vehicle is on the jack. 
The jack is only 
meant for changing 
the tire. 
6. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench. 
7. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making 
sure the valve stem is facing outward. Reinstall lug 
nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub. Do not 
fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been 
lowered. 
If you are using the temporary tire, the lug nut 
washers will not appear to be flush with the rim. 
This is normal only when using the temporary spare 
tire. 
8. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle 
counterclockwise. 
168
Roadside Emergencies 
9. Remove the jack and 
1 
fully tighten the lug 
nuts in the order 
shown. 
3 4 
10. Put flat tire, wheel 
ornament (if 
5 2 
equipped), jack and lug 
wrench away. Make 
sure jack is fastened so it does not rattle when you 
drive. 
11. Unblock the wheels. 
Anti-theft lug nuts (if equipped) 
If your vehicle is equipped with this feature, one of 
the lug nuts on each wheel must be removed and 
replaced with a special key. The key and registration 
card are attached to the lug wrench and stored with 
the spare tire. If you lose the key, send the 
registration card to the manufacturer (not the 
dealer) to get a replacement key. If the lug 
wrench/lug nut key assembly is lost, see your 
nearest Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer who has 
access to the master set of keys. Do not use an 
impact wrench with the anti-theft key. 
To remove the 
anti-theft lug nut: 
1. Insert the key over 
the locking lug nut. 
Make sure you hold the key square to the lug nut. If 
you hold the key at an angle, you could damage the 
key and the lug nut. 
2. Place the lug nut wrench over the lug nut key and 
apply pressure on the key with the wrench. 
3. Turn the wrench in a counterclockwise direction 
to remove the lug nut. 
To install the anti-theft lug nut: 
1. Insert the key over the locking lug nut. 
2. Place the lug nut wrench over the lug nut key and 
apply pressure on the key with the wrench. 
169
Roadside Emergencies 
3. Install the lug nut by turning the wrench 
clockwise. 
JUMP STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 
The gases around the battery can explode if 
exposed to flames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. 
An explosion could result in injury or vehicle 
damage. 
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can 
burn skin, eyes and clothing, if contacted. 
Do not attempt to push-start your vehicle. 
Automatic transmissions do not have 
push-start capability; also, the catalytic 
converter may become damaged. 
Preparing your vehicle 
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is 
installed, the transmission must relearn its shift 
strategy. As a result, the transmission may have firm 
and/or soft shifts. This operation is considered 
normal and will not affect function or durability of 
the transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning 
process will fully update transmission operation. 
1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your 
vehicle. 
2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled 
vehicle as this could damage the vehicle’s electrical 
system. 
3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the 
disabled vehicle making sure the two vehicles do 
not touch. Set the parking brake on both vehicles 
and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other 
moving parts. 
4. Check all battery terminals and remove any 
excessive corrosion before you attach the battery 
cables. Ensure the vent caps are tight and level. 
5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect 
any electrical surges. Turn all other accessories off. 
170
Roadside Emergencies 
Connecting the jumper cables 
+ 
– 
+ 
– 
1. Connect the positive (+) booster cable to the 
positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery. 
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used 
to designate the assisting (boosting) battery. 
+ 
– 
+ 
– 
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to 
the positive (+) terminal of the assisting battery. 
+ 
– 
+ 
– 
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) 
terminal of the assisting battery. 
171
Roadside Emergencies 
+ 
– 
+ 
– 
4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) 
cable to an exposed metal part of the stalled 
vehicle’s engine, away from the battery and the 
carburetor/fuel injection system. Do not use fuel 
lines, engine rocker covers or the intake manifold as 
grounding points. 
Do not connect the end of the second cable 
to the negative (-) terminal of the battery to 
be jumped. A spark may cause an explosion of the 
gases that surround the battery. 
5. Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, 
belts, moving parts of both engines, or any fuel 
delivery system parts. 
Jump starting 
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run 
the engine at moderately increased speed. 
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle. 
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run 
both engines for an additional three minutes before 
disconnecting the jumper cables. 
172
Roadside Emergencies 
Removing the jumper cables 
+ 
– 
+ 
– 
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order 
that they were connected. 
1. Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal 
surface. 
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used 
to designate the assisting (boosting) battery. 
+ 
– 
+ 
– 
2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) 
connection of the booster vehicle’s battery. 
+ 
– 
+ 
– 
3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) 
terminal of the booster vehicle’s battery. 
173
Roadside Emergencies 
+ 
– 
+ 
– 
4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) 
terminal of the disabled vehicle’s battery. 
After the disabled vehicle has been started and the 
jumper cables removed, allow it to idle for several 
minutes so the engine computer can relearn its idle 
conditions. 
174
Roadside Emergencies 
WRECKER TOWING 
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a 
professional towing service or, if you are a member, 
your roadside assistance center. 
It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a 
wheel lift or flatbed equipment. Do not tow with a 
slingbelt. Ford Motor Company has not approved a 
slingbelt towing procedure. 
If your vehicle is to be towed from the rear using 
wheel lift equipment, the front wheels must be 
placed on a dolly to prevent damage to the front 
fascia (bumper). 
If the vehicle is towed by other means or 
incorrectly, vehicle damage may occur. 
Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for 
all authorized tow truck operators. Have your tow 
truck operator refer to this manual for proper 
hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle. 
175
Customer Assistance 
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED 
At home 
Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada have 
authorized dealerships to service your vehicle. It is 
preferred that you return to the authorized dealer 
where your vehicle was purchased when warranty 
repairs are needed. However, you may also take your 
vehicle to another Ford Motor Company or Ford of 
Canada dealership authorized for warranty repairs. 
Certain warranty repairs require special training 
though, so not all dealers are authorized to perform 
all warranty repairs. That means that depending on 
the warranty repair needed, the vehicle may need to 
be taken to another dealer. If a particular dealership 
cannot assist you, then contact the Customer 
Relationship Center. 
If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied 
with the service you are receiving, follow these 
steps: 
1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service 
Advisor at your selling/servicing dealership. 
2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, 
contact the Sales Manager or Service Manager at the 
dealership. 
3. If the inquiry or concern cannot be resolved at 
the dealership level, please contact the Ford 
Customer Relationship Center. 
Away from home 
If you own a Ford or Mercury vehicle and are away 
from home when your vehicle needs service, or if 
you need more help than the dealership could 
provide, after following the steps described above, 
contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center to 
find an authorized dealership to help you. 
176
Customer Assistance 
In the United States: 
Ford Motor Company 
Customer Relationship Center 
16800 Executive Plaza Drive 
P.O. Box 6248 
Dearborn, Michigan 48121 
1-800-392-3673 (FORD) 
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952) 
www.ford.com 
In Canada: 
Customer Relationship Centre 
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited 
P.O. Box 2000 
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4 
1-800-565-3673 (FORD) 
www.ford.ca 
If you own a Lincoln vehicle and are away from 
home when your vehicle needs service, or if you 
need more help than the dealership could provide, 
after following the steps described above, contact 
the Ford Customer Relationship Center to find an 
authorized dealership to help you. 
In the United States: 
Ford Motor Company 
Customer Relationship Center 
16800 Executive Plaza Drive 
P.O. Box 6248 
Dearborn, Michigan 48121 
1-800-521-4140 
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952) 
www.ford.com 
In Canada: 
Customer Relationship Centre 
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited 
P.O. Box 2000 
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4 
1-800-565-3673 (FORD) 
www.ford.ca 
177
Customer Assistance 
In order to help you service your Ford or Lincoln 
Mercury vehicle, please have the following 
information available when contacting a Customer 
Relationship Center: 
² Your telephone number (home and business) 
² The name of the dealer and the city where the 
dealership is located 
² The year and make of your vehicle 
² The date of vehicle purchase 
² The current odometer reading 
² The vehicle identification number (VIN) 
If you still have a complaint involving a warranty 
dispute, you may wish to contact the Dispute 
Settlement Board (U.S.). 
In some states (in the U.S.) you must directly notify 
Ford in writing before pursuing remedies under your 
state’s warranty laws. Ford is also allowed a final 
repair attempt in some states. 
In the United States, a warranty dispute must be 
submitted to the Dispute Settlement Board before 
taking action under the Magnuson-Moss Warranty 
Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before 
pursuing replacement or repurchase remedies 
provided by certain state laws. This dispute handling 
procedure is not required prior to enforcing state 
created rights or other rights which are independent 
of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or state 
replacement or repurchase laws. 
FORD EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN 
You can get more protection for your new car or 
light truck by purchasing Ford Extended Service 
Plan (Ford ESP) coverage. Ford ESP is an optional 
service contract which is backed by Ford Motor 
Company or Ford Motor Service Company (in the 
U.S.) and Ford of Canada (in Canada). It provides 
the following: 
² Benefits during the warranty period depending on 
the plan you purchase (such as: reimbursement 
for rentals; coverage for certain maintenance and 
wear items). 
178
Customer Assistance 
² Protection against covered repair costs after your 
Bumper-to-Bumper Warranty expires. 
You may purchase Ford ESP from any participating 
Ford and Lincoln Mercury and Ford of Canada 
dealer. There are several plans available in various 
time, distance and deductible combinations which 
can be tailored to fit your own driving needs. Ford 
ESP also offers reimbursement benefits for towing 
and rental coverage. 
When you buy Ford ESP, you receive Peace-of-Mind 
protection throughout the United States and Canada, 
provided by a network of more than 5,000 
participating Ford or Lincoln Mercury and Ford of 
Canada dealers. 
If you did not take advantage of the Ford Extended 
Service Plan at the time of purchasing your vehicle, 
you may still be eligible. Please contact your dealer 
for further information. Since this information is 
subject to change, please ask your dealer for 
complete details about Ford Extended Service Plan 
coverage options, or visit the Ford ESP website at 
www.ford-esp.com. 
THE DISPUTE SETTLEMENT BOARD 
(U.S. ONLY) 
The Dispute Settlement Board is: 
² an independent, third-party arbitration program 
for warranty disputes. 
² available free to owners and lessees of qualifying 
Ford Motor Company vehicles. 
The Dispute Settlement Board may not be available in 
all states. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to 
change eligibility limitations, modify procedures 
and/or to discontinue this service without notice and 
without incurring obligations per applicable state law. 
What kinds of cases does the Board review? 
Unresolved warranty repair concerns or vehicle 
performance concerns as on Ford and Lincoln 
Mercury cars and Ford and Lincoln Mercury light 
179
Customer Assistance 
trucks which are within the terms of any applicable 
written new vehicle warranty are eligible for review, 
except those involving: 
² a non-Ford product 
² a non-Ford dealership 
² sales disputes between customer and dealer 
except those associated with warranty repairs or 
concerns with the vehicle’s performance as 
designed 
² a request for reimbursement of consequential 
expenses unless a service or product concern is 
being reviewed 
² items not covered by the New Vehicle Limited 
Warranty (including maintenance and wear items) 
² alleged personal injury/property damage claims 
² cases currently in litigation 
² vehicles not used primarily for family, personal or 
household purposes (except in states where the 
Dispute Settlement Board is required to review 
commercial vehicles) 
² vehicles with non-U.S. warranties 
Concerns are ineligible for review if the New Vehicle 
Limited Warranty has expired at receipt of your 
application and, in certain states eligibility is 
dependent upon the customer’s possession of the 
vehicle. 
Eligibility may differ according to state law. For 
example, see the unique brochures for California, 
West Virginia, Georgia and Wisconsin 
purchasers/lessees. 
Board membership 
The Board consists of: 
² Three consumer representatives 
² A Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealership 
representative 
Consumer candidates for Board membership are 
recruited and trained by an independent consulting 
180
firm. The dealership Board member is chosen from 
Ford and Lincoln Mercury dealership management, 
recognized for their business leadership qualities. 
What the Board needs 
To have your case reviewed you must complete the 
application in the DSB brochure and mail it to the 
address provided on the application form. Some 
states will require you to use certified mail, with 
return receipt requested. 
Your application is reviewed and, if it is determined 
to be eligible, you will receive an acknowledgment 
indicating: 
² The file number assigned to your application. 
² The toll-free phone number of the DSB’s 
independent administrator. 
Your dealership and a Ford Motor Company 
representative will then be asked to submit 
statements. 
To properly review your case, the Board needs the 
following information: 
² Legible copies of all documents and maintenance 
or repair orders relevant to the case. 
² The year, make, model, and Vehicle Identification 
Number (VIN) listed on your vehicle ownership 
license. 
² The date of repair(s) and mileage at the time of 
occurrence(s). 
² The current mileage. 
² The name of the dealer(s) who sold or serviced 
the vehicle. 
² A brief description of your unresolved concern. 
² A brief summary of the action taken by the 
dealer(s) and Ford Motor Company. 
² The names (if known) of all the people you 
contacted at the dealership(s). 
² A description of the action you expect to resolve 
your concern. 
Customer Assistance 
181
Customer Assistance 
You will receive a letter of explanation if your 
application does not qualify for Board review. 
Oral presentations 
If you would like to make an oral presentation, 
indicate YES to question 6 on the application. While 
it is your right to make an oral presentation before 
the Board, this is not a requirement and the Board 
will decide the case whether or not an oral 
presentation is made. An oral presentation may be 
requested by the Board as well. 
Making a decision 
Board members review all available information 
related to each complaint, including oral 
presentations, and arrive at a fair and impartial 
decision. Board review may be terminated at any 
time by either party. 
Every effort is made to decide the case within 40 
days of the date that all requested information is 
received by the Board. Since the Board generally 
meets once a month, it may take longer for the 
Board to consider some cases. 
After a case is reviewed, the Board mails you a 
decision letter and a form on which to accept or 
reject the Board’s decision. The decisions of the 
Board are binding on Ford (and, in some cases, on 
the dealer) but not on consumers who are free to 
pursue other remedies available to them under state 
or federal law. 
To request a DSB Brochure/Application 
For a brochure/application, speak to your dealer or 
write/call to the Board at the following 
address/phone number: 
Dispute Settlement Board 
P.O. Box 5120 
Southfield, MI 48086–5120 
1–800–428–3718 
You may also contact the North American Customer 
Relationship Center at 1-800-392-3673 (Ford), TDD 
182
Customer Assistance 
for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952 or by 
writing to the Center at the following address: 
Ford Motor Company 
Customer Relationship Center 
16800 Executive Plaza Drive 
P.O. Box 6248 
Dearborn, Michigan 48121 
UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION 
PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY) 
In those cases where you continue to feel that the 
efforts by Ford and the dealer to resolve a 
factory-related vehicle service concern have been 
unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an 
impartial third party mediation/arbitration program 
administered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle 
Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). 
The CAMVAP program is a straight-forward and 
relatively speedy alternative to resolve a 
disagreement when all other efforts to produce a 
settlement have failed. This procedure is without 
cost to you and is designed to eliminate the need for 
lengthy and expensive legal proceedings. 
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party 
arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually convenient 
times and places in an informal environment. These 
impartial arbitrators review the positions of the 
parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, 
render awards to resolve disputes. CAMVAP 
decisions are fast, fair, and final; the arbitrator’s 
award is binding both to you and Ford of Canada. 
CAMVAP services are available in all territories and 
provinces. For more information, without charge or 
obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial 
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685. 
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND 
CANADA 
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, 
contact the appropriate foreign embassy or 
consulate. These officials can inform you of local 
vehicle registration regulations and where to find 
unleaded fuel. 
183
Customer Assistance 
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel 
with an anti-knock index lower than is 
recommended for your vehicle, contact a district or 
owner relations/customer relationship office. 
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without 
proper conversion may damage the effectiveness of 
your emission control system and may cause engine 
knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor 
Company/Ford of Canada is not responsible for any 
damage caused by use of improper fuel. 
In the United States, using leaded fuel may also 
result in difficulty importing your vehicle back into 
the U.S. 
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are 
traveling or living in Central or South America, the 
Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the nearest 
Ford dealership. If the dealership cannot help you, 
write or call: 
FORD MOTOR COMPANY 
WORLDWIDE DIRECT MARKET OPERATIONS 
1555 Fairlane Drive 
Fairlane Business Park #3 
Allen Park, Michigan 48101 
U.S.A. 
Telephone: (313) 594-4857 
FAX: (313) 390-0804 
If you are in another foreign country, contact the 
nearest Ford dealership. If the dealership employees 
cannot help you, they can direct you to the nearest 
Ford affiliate office. 
If you buy your vehicle in North America and then 
relocate outside of the U.S. or Canada, register your 
vehicle identification number (VIN) and new address 
with Ford Motor Company Worldwide Direct Market 
Operations. 
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S 
LITERATURE 
To order the publications in this portfolio, contact 
Helm, Incorporated at: 
184
Customer Assistance 
HELM, INCORPORATED 
P.O. Box 07150 
Detroit, Michigan 48207 
Or call: 
For a free publication catalog, order toll free: 
1-800-782-4356 
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST 
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their 
website: www.helminc.com. 
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit 
card, check or money order.) 
Obtaining a French owner’s guide 
French Owner’s Guides can be obtained from your 
dealer or by writing to Ford Motor Company of 
Canada, Limited, Service Publications, P.O. Box 
1580, Station B, Mississauga, Ontario L4Y 4G3. 
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY) 
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, 
if a manufacturer or its representative is unable to 
repair a motor vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s 
applicable express warranty after a reasonable 
number of attempts, the manufacturer shall be 
required to either replace the vehicle with one 
substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and 
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the 
actual price paid or payable by the consumer (less a 
reasonable allowance for consumer use). The 
consumer has the right to choose whether to receive 
a refund or replacement vehicle. 
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes 
that the manufacturer has had a reasonable number 
of attempts to conform the vehicle to its applicable 
express warranties if, within the first 18 months of 
ownership of a new vehicle or the first 29,000 km 
(18,000 miles), whichever occurs first: 
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the 
same nonconformity likely to cause death or serious 
bodily injury OR 
185
Customer Assistance 
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the 
same nonconformity (a defect or condition that 
substantially impairs the use, value or safety of the 
vehicle) OR 
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of 
nonconformities for a total of more than 30 calendar 
days (not necessarily all at one time) 
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also 
notify the manufacturer of the need for the repair of 
the nonconformity at the following address: 
Ford Motor Company 
16800 Executive Plaza Drive 
Mail Drop 3NE-B 
Dearborn, MI 48126 
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY) 
If you believe that your 
vehicle has a defect 
which could cause a 
crash or could cause injury or death, you should 
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic 
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to 
notifying Ford Motor Company. 
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open 
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect 
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall 
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot 
become involved in individual problems between 
you, your dealer, or Ford Motor Company. 
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto 
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1–800–424–9393 (or 
366–0123 in the Washington D.C. area) or write to: 
NHTSA 
U.S. Department of Transportation 
Washington, D.C. 20590 
You can also obtain other information about motor 
vehicle safety from the Hotline. 
186
Cleaning 
WASHING THE EXTERIOR 
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm 
water and a neutral Ph shampoo, such as Detail 
Wash (ZC-3–A), which is available from your dealer. 
² Never use strong household detergents or soap, 
such as dish washing or laundry liquid. These 
products can discolor and spot painted surfaces. 
² Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or 
during exposure to strong, direct sunlight. 
² Always use a clean sponge or carwash mitt with 
plenty of water for best results. 
² Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth 
towel in order to eliminate water spotting. 
² It is especially important to wash the vehicle 
regularly during the winter months, as dirt and 
road salt are difficult to remove and cause 
damage to the vehicle. 
² Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel 
fuel, bird droppings and insect deposits because 
they can cause damage to the vehicle’s paintwork 
and trim over time. 
² Remove any exterior accessories, such as 
antennas, before entering a car wash. 
² Suntan lotions and insect repellents can 
damage any painted surface; if these 
substances come in contact with your 
vehicle, wash off as soon as possible. 
WAXING 
Applying a polymer paint sealant to your vehicle 
every six months will assist in reducing minor 
scratches and paint damage. 
² Wash the vehicle first. 
² Do not use waxes that contain abrasives. 
² Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with 
any non-body (low-gloss black) colored trim, such 
as grained door handles, roof racks, bumpers, side 
moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl 
area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the 
parts over time. 
187
Cleaning 
PAINT CHIPS 
Your dealer has touch-up paint and sprays to match 
your vehicle’s color. Take your color code (printed 
on a sticker in the driver’s door jam) to your dealer 
to ensure you get the correct color. 
² Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, 
insect deposits, tar spots, road salt and industrial 
fallout before repairing paint chips. 
² Always read the instructions before using the 
products. 
ALUMINUM WHEELS AND COVERS 
Aluminum wheel rims or covers are coated with a 
clearcoat paint finish. In order to maintain their 
shine: 
² Clean with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner 
(ZC-37–A), which is available from your dealer. 
² Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm 
wheel rims or covers. 
² Some automatic car washes may cause damage to 
the finish on your wheel rims or covers. 
Chemical-strength cleaners, or cleaning chemicals, 
in combination with brush agitation to remove 
brake dust and dirt, could wear away the 
clearcoat finish over time. 
² Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high 
caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel wool, fuels or 
strong household detergent. 
² To remove tar and grease, use Ford Extra 
Strength Tar and Road Oil Removal 
(B7A-19520–AA), available from your dealer. 
ENGINE 
Engines are more efficient when they are clean 
because grease and dirt buildup keep the engine 
warmer than normal. When washing: 
² Take care when using a power washer to clean 
the engine. The high-pressure fluid could 
penetrate the sealed parts and cause damage. 
188
Cleaning 
² Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to 
avoid cracking the engine block or other engine 
components. 
² Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser 
(ZC-20) on all parts that require cleaning and 
pressure rinse clean. 
² Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water 
damage when cleaning the engine. 
² 3.8L OHV V6 engine 
² 4.6L SOHC V8 engine 
² Never wash or rinse the engine while it is 
running; water in the running engine may cause 
internal damage. 
189
Cleaning 
PLASTIC (NON-PAINTED) EXTERIOR PARTS 
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. 
These products are available from your dealer. 
² For routine cleaning, use Detail Wash (ZC-3–A). 
² If tar or grease spots are present, use Ford Extra 
Strength Tar and Road Oil Removal 
(B7A-19520–AA). 
WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES 
The windshield, rear window and wiper blades 
should be cleaned regularly. If the wiper does not 
wipe properly, substances on the windshield, rear 
window or the wiper blades may be the cause. These 
may include hot wax treatments used by commercial 
car washes, tree sap, or other organic contamination. 
To clean these items, please follow these tips: 
² The windshield or rear window may be cleaned 
with a non-abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft 
Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (ZC-23), available 
from your dealer. 
² Do not use abrasives, as they may cause 
scratches. 
² Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to 
clean any parts. 
² Wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl 
(rubbing) alcohol or windshield washer solution. 
Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear 
worn or do not function properly. 
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CLUSTER LENS 
Clean the instrument panel with a damp cloth, then 
dry with a dry cloth. 
² Avoid cleaners or polish that increase the gloss of 
the upper portion of the instrument panel. The 
dull finish in this area helps protect the driver 
from undesirable windshield reflection. 
190
Cleaning 
Do not use chemical solvents or strong 
detergents when cleaning the steering wheel 
or instrument panel to avoid contamination of the 
air bag system. 
² Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if 
you have been in contact with certain products 
such as insect repellent and suntan lotion in order 
to avoid possible damage to the painted surfaces. 
INTERIOR 
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts and seats 
equipped with side air bags: 
² Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum 
cleaner. 
² Remove light stains and soil with Ford Extra 
Strength Upholstery Cleaner (E8AZ-19523–AA). 
² If grease or tar is present on the material, 
spot-clean the area first with Motorcraft Spot and 
Stain Remover (ZC-14). 
² Never saturate the seat covers with cleaning 
solution. 
² Do not use household cleaning products or glass 
cleaners, which can stain and discolor the fabric 
and affect the flame retardant abilities of the seat 
materials. 
Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye 
on the vehicle’s safety belts, as these actions 
may weaken the belt webbing. 
Do not use chemical solvents or strong 
detergents when cleaning the seat where the 
side air bag is mounted. Such products may 
contaminate the side air bag system and affect 
performance of the side air bag in a collision. The 
air bag may not function correctly and not provide 
any injury reduction benefits. 
191
Cleaning 
LEATHER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED) 
Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective 
coating over the leather. 
² To clean, use a soft cloth with Motorcraft Deluxe 
Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-11–A). Dry the 
area with a soft cloth. 
² To help maintain its resiliency and color, use the 
Motorcraft Deluxe Leather Care Kit (ZC-11–D), 
available from your authorized dealer. 
² Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol 
solutions, solvents or cleaners intended for 
rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based 
leather conditioners. These products may cause 
premature wearing of the clear, protective 
coating. 
CONVERTIBLE TOP AND PADDED MOLDING 
Wash with Motorcraft Triple Clean (ZC-13), which is 
available from your dealer. 
² Do not use stiff bristle brushes or abrasive 
materials or cleaners. 
² Hot waxes applied by commercial car washes can 
affect the cleanability of vinyl material. 
² Using high water pressure or wand-type car 
washes against the convertible top and windows 
may cause water leaks and possible seal damage. 
UNDERBODY 
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle 
frequently. Keep body and door drain holes free 
from packed dirt. 
FORD, LINCOLN AND MERCURY CAR CARE 
PRODUCTS 
Your Ford, Lincoln or Mercury dealer has many 
quality products available to clean your vehicle and 
protect its finishes. These quality products have 
been specifically engineered to fulfill your 
automotive needs; they are custom designed to 
192
Cleaning 
complement the style and appearance of your 
vehicle. Each product is made from high quality 
materials that meet or exceed rigid specifications. 
For best results, use the following products or 
products of equivalent quality: 
Motorcraft Custom Clearcoat Polish (ZC–8–A) 
Ford Custom Vinyl Protectant* (not available in 
Canada) (F2AZ—19530–A) 
Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-93) 
Motorcraft Vinyl Conditioner (Canada only) 
(CXC-94) 
Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (not 
available in Canada) (ZC-11–A) 
Ford Extra Strength Tar and Road Oil Remover* 
(not available in Canada) (B7A-19520–AA) 
Ford Extra Strength Upholstery Cleaner (not 
available in Canada) (E8AZ-19523–AA) 
Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15) 
Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37–A) 
Motorcraft Dash and Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-38–A) 
Motorcraft Car Care Kit (ZC-26) 
Ford Premium Car Wash Concentrate 
(F2SZ-19523–WC) 
Motorcraft Carlite Glass Cleaner (Canada only) 
(CXC-100) 
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14) 
Motorcraft Tire Detailer (ZC-28) 
Motorcraft Triple Clean (ZC-13) 
Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (not 
available in Canada) (ZC-23) 
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20) 
* May be sold with the Motorcraft name 
193
Maintenance and Specifications 
SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS 
To help you service your vehicle: 
² We highlight do-it-yourself items in the engine 
compartment for easy location. 
² We provide a scheduled maintenance guide which 
makes tracking routine service easy. 
If your vehicle requires professional service, your 
dealership can provide the necessary parts and 
service. Check your Warranty Guide/Owner 
Information Guide to find out which parts and 
services are covered. 
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and 
service parts conforming to specifications. Motorcraft 
parts are designed and built to provide the best 
performance in your vehicle. 
PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR 
VEHICLE 
Be especially careful when inspecting or servicing 
your vehicle. 
² Do not work on a hot engine. 
² When the engine is running, keep loose clothing, 
jewelry or long hair away from moving parts. 
² Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running 
in an enclosed space, unless you are sure you 
have enough ventilation. 
² Keep all lit cigarettes, open flames and other lit 
material away from the battery and all fuel related 
parts. 
If you disconnect the battery, the engine must 
“relearn” its idle conditions before your vehicle will 
drive properly, as explained in the Battery section in 
this chapter. 
Working with the engine off 
² Automatic transmission: 
1. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is 
securely latched in P (Park). 
194
Maintenance and Specifications 
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key. 
3. Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from 
moving unexpectedly. 
² Manual transmission: 
1. Set the parking brake. 
2. Depress the clutch and place the gearshift in 1 
(First). 
3. Turn off the engine and remove the key. 
4. Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from 
moving unexpectedly. 
Working with the engine on 
² Automatic transmission: 
1. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is 
securely latched in P (Park). 
2. Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from 
moving unexpectedly. 
Note: Do not start your engine with the air cleaner 
removed and do not remove it while the engine is 
running. 
² Manual transmission: 
1. Set the parking brake, depress the clutch and 
place the gearshift in neutral. 
2. Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from 
moving unexpectedly. 
Note: Do not start your engine with the air cleaner 
removed and do not remove it while the engine is 
running. 
The cooling fan is automatic and may come 
on at any time. Always disconnect the 
negative terminal of the battery before working 
near the fan. 
195
Maintenance and Specifications 
OPENING THE HOOD 
1. Inside the vehicle, 
pull the hood release 
handle located under 
the bottom left corner 
of the instrument 
panel. 
HOOD 
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and release the 
auxiliary latch that is located under the front center 
of the hood. 
3. Lift the hood and secure it with the prop rod. 
196
Maintenance and Specifications 
IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE 
COMPARTMENT 
3.8L OHV V6 engine 
1 
1. Engine oil filler cap 
2. Engine oil dipstick 
3. Brake fluid reservoir 
4. Power distribution box 
5. Windshield washer fluid reservoir 
6. Battery 
7. Power steering fluid reservoir 
8. Engine coolant reservoir 
9. Air filter assembly 
10. Automatic transmission fluid dipstick 
(if equipped) 
6 
10 2 3 
4 
5 
9 8 7 
197
Maintenance and Specifications 
4.6L SOHC V8 engine 
1. Engine oil dipstick 
2. Brake fluid reservoir 
3. Power distribution box 
4. Windshield washer fluid reservoir 
5. Battery 
6. Engine coolant reservoir 
7. Power steering fluid reservoir 
8. Engine oil filler cap 
9. Air filter assembly 
10. Automatic transmission fluid dipstick 
(if equipped) 
198
Maintenance and Specifications 
WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID 
Check the washer fluid 
whenever you stop for 
fuel. The reservoir is 
highlighted with a 
symbol. 
Add fluid to fill the 
reservoir if the level is 
low. In very cold 
weather, do not fill the 
reservoir completely. 
Only use a washer fluid that meets Ford 
specification ESR-M17P5–A . Refer to Lubricant 
specifications in this chapter. 
State or local regulations on volatile organic 
compounds may restrict the use of methanol, a 
common windshield washer antifreeze additive. 
Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze 
agents should be used only if they provide cold 
weather protection without damaging the vehicle’s 
paint finish, wiper blades or washer system. 
Note: Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant 
reservoir. Washer fluid placed in the cooling system 
may harm engine and cooling system components. 
ENGINE OIL 
Checking the engine oil 
Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the 
appropriate intervals for checking the engine oil. 
1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground. 
2. Turn the engine off and wait 5 to 10 minutes for 
the oil to drain into the oil pan. 
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is 
securely latched in P (Park) (automatic 
transmissions) or 1 (First) (manual transmissions). 
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat. 
199
Maintenance and Specifications 
5. Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level 
indicator (dipstick). 
² 3.8L V6 engine 
² 4.6L SOHC V8 
engine 
6. Wipe the indicator clean. Insert the indicator fully, 
then remove it again. 
² If the oil level is between the MIN—MAX 
marks, the oil level is acceptable. DO NOT ADD 
OIL. 
² If the oil level is below the MIN mark, add enough 
oil to raise the level within the MIN—MAX range. 
² 3.8L V6 engine 
MIN MAX 
MIN MAX 
200
Maintenance and Specifications 
² 4.6L SOHC V8 engine 
² Oil levels above the MAX mark may cause engine 
damage. Some oil must be removed from the 
engine by a service technician. 
7. Put the indicator back in and ensure it is fully 
seated. 
Adding engine oil 
1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to 
Checking the engine oil in this chapter. 
2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal 
range, add only certified engine oil of the 
recommended viscosity. Remove the engine oil filler 
cap and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the 
opening. 
3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil 
level is not above the MAX mark on the engine oil 
level indicator (dipstick). 
4. Install the indicator and ensure it is fully seated. 
5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the 
filler cap clockwise 1/4 of a turn until three clicks 
are heard or until the cap is fully seated. 
To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the 
vehicle with the engine oil level indicator 
and/or the engine oil filler cap removed. 
201
Maintenance and Specifications 
Engine oil and filter recommendations 
Look for this 
certification trademark. 
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended. 
Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the 
American Petroleum Institute (API). Use Motorcraft 
or an equivalent oil meeting Ford specification 
WSS-M2C153–H. SAE 5W-20 oil provides 
optimum fuel economy and durability 
performance meeting all requirements for your 
vehicle’s engine. 
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, oil 
treatments or engine treatments. They are 
unnecessary and could, under certain conditions, 
lead to engine damage which is not covered by your 
warranty. 
Change your engine oil and filter according to the 
appropriate schedule listed in the scheduled 
maintenance guide. 
Ford production and aftermarket (Motorcraft) oil 
filters are designed for added engine protection and 
long life. If a replacement oil filter is used that does 
not meet Ford material and design specifications, 
start-up engine noises or knock may be experienced. 
It is recommended you use the appropriate 
Motorcraft oil filter (or another brand meeting Ford 
specifications) for your engine application. 
202
Maintenance and Specifications 
BATTERY 
Your vehicle is 
equipped with a 
Motorcraft 
maintenance-free 
battery which normally 
does not require 
additional water during 
its life of service. 
However, for severe usage or in high temperature 
climates, check the battery electrolyte level. Refer to 
the scheduled maintenance guide for the service 
interval schedules. 
Keep the electrolyte level in each cell up to the 
“level indicator”. Do not overfill the battery 
cells. 
If the electrolyte level in the battery is low, you can 
add plain tap water to the battery, as long as you do 
not use hard water (water with a high mineral or 
alkali content). If possible, however, try to only fill 
the battery cells with distilled water. If the battery 
needs water often, have the charging system 
checked. 
If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it 
is reinstalled after the battery has been 
cleaned or replaced. 
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of 
the battery clean and dry. Also, make certain the 
battery cables are always tightly fastened to the 
battery terminals. 
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, 
remove the cables from the terminals and clean with 
a wire brush. You can neutralize the acid with a 
solution of baking soda and water. 
203
Maintenance and Specifications 
Batteries normally produce explosive gases 
which can cause personal injury. Therefore, 
do not allow flames, sparks or lighted substances 
to come near the battery. When working near the 
battery, always shield your face and protect your 
eyes. Always provide proper ventilation. 
When lifting a plastic-cased battery, 
excessive pressure on the end walls could 
cause acid to flow through the vent caps, resulting 
in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or 
battery. Lift the battery with a battery carrier or 
with your hands on opposite corners. 
Keep batteries out of reach of children. 
Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact 
with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes when 
working near the battery to protect against 
possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid 
contact with skin or eyes, flush immediately with 
water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get 
prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call 
a physician immediately. 
Battery posts, terminals and related 
accessories contain lead and lead 
compounds. Wash hands after handling. 
Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically 
controlled by a computer, some control conditions 
are maintained by power from the battery. When the 
battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, 
the engine must relearn its idle and fuel trim 
strategy for optimum driveability and performance. 
To begin this process: 
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the 
parking brake. 
2. Put the gearshift in P (Park) (automatic 
transmission) or the neutral position (manual 
transmission), turn off all accessories and start the 
engine. 
204
Maintenance and Specifications 
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating 
temperature. 
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute. 
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for 
at least one minute. 
6. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning 
process. 
² The vehicle may need to be driven 16 km (10 
miles) or more to relearn the idle and fuel trim 
strategy. 
² If you do not allow the engine to relearn its 
idle trim, the idle quality of your vehicle may 
be adversely affected until the idle trim is 
eventually relearned. 
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery 
installed, the transmission must relearn its adaptive 
strategy. As a result of this, the transmission may 
shift firmly. This operation is considered normal and 
will not affect function or durability of the 
transmission. Over time the adaptive learning 
process will fully update transmission operation to 
its optimum shift feel. 
If the battery has been disconnected or a new 
battery has been installed, the clock and the preset 
radio stations must be reset once the battery is 
reconnected. 
² Always dispose of 
LEAD 
RETURN 
automotive batteries 
in a responsible 
manner. Follow your 
local authorized 
standards for 
disposal. Call your 
local authorized 
RECYCLE 
recycling center to find out more about recycling 
automotive batteries. 
205
Maintenance and Specifications 
ENGINE COOLANT 
Checking engine coolant 
The concentration and level of engine coolant should 
be checked at the mileage intervals in the scheduled 
maintenance guide. The coolant concentration 
should be maintained at 50/50 coolant and water, 
which equates to a freeze point of -36° C (-34° F). 
Coolant concentration testing is possible with a 
hydrometer or antifreeze tester (such as the 
Rotunda Battery and Antifreeze Tester, 014–R1060). 
The level of coolant should be maintained at the 
“cold full” of “cold fill range” level in the coolant 
reservoir. If the level falls below, add coolant per the 
instructions in the Adding Engine Coolant section. 
Your vehicle was factory-filled with a 50/50 engine 
coolant and water concentration. If the 
concentration of coolant falls below 40% or above 
60%, the engine parts could become damaged or not 
work properly. A 50–50 mixture of coolant and 
water provides the following: 
² freeze protection down to -36° C (-34° F) 
² boiling protection up to 129° C (265° F) 
² protection against rust and other forms of 
corrosion 
² enables calibrated gages to function properly 
² 3.8L OHV V6 engine 
206
Maintenance and Specifications 
² 4.6L SOHC V8 
engine 
When the engine is cold, check the level of the 
engine coolant in the reservoir. 
² The engine coolant should be at the “cold fill 
level” as listed on the engine coolant reservoir. 
² Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for 
service interval schedules. 
² Be sure to read and understand Precautions 
when servicing your vehicle in this chapter. 
If the engine coolant has not been checked at the 
recommended interval, the engine coolant reservoir 
may become low or empty. If the reservoir is low or 
empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to 
Adding engine coolant in this chapter. 
Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do 
not use engine coolant, antifreeze or windshield 
washer fluid outside of its specified function and 
vehicle location. 
Adding engine coolant 
When adding coolant, make sure it is a 50/50 
mixture of engine coolant and distilled water. Add 
the mixture to the coolant reservoir, when the 
engine is cool, until the appropriate fill level is 
obtained. 
Do not add engine coolant when the engine 
is hot. Steam and scalding liquids released 
from a hot cooling system can burn you badly. 
Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot 
engine parts. 
207
Maintenance and Specifications 
Do not put engine coolant in the windshield 
washer fluid container. If sprayed on the 
windshield, engine coolant could make it difficult 
to see through the windshield. 
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with 
either green-colored Motorcraft Premium Engine 
Coolant meeting Ford specification ESE-M97B44–A 
or yellow-colored Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine 
Coolant meeting Ford Specification 
WSS-M97B51–A1. To determine your vehicle’s 
coolant type (color), check your coolant reservoir. 
² Add Motorcraft Premium Engine Coolant 
(green-colored), VC-4–A (U.S.) or CXC-10 
(Canada) or Motorcraft Premium Gold 
Engine Coolant (yellow-colored), VC-7–A 
(VC-7–B in Oregon), depending on the type 
of coolant originally equipped in your 
vehicle. If you are unsure which type of coolant 
your vehicle requires, check your coolant 
reservoir or contact your local dealer. 
Note: Use of Motorcraft Cooling System Stop Leak 
Pellets, VC-6, darkens the color of Motorcraft 
Premium Gold Engine Coolant from yellow to golden 
tan. 
² Do not add/mix an orange-colored, extended 
life coolant such as Motorcraft Speciality 
Orange Engine Coolant, VC-2 (US) or 
CXC-209 (Canada), meeting Ford 
specification WSS-M97B44–D with the 
factory-filled coolant. Mixing Motorcraft 
Speciality Orange Engine Coolant or any 
orange-colored extended life product with your 
factory filled coolant can result in degraded 
corrosion protection. 
² A large amount of water without engine coolant 
may be added, in case of emergency, to reach a 
vehicle service location. In this instance, the 
cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 
50/50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled 
208
Maintenance and Specifications 
water as soon as possible. Water alone (without 
engine coolant) can cause engine damage from 
corrosion, overheating or freezing. 
² Do not use alcohol, methanol or brine or any 
engine coolants mixed with alcohol or 
methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol and 
other liquids can cause engine damage from 
overheating or freezing. 
² Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to 
the coolant. These can be harmful and 
compromise the corrosion protection of the 
engine coolant. 
² Do not mix with recycled coolant unless from 
a Ford-approved recycling process (see Use of 
Recycled Engine Coolant section). 
To reduce the risk of personal injury, make 
sure the engine is cool before unscrewing 
the coolant pressure relief cap. The cooling system 
is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come 
out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly. 
If you must remove the pressure relief cap or 
radiator cap (depending upon engine application), 
follow these steps to avoid personal injury: 
1. Before you remove the cap, turn the engine off 
and let it cool. 
2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth 
around the cap. Slowly turn cap counterclockwise 
until pressure begins to release. 
3. Step back while the pressure releases. 
4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been 
released, use the cloth to turn it counterclockwise 
and remove the cap. 
Engine coolant refill procedure-3.8L V6 engine 
Note: Use the following procedure when refilling the 
cooling system of a vehicle equipped with a 3.8L V6 
engine. Failure to follow this warning may result in 
damage to the engine and engine cooling system. 
209
Maintenance and Specifications 
The following procedure should be used when 
refilling the cooling system of a 3.8L V6 engine after 
it has been drained or become extremely low. 
1. Remove the cap 
2 
from the engine 
coolant reservoir. 
1 3 
2. Open the cooling 
system vent plug. 
3. Remove the radiator 
cap as previously 
outlined. 
4. Add a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant and 
distilled water to the radiator until full. 
5. Add a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant and 
distilled water to the engine coolant reservoir until 
the coolant level is at the “cold fill level” as listed on 
the reservoir. 
6. Close the cooling system vent plug. 
7. Reinstall the engine coolant reservoir cap. 
8. Reinstall the radiator cap. 
9. Start and idle the engine until the upper radiator 
hose is warm (this indicates the thermostat is open 
and coolant is flowing through the entire system). 
10. Immediately shut the engine off. 
11. Wrap a thick cloth around the radiator cap and 
cautiously remove the radiator cap. 
12. Add a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant and 
distilled water to the radiator until full. 
13. Reinstall the radiator cap. 
14. Check the coolant level in the reservoir before 
you drive your vehicle the next few times (with the 
engine cool). 
15. If necessary, add a 50/50 mixture of engine 
coolant and distilled water to the engine coolant 
reservoir until the coolant level is at the “cold fill 
level” as listed on the reservoir. 
If you are unsure of how to operate the cooling 
system vent plug when adding engine coolant to the 
3.8L V6 engine, contact your dealer. 
210
Maintenance and Specifications 
Engine coolant refill procedure-4.6L V8 engine 
The following procedure should be used when 
refilling the cooling system of a 4.6L V8 engine after 
it has been drained or become extremely low. 
1. Remove the pressure relief cap from the engine 
coolant reservoir as previously outlined. 
2. Slowly add a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant 
and distilled water to the engine coolant reservoir 
until the coolant level is at the “cold fill level” as 
listed on the reservoir. 
3. Reinstall the pressure relief cap. 
4. Start and idle the engine until the upper radiator 
hose is warm (this indicates the thermostat is open 
and coolant is flowing through the entire system). 
5. Shut the engine off and let it cool. 
6. Remove the pressure relief cap from the engine 
coolant reservoir as previously outlined. 
7. Add a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant and 
distilled water to the engine coolant reservoir until 
the coolant level is at the “cold fill level” as listed on 
the reservoir. 
8. Reinstall the pressure relief cap. 
9. Check the coolant level in the reservoir before 
you drive your vehicle the next few times (with the 
engine cool). 
10. If necessary, add a 50/50 mixture of engine 
coolant and distilled water to the engine coolant 
reservoir until the coolant level is at the “cold fill 
level” as listed on the reservoir. 
After any coolant has been added, check the coolant 
concentration see Checking Engine Coolant section). 
If the concentration is not 50/50 (protection to –34° 
F/–36° C), drain some coolant and adjust the 
concentration. It may take several drains and 
additions to obtain a 50/50 coolant concentration. 
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level 
in the coolant reservoir should be checked the next 
few times you drive the vehicle. If necessary, add 
211
Maintenance and Specifications 
enough 50/50 concentration of engine coolant and 
distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper 
level. 
If you have to add more than 1.0 liter (1.0 quart) of 
engine coolant per month, have your dealer check 
the engine cooling system. Your cooling system may 
have a leak. Operating an engine with a low level of 
coolant can result in engine overheating and possible 
engine damage. 
Recycled engine coolant 
Ford Motor Company recommends the use of a 
recycled engine coolant produced by Ford-approved 
processes in vehicles originally equipped with 
Motorcraft Premium Engine Coolant (green-colored). 
However, not all coolant recycling processes produce 
coolant that meets Ford specification 
ESE-M97B44–A. Use of such coolant may harm the 
engine and cooling system components. 
Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use 
of recycled engine coolant in vehicles originally 
equipped with Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine 
Coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is 
not yet available. 
Used engine coolant should be disposed of in 
an appropriate manner. Follow your community’s 
regulations and standards for recycling and disposing 
of automotive fluids. 
Coolant refill capacity 
To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling 
system can hold, refer to Refill capacities in this 
chapter. 
Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in 
Adding engine coolant in this chapter. 
Severe climates 
If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than 
–36° C [–34° F]): 
² It may be necessary to increase the coolant 
concentration above 50%. 
212
Maintenance and Specifications 
² NEVER increase the coolant concentration 
above 60%. 
² Increased engine coolant concentrations 
above 60% will decrease the overheat 
protection characteristics of the engine 
coolant and may cause engine damage. 
² Refer to the chart on the coolant container 
to ensure the coolant concentration in your 
vehicle will provide adequate freeze 
protection at the temperatures in which you 
drive in the winter months. 
If you drive in extremely hot climates: 
² It is still necessary to maintain the coolant 
concentration above 40%. 
² NEVER decrease the coolant concentration 
below 40%. 
² Decreased engine coolant concentrations 
below 40% will decrease the corrosion 
protection characteristics of the engine 
coolant and may cause engine damage. 
² Decreased engine coolant concentrations 
below 40% will decrease the freeze 
protection characteristics of the engine 
coolant and may cause engine damage. 
² Refer to the chart on the coolant container 
to ensure the coolant concentration in your 
vehicle will provide adequate protection at 
the temperatures in which you drive. 
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates 
should use a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant and 
distilled water for optimum cooling system and 
engine protection. 
213
Maintenance and Specifications 
WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT 
AUTOMOTIVE FUELS 
Important safety precautions 
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in 
an overfilled tank may cause leakage and 
lead to fuel spray and fire. 
The fuel system may be under pressure. If 
the fuel filler cap is venting vapor or if you 
hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops before 
completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, 
fuel may spray out and injure you or others. 
If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, 
excessive pressure or vacuum in the fuel 
tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel 
cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in 
possible personal injury. 
Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or 
death if misused or mishandled. 
Gasoline may contain benzene, which is a 
cancer-causing agent. 
Observe the following guidelines when handling 
automotive fuel: 
² Extinguish all 
smoking materials 
and any open flames 
before fueling your 
vehicle. 
² Always turn off the vehicle before fueling. 
² Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if 
swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic 
and if swallowed can cause death or permanent 
214
Maintenance and Specifications 
injury. If fuel is swallowed, call a physician 
immediately, even if no symptoms are immediately 
apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be 
visible for hours. 
² Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel 
vapor of any kind can lead to eye and respiratory 
tract irritation. In severe cases, excessive or 
prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause 
serious illness and permanent injury. 
² Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is 
splashed in the eyes, remove contact lenses (if 
worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and seek 
medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical 
attention could lead to permanent injury. 
² Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the 
skin. If fuel is splashed on the skin and/or 
clothing, promptly remove contaminated clothing 
and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. 
Repeated or prolonged skin contact with fuel 
liquid or vapor causes skin irritation. 
² Be particularly careful if you are taking 
“Antabuse” or other forms of disulfiram for the 
treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline 
vapors, or skin contact could cause an adverse 
reaction. In sensitive individuals, serious personal 
injury or sickness may result. If fuel is splashed 
on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with 
soap and water. Consult a physician immediately 
if you experience an adverse reaction. 
When refueling always shut the engine off 
and never allow sparks or open flames near 
the filler neck. Never smoke while refueling. Fuel 
vapor is extremely hazardous under certain 
conditions. Care should be taken to avoid inhaling 
excess fumes. 
The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle 
can produce static electricity, which can 
cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an ungrounded 
fuel container. 
215
Maintenance and Specifications 
Use the following guidelines to avoid static build-up 
when filling an ungrounded fuel container: 
² Place approved fuel container on the ground. 
² DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the 
vehicle (including the cargo area). 
² Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the 
fuel container while filling. 
² DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel 
pump handle in the fill position. 
Fuel Filler Cap 
Your fuel tank filler cap has an indexed design with 
a 1/8 turn on/off feature. 
When fueling your vehicle: 
1. Turn the engine off. 
2. Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise 1/8 
of a turn until it stops. 
3. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe. 
4. To install the cap, align the tabs on the cap with 
the notches on the filler pipe. 
5. Turn the filler cap clockwise 1/8 of a turn until it 
stops. 
“Check Fuel Cap” illuminates when the ignition is 
turned to the ON position to ensure your bulb is 
working. When this light turns on, check the fuel 
filler cap. Continuing to operate the vehicle with the 
Check Fuel Cap light on, can activate the Service 
Engine Soon warning. When the fuel filler cap is 
properly re-installed, the light(s) will turn off after a 
period of normal driving. It may take a long 
period of time for the system to detect an 
improperly installed fuel filler cap. 
If you must replace the fuel filler cap, replace 
it with a fuel filler cap that is designed for 
your vehicle. The customer warranty may be 
void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel 
system if the correct genuine Ford or 
Motorcraft fuel filler cap is not used. 
216
Maintenance and Specifications 
The fuel system may be under pressure. If 
the fuel filler cap is venting vapor or if you 
hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops before 
completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, 
fuel may spray out and injure you or others. 
If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, 
excessive pressure or vacuum in the fuel 
tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel 
cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in 
possible personal injury. 
Choosing the right fuel 
Use only UNLEADED FUEL. The use of leaded fuel 
is prohibited by law and could damage your vehicle. 
Do not use fuel containing methanol. It can damage 
critical fuel system components. 
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel 
additives with metallic compounds, including 
manganese-based compounds containing MMT. 
Repairs to correct the effects of using a fuel for 
which your vehicle was not designed may not be 
covered by your warranty. 
Octane recommendations 
Your vehicle is 
designed to use 
87 “Regular” unleaded 
gasoline with pump 
(R+M)/2 METHOD 
(R+M)/2 octane rating of 87. We do not recommend 
the use of gasolines labeled as “Regular” that are 
sold with octane ratings of 86 or lower in high 
altitude areas. 
Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes 
knocks lightly. However, if it knocks heavily under 
most driving conditions while you are using fuel with 
the recommended octane rating, see your dealer or 
a qualified service technician to prevent any engine 
damage. 
217
Maintenance and Specifications 
Fuel quality 
If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or 
hesitation driveability problems during a cold start, 
try a different brand of “Regular” unleaded gasoline. 
“Premium” unleaded gasoline is not recommended 
(particularly in the United States) because it may 
cause these problems to become more pronounced. 
If the problems persist, see your dealer or a qualified 
service technician. 
It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket 
products to your fuel tank if you continue to use 
high quality fuel of the recommended octane rating. 
Aftermarket products could cause damage to the 
fuel system. Repairs to correct the effects of using 
an aftermarket product in your fuel may not be 
covered by your warranty. 
Many of the world’s 
automakers issued the 
World-wide Fuel 
Charter that 
recommends gasoline 
specifications to 
provide improved 
performance and 
emission control 
system protection for your vehicle. Gasolines that 
meet the World-wide Fuel Charter should be used 
when available. Ask your fuel supplier about 
gasolines that meet the World-wide Fuel Charter. In 
Canada, look for fuels that display the Auto 
Makers’ Choicey logo. 
Cleaner air 
Ford endorses the use of reformulated 
“cleaner-burning” gasolines to improve air quality. 
Running out of fuel 
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may 
have an adverse affect on powertrain components. 
If you have run out of fuel: 
218
Maintenance and Specifications 
² You may need to cycle the ignition from OFF to 
ON several times after refueling, to allow the fuel 
system to pump the fuel from the tank to the 
engine. 
² Your “Service Engine Soon” indicator may come 
on. For more information on the “Service Engine 
Soon” indicator, refer to the Instrument cluster 
chapter. 
Fuel Filter 
For fuel filter replacement, see your dealer or a 
qualified service technician. Refer to the scheduled 
maintenance guide for the appropriate intervals for 
changing the fuel filter. 
Replace the fuel filter with an authorized 
Motorcraft part. The customer warranty may 
be void for any damage to the fuel system if an 
authorized Motorcraft fuel filter is not used. 
ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY 
Measuring techniques 
Your best source of information about actual fuel 
economy is you, the driver. You must gather 
information as accurately and consistently as 
possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or fuel 
gauge readings are NOT accurate as a measure of 
fuel economy. We do not recommend taking fuel 
economy measurements during the first 1,600 km 
(1,000 miles) of driving (engine break-in period). 
You will get a more accurate measurement after 
3,000 km–5,000 km (2,000 miles-3,000 miles). 
Filling the tank 
The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your 
vehicle is equal to the rated refill capacity of the fuel 
tank as listed in the Refill capacities section of this 
chapter. 
The advertised capacity is the amount of the 
indicated capacity and the empty reserve combined. 
Indicated capacity is the difference in the amount of 
219
Maintenance and Specifications 
fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge 
indicates empty. Empty reserve is the small amount 
of fuel remaining in the fuel tank after the fuel 
gauge indicates empty. 
The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve 
varies and should not be relied upon to 
increase driving range. When refueling your 
vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, 
you might not be able to refuel the full amount 
of the advertised capacity of the fuel tank due 
to the empty reserve still present in the tank. 
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank: 
² Turn the engine/ignition switch to the off position 
prior to refueling, an error in the reading will 
result if the engine is left running. 
² Use the same filling rate setting (low — medium 
— high) each time the tank is filled. 
² Allow no more than 2 automatic click-offs when 
filling. 
² Always use fuel with the recommended octane 
rating. 
² Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a 
national brand. 
² Use the same side of the same pump and have 
the vehicle facing the same direction each time 
you fill up. 
² Have the vehicle loading and distribution the 
same every time. 
Your results will be most accurate if your filling 
method is consistent. 
Calculating fuel economy 
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial 
odometer reading (in kilometers or miles). 
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of 
fuel added (in liters or gallons). 
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the 
fuel tank and record the current odometer reading. 
220
Maintenance and Specifications 
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the 
current odometer reading. 
5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to 
determine fuel economy: 
Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by 
total kilometers traveled. 
Divide total miles traveled by total gallons 
used. 
Keep a record for at least one month and record the 
type of driving (city or highway). This will provide 
an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel economy 
under current driving conditions. Additionally, 
keeping records during summer and winter will show 
how temperature impacts fuel economy. In general, 
lower temperatures give lower fuel economy. 
Driving style — good driving and fuel economy 
habits 
Give consideration to the lists that follow and you 
may be able to change a number of variables and 
improve your fuel economy. 
Habits 
² Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% 
savings in fuel. 
² Steady speeds without stopping will usually give 
the best fuel economy. 
² Idling for long periods of time (greater than one 
minute) may waste fuel. 
² Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate 
the need to stop. 
² Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel 
economy. 
² Slow down gradually. 
² Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 88 km/h 
[55 mph] uses 15% less fuel than traveling at 105 
km/h [65 mph]). 
² Revving the engine before turning it off may 
reduce fuel economy. 
221
Maintenance and Specifications 
² Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce 
fuel economy. 
² You may want to turn off the speed control in 
hilly terrain if unnecessary shifting between third 
and fourth gear occurs. Unnecessary shifting of 
this type could result in reduced fuel economy. 
² Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not 
required and may reduce fuel economy. 
² Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving 
may reduce fuel economy. 
² Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go 
driving. 
Maintenance 
² Keep tires properly inflated and use only 
recommended size. 
² Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of 
alignment will reduce fuel economy. 
² Use recommended engine oil. Refer to Lubricant 
specifications in this chapter. 
² Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance 
items. Follow the recommended maintenance 
schedule and owner maintenance checks found in 
your vehicle scheduled maintenance guide. 
Conditions 
² Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may 
reduce fuel economy at any speed. 
² Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel 
economy (approximately 0.4 km/L [1 mpg] is lost 
for every 180 kg [400 lb] of weight carried). 
² Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for 
example bug deflectors, rollbars/light bars, 
running boards, ski/luggage racks) may reduce 
fuel economy. 
² Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel 
economy. 
² Fuel economy may decrease with lower 
temperatures during the first 12–16 km (8–10 
miles) of driving. 
222
Maintenance and Specifications 
² Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel 
economy as compared to driving on hilly terrain. 
² Transmissions give their best fuel economy when 
operated in the top cruise gear and with steady 
pressure on the gas pedal. 
² Close windows for high speed driving. 
EPA window sticker 
Every new vehicle should have the EPA window 
sticker. Contact your dealer if the window sticker is 
not supplied with your vehicle. The EPA window 
sticker should be your guide for the fuel economy 
comparisons with other vehicles. 
It is important to note the box in the lower left 
corner of the window sticker. These numbers 
represent the Range of L/100 km (MPG) expected 
on the vehicle under optimum conditions. Your fuel 
economy may vary depending upon the method of 
operation and conditions. 
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM 
Your vehicle is equipped with various emission 
control components and a catalytic converter which 
will enable your vehicle to comply with applicable 
exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the 
catalytic converter and other emission control 
components continue to work properly: 
² Use only the specified fuel listed. 
² Avoid running out of fuel. 
² Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is 
moving, especially at high speeds. 
² Have the items listed in your scheduled 
maintenance guide performed according to the 
specified schedule. 
The scheduled maintenance items listed in the 
scheduled maintenance guide are essential to the life 
and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions 
system. 
If other than Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized 
parts are used for maintenance replacements or for 
223
Maintenance and Specifications 
service of components affecting emission control, 
such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine 
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and 
durability. 
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in 
dry grass or other dry ground cover. The 
emission system heats up the engine compartment 
and exhaust system, which can start a fire. 
Illumination of the “Service Engine Soon” light, 
charging system warning light or the temperature 
warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke or 
loss of engine power, could indicate that the 
emission control system is not working properly. 
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful 
and potentially lethal fumes into the 
passenger compartment. 
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your 
vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle owners and anyone 
who manufactures, repairs, services, sells, leases, 
trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are 
not permitted to intentionally remove an emission 
control device or prevent it from working. 
Information about your vehicle’s emission system is 
on the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal 
located on or near the engine. This decal identifies 
engine displacement and gives some tune up 
specifications. 
Please consult your Warranty Guide for complete 
emission warranty information. 
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) 
testing 
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to 
pass an I/M test of the on-board diagnostics system. 
If your “Check Engine/Service Engine Soon” light is 
on, refer to the description in the Warning lights 
and chimes section of the Instrument cluster 
chapter. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test with 
the “Check Engine/Service Engine Soon” light on. 
224
Maintenance and Specifications 
If the vehicle’s powertrain system or its battery has 
just been serviced, the on-board diagnostics system 
is reset to a “not ready for I/M test” condition. To 
ready the on-board diagnostics system for I/M 
testing, a minimum of 30 minutes of city and 
highway driving is necessary as described below: 
² First, at least 10 minutes of driving on an 
expressway or highway. 
² Next, at least 20 minutes driving in stop-and-go, 
city-type traffic with at least four idle periods. 
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours 
without starting the engine. Then, start the engine 
and complete the above driving cycle. The engine 
must warm up to its normal operating temperature. 
Once started, do not turn off the engine until the 
above driving cycle is complete. 
CHECKING AND ADDING POWER STEERING 
FLUID 
Check the power steering fluid. Refer to the 
scheduled maintenance guide for the service interval 
schedules. If adding fluid is necessary, use only 
MERCONt ATF. 
If your vehicle is 
equipped with the 
3.8L V6 engine, check 
the power steering 
fluid level with the 
engine at normal 
operating temperature. 
1. Start the engine and 
let it run until it 
reaches normal 
operating temperature 
(the engine coolant 
temperature gauge 
indicator will be near 
the center of the 
normal area between H 
and C). 
FILL HOT 
225
Maintenance and Specifications 
2. While the engine idles, turn the steering wheel 
left and right several times. 
3. Turn the engine off. 
4. Check the fluid level on the dipstick. It should be 
within the FULL HOT range. Do not add fluid if the 
level is within this range. 
5. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, 
continuously checking the level until it reaches the 
correct operating range. Be sure to put the cap back 
on the reservoir. 
If your vehicle is 
equipped with a 4.6L 
V8 engine, check the 
power steering fluid 
level with the engine at 
ambient temperature. 
Allow at least one-half 
hour after driving for 
the power steering 
fluid to cool. 
1. Start the engine and 
allow the engine to 
idle. 
MAX 
2. Turn the steering 
MIN 
wheel left and right 
several times. 
3. Turn the engine off. 
4. Check the fluid level in the reservoir. It should be 
between the MIN and MAX lines. Do not add fluid if 
the level is within this range. 
5. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, 
continuously checking the level until it reaches the 
correct operating range. Be sure to put the cap back 
on the reservoir. 
BRAKE FLUID 
Checking and adding brake fluid 
Brake fluid should be checked and refilled as 
needed. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide 
for the service interval schedules. 
226
Maintenance and Specifications 
² 3.8L OHV V6 engine 
² 4.6L SOHC V8 
engine 
1. Clean the reservoir cap before removal to prevent 
dirt or water from entering the reservoir. 
2. Visually inspect the 
fluid level. 
3. If necessary, add 
MAX 
brake fluid from a clean 
un-opened container 
until the level reaches MAX. Do not fill above this 
line. 
4. Use only a DOT 3 brake fluid certified to meet 
Ford specification ESA-M6C25–A. Refer to 
Lubricant specifications in this chapter. 
Brake fluid is toxic. If brake fluid contacts 
the eyes, flush eyes with running water for 
15 minutes. Seek medical attention if irritation 
persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce 
vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately. 
227
Maintenance and Specifications 
If you use a brake fluid that is not DOT 3, 
you will cause permanent damage to your 
brakes. 
Do not let the reservoir for the master 
cylinder run dry. This may cause the brakes 
to fail. 
CLUTCH ADJUSTMENT (IF EQUIPPED) 
Check the clutch 
adjustment. Refer to 
the scheduled 
maintenance guide for 
the service interval 
schedules. 
The clutch on your 
vehicle is operated by a 
cable. As necessary, adjust the clutch as described 
below. 
1. Turn the engine off and shift into 1 (First). 
2. Put your foot under the clutch pedal and gently 
pull it up until the pedal stops. 
3. Push the clutch pedal down slowly. You will hear a 
click as the clutch adjusts itself. 
TRANSMISSION FLUID 
Checking automatic transmission fluid 
(if equipped) 
Refer to your scheduled maintenance guide for 
scheduled intervals for fluid checks and changes. 
Your transmission does not consume fluid. However, 
the fluid level should be checked if the transmission 
is not working properly, i.e., if the transmission slips 
or shifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid 
leakage. 
Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. 
To obtain an accurate fluid check, drive the vehicle 
228
Maintenance and Specifications 
until it is at normal operating temperature 
(approximately 30 km [20 miles]). If your vehicle has 
been operated for an extended period at high 
speeds, in city traffic during hot weather or pulling a 
trailer, the vehicle should be turned off for about 30 
minutes to allow fluid to cool before checking. 
1. Drive the vehicle 30 km (20 miles) or until it 
reaches normal operating temperature. 
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the 
parking brake. 
3. With the parking brake engaged and your foot on 
the brake pedal, start the engine and move the 
gearshift lever through all of the gear ranges. Allow 
sufficient time for each gear to engage. 
4. Latch the gearshift lever in P (Park) and leave the 
engine running. 
5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean with a clean, 
dry lint free rag. If necessary, refer to Identifying 
components in the engine compartment in this 
chapter for the location of the dipstick. 
6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in 
the filler tube. 
7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level. 
The fluid should be in the designated area for 
normal operating temperature or ambient 
temperature. 
Low fluid level 
Do not drive the 
vehicle if the fluid level 
is at the bottom of the 
dipstick and the ambient temperature is above 10°C 
(50°F). 
Correct fluid level 
The transmission fluid should be checked at normal 
operating temperature 66°C-77°C (150°F-170°F) on 
a level surface. The normal operating temperature 
can be reached after approximately 30 km (20 
miles) of driving. 
229
Maintenance and Specifications 
You can check the fluid without driving if the 
ambient temperature is above 10°C (50°F). However, 
if fluid is added at this time, an overfill condition 
could result when the vehicle reaches normal 
operating temperature. 
The transmission fluid 
should be in this range 
if at normal operating 
temperature (66°C-77°C [150°F-170°F]). 
The transmission fluid 
should be in this range 
if at ambient 
temperature (10°C-35°C [50°F-95°F]). 
High fluid level 
Fluid levels above the 
safe range may result 
in transmission failure. 
An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause 
shift and/or engagement concerns and/or possible 
damage. 
High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating 
condition. 
Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels 
Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type 
is used. The type of fluid used is normally indicated 
on the dipstick and also in the Lubricant 
specifications section in this chapter. 
Use of a non-approved automatic transmission 
fluid may cause internal transmission 
component damage. 
If necessary, add fluid in 250 ml (1/2 pint) 
increments through the filler tube until the level is 
correct. 
If an overfill occurs, 
excess fluid should be 
removed by a qualified 
technician. 
230
Maintenance and Specifications 
An overfill condition of transmission fluid may 
cause shift and/or engagement concerns and/or 
possible damage. 
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid 
additives, treatments or cleaning agents. The use of 
these materials may affect transmission operation 
and result in damage to internal transmission 
components. 
Checking and adding manual transmission fluid 
(if equipped) 
1. Clean the filler plug. 
2. Remove the filler 
plug and inspect the 
fluid level. 
3. Fluid level should be 
at bottom of the 
opening. 
4. Add enough fluid 
through the filler 
opening so that the 
fluid level is at the 
bottom of the opening. 
5. Install and tighten the fill plug securely. 
Use only fluid that meets Ford specifications. Refer 
to Lubricant Specifications in this chapter. 
231
Maintenance and Specifications 
INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY 
GRADING 
New vehicles are fitted 
with tires that have a 
rating on them called 
Tire Quality Grades. 
The Quality grades can 
be found where 
applicable on the tire sidewall between tread 
shoulder and maximum section width. For example: 
² Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A 
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by 
standards that the United States Department of 
Transportation has set. 
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic tires for 
use on passenger cars. They do not apply to deep 
tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or 
temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim 
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production 
tires as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal 
Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2). 
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality 
grades: The U.S. Department of Transportation 
requires Ford to give you the following information 
about tire grades exactly as the government has 
written it. 
Treadwear 
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based 
on the wear rate of the tire when tested under 
controlled conditions on a specified government test 
course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear 
one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the 
government course as a tire graded 100. The relative 
performance of tires depends upon the actual 
conditions of their use, however, and may depart 
significantly from the norm due to variations in 
driving habits, service practices, and differences in 
road characteristics and climates. 
232
Maintenance and Specifications 
Traction AA A B C 
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, 
A, B, and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to 
stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled 
conditions on specified government test surfaces of 
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have 
poor traction performance. 
The traction grade assigned to this tire is 
based on straight-ahead braking traction 
tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, 
hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics. 
Temperature A B C 
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and 
C, representing the tire’s resistance to the 
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat 
when tested under controlled conditions on a 
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained 
high temperature can cause the material of the tire 
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive 
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The 
grade C corresponds to a level of performance which 
all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal 
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades A 
and B represent higher levels of performance on the 
laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by 
law. 
The temperature grade for this tire is 
established for a tire that is properly inflated 
and not overloaded. Excessive speed, 
underinflation, or excessive loading, either 
separately or in combination, can cause heat 
buildup and possible tire failure. 
233
Maintenance and Specifications 
SERVICING YOUR TIRES 
Checking the tire pressure 
² Use an accurate tire pressure gauge. 
² Check the tire pressure when tires are cold, after 
the vehicle has been parked for at least one hour 
or has been driven less than 5 km (3 miles). 
² Adjust tire pressure to recommended 
specifications found on the certification label on 
the driver side door latch pillar. 
Improperly inflated tires can affect vehicle 
handling and can fail suddenly, possibly 
resulting in loss of vehicle control. 
Tire rotation 
Because your vehicle’s tires perform different jobs, 
they often wear differently. To make sure your tires 
wear evenly and last longer, rotate them as indicated 
in the scheduled maintenance guide. If you notice 
that the tires wear unevenly, have them checked. 
² 15 or 16 inch four 
tire rotation 
234
Maintenance and Specifications 
² 17 inch four tire 
rotation 
Replacing the tires 
Replace the tires when 
the wear band is visible 
through the tire treads. 
When replacing full size tires, never mix 
radial bias-belted, or bias-type tires. Use 
only the tire sizes that are listed on the tire 
pressure decal. Make sure that all tires are the 
same size, speed rating, and load-carrying capacity. 
Use only the tire combinations recommended on 
the label. If you do not follow these precautions, 
your vehicle may not drive properly and safely. 
Make sure that all replacement tires are of 
the same size, type, load-carrying capacity 
and tread design (e.g., “All Terrain”, etc.), as 
originally offered by Ford. 
Make sure that all replacement tires are of 
the same size, type, load-carrying capacity 
and tread design (e.g., “All Terrain”, “Touring”, 
etc.), as originally offered by Ford. 
235
Maintenance and Specifications 
Failure to follow these precautions may 
adversely affect the handling of the vehicle 
and make it easier for the driver to lose control 
and roll over. 
Tires that are larger or smaller than your vehicle’s 
original tires may also affect the accuracy of your 
speedometer. 
SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS 
Driving too fast for conditions creates the 
possibility of loss of vehicle control. Driving 
at very high speeds for extended periods of time 
may result in damage to vehicle components. 
Snow tires must be the same size and grade 
as the tires you currently have on your 
vehicle. 
The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to 
provide traction in rain and snow. However, in some 
climates, you may need to use snow tires and 
chains. Use chains on the tires only in an emergency 
or if the law requires them. 
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and 
chains: 
² Chains may damage aluminum wheels. 
² Use only Cable Type chains with size P225/55R16 
or 245/45ZR17 tires. Use of SAE Class S chains 
may damage your vehicle. 
² SAE Class S chains may be used on P205/65R15 
tires. 
² Install chains securely, verifying that the chains do 
not touch any wiring, brake lines or fuel lines. 
² Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains rub or 
bang against your vehicle, stop and re-tighten the 
chains. If this does not work, remove the chains 
to prevent damage to your vehicle. 
236
Maintenance and Specifications 
² If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle. 
² Remove the tire chains when they are no longer 
needed. Do not use tire chains on dry roads. 
² The suspension insulation and bumpers will help 
prevent vehicle damage. Do not remove these 
components from your vehicle when using snow 
tires and chains. 
MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS 
Component 3.8L OHV V6 
engine 
4.6L SOHC V8 
engine 
Air filter element FA-1611 FA-1634 
Fuel filter FG-986 FG-986B 
Battery BXT-59 BXT-59 
Oil filter FL-400S FL-820S 
PCV valve EV-152 EV-98 
Spark plugs* AWSF-42EE** AWSF-32P 
* Refer to Vehicle Emissions Control Information 
(VECI) decal for spark plug gap information. 
**If a spark plug is removed for inspection, it must 
be reinstalled in the same cylinder. If a spark plug 
needs to be replaced, use only spark plugs with the 
same service part number suffix letter as shown on 
the engine decal. 
237
Maintenance and Specifications 
REFILL CAPACITIES 
Fluid Ford Part 
Name 
Application Capacity 
Brake fluid Motorcraft 
High 
Performance 
DOT 3 Motor 
Vehicle Brake 
Fluid 
All Fill to line on 
reservoir 
Engine oil 
(includes 
filter change) 
Motorcraft 
SAE 5W-20 
Premium 
Synthetic 
Blend Motor 
Oil 
3.8L OHV V6 
engine 
4.7 L (5.0 
quarts) 
4.6L SOHC 
V8 engine 
5.7L (6.0 
quarts) 
Engine 
coolant 1 
Motorcraft 
Premium 
Engine 
Coolant 
(green-colored) 
or 
Motorcraft 
Premium 
Gold Engine 
Coolant 
(yellow-colored) 
3.8L OHV V6 
engine 
11.2L (11.8 
quarts) 
4.6L SOHC 
V8 engine 
13.3L (14.1 
quarts) 
Power 
steering fluid 
Motorcraft 
MERCONt 
ATF 
3.8L OHV V6 
engine 
Keep in 
FULL HOT 
range on 
dispstick 
4.6L SOHC 
V8 engine 
Fill to 
between MIN 
and MAX 
lines on 
reservoir 
238
Maintenance and Specifications 
Fluid Ford Part 
Name 
Application Capacity 
Rear axle 
lubricant 2 
Motorcraft 
SAE 80W-90 
Premium 
Rear Axle 
Lubricant 
7 .5 inch axle 1.5L (3.25 
pints) 
Motorcraft 
SAE 75W-140 
Synthetic 
Rear Axle 
Lubricant 
8.8 inch axle 2.0L (4.25 
pints) 
Fuel tank N/A All 59.4L (15.7 
gallons) 
Transmission 
fluid 3 
Motorcraft 
MERCONtV 
ATF 
Automatic 
with 3.8L 
OHV V6 
engine 
13.1L (13.9 
quarts) 4 
Automatic 
with 4.6L 
SOHC V8 
engine 
12.0L (12.8 
quarts) 4 
Motorcraft 
MERCONt 
ATF 
Manual with 
3.8L OHV V6 
engine 
2.6L (5.6 
pints) 5 
Synthetic 
MERCONt 
ATF 
Manual with 
4.6L SOHC 
V8 engine 
3.8L (8.0 
pints) 5 
Windshield 
washer fluid 
Ultra-Clear 
Windshield 
Washer 
Concentrate 
All 3.8L (4.0 
quarts) 
1Add the coolant type originally equipped in your 
vehicle. 
2Rear axle lubricants do not need to be checked or 
changed unless a leak is suspected, service is 
required or the axle assembly has been submerged 
in water. The axle lubricant should be changed any 
time the rear axle has been submerged in water. Fill 
6 mm to 14 mm (1/4 inch to 9/16 inch) below 
bottom of fill hole. Add 118 ml (4 oz.) of Additive 
Friction Modifier C8AZ-19B546-A or equivalent 
239
Maintenance and Specifications 
meeting Ford specification EST-M2C118–A for 
complete refill of Traction-Lok axles. 
3Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is 
used. Transmission fluid requirements are indicated 
on the dipstick or on the dipstick handle. MERCONt 
and MERCONt V are not interchangeable. DO NOT 
mix MERCONt and MERCONt V. Refer to your 
scheduled maintenance guide to determine the 
correct service interval. 
4Indicates only approximate dry-fill capacity. Some 
applications may vary based on cooler size and if 
equipped with an in-tank cooler. The amount of 
transmission fluid and fluid level should be set by 
the indication on the dipstick’s normal operating 
range. 
5Service refill capacity is determined by filling the 
transmission to the bottom of the filler hole with the 
vehicle on a level surface. 
LUBRICANT SPECIFICATIONS 
Item Ford part 
name 
Ford part 
number 
Ford 
specification 
Brake fluid Motorcraft 
High 
Performance 
DOT 3 Motor 
Vehicle Brake 
Fluid 
PM-1 ESA-M6C25-A 
and DOT 3 
Door 
weatherstrips 
Silicone 
Lubricant 
F7AZ-19G208-BA 
and 
F5AZ-19553-AA 
ESR-M13P4-A 
Door latch, 
hood latch, 
auxiliary hood 
latch, door 
hinges, striker 
plates, seat 
tracks and fuel 
filler door 
hinge 
Multi-Purpose 
Grease 
XG-4or 
F5AZ-19G209-AA 
ESR-M1C159-A 
240
Maintenance and Specifications 
Item Ford part 
name 
Ford part 
number 
Ford 
specification 
Engine coolant Motorcraft 
Premium 
Engine Coolant 
(green-colored) 
VC-4–A (US) 
or CXC-10 
(Canada) 
ESE-M97B44-A 
Motorcraft 
Premium Gold 
Engine Coolant 
(yellow-colored) 
VC-7–A WSS-M97B51–A1 
Engine oil Motorcraft SAE 
5W-20 Super 
Premium Motor 
Oil 
XO-5W20-QSP WSS-M2C153-H 
with API 
Certification 
Mark 
Lock cylinders Penetrating 
and Lock 
Lubricant 
Motorcraft 
XL-1 
none 
Power steering 
fluid and 
convertible top 
fluid (if 
equipped) 
Motorcraft 
MERCONt ATF 
XT-2-QM MERCONt 
Rear Axle 
Lubricant 
Motorcraft SAE 
80W-90 
Premium Rear 
Axle Lubricant 
1 
XY-80W90-QL WSP-M2C197-A 
Motorcraft SAE 
75W-140 
Synthetic Rear 
Axle Lubricant 
XY-75W140-QL WSP-M2C192-A 
Automatic 
transmission 
fluid 
Motorcraft 
MERCONtV 
ATF 2 
XT-5-QM MERCONtV 
3.8L Manual 
transmission 
fluid 
Motorcraft 
MERCONt ATF 
XT-2-QDX MERCONt 
4.6L Manual 
transmission 
fluid 
Motorcraft 
Synthetic 
MERCONt ATF 
XT-2–QSM MERCONt and 
ESR-M2C163–A2 
Disc brake 
caliper rails 
Motorcraft 
Silicone Brake 
Caliper Grease 
and Dielectric 
Compound 
XG-3 ESE-M1C171-A 
Windshield 
washer fluid 
Ultra-clear 
Windshield 
Washer 
Concentrate 
C9AZ-19550-AC ESR-M17P5-A 
241
Maintenance and Specifications 
1Add 118 ml (4 oz.) of Additive Friction Modifier 
C8AZ-19B546-A or equivalent meeting Ford 
specification EST-M2C118-A for complete refill of 
Traction-Lok axles. 
Ford design rear axles contain a synthetic lubricant 
that does not require changing unless the axle has 
been submerged in water. 
2Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is 
used. Transmission fluid requirements are indicated 
on the dipstick or on the dipstick handle. MERCONt 
and MERCONt V are not interchangeable. DO NOT 
mix MERCONt and MERCONt V. Refer to your 
scheduled maintenance guide to determine the 
correct service interval. 
ENGINE DATA 
Engine 3.8L OHV V6 
engine 
4.6L SOHC V8 
engine 
Cubic inches 232 281 
Required fuel 87 octane 87 octane 
Firing order 1-4-2-5-3-6 1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8 
Spark plug gap 1.3-1.4 mm 
(0.052-00.056 
inch) 
1.3-1.4 mm 
(0.052-00.056 
inch) 
Ignition system EDIS Coil on plug 
Compression ratio 9.4:1 9.4:1 
VEHICLE DIMENSIONS 
Vehicle 
dimensions 
Coupe mm (in) Convertible mm 
(in) 
(1) Overall length 4653.3 (183.2) 4653.3 (183.2) 
(2) Overall width 1856.7 (73.1) 1856.7 (73.1) 
(3) Overall height 1348.7 (53.1) 1351.3 (53.2) 
(4) Wheelbase 2573.0 (101.3) 2573.0 (101.3) 
(5) Track - Front 1534.2 (60.4) 1 1534.2 (60.4) 1 
(5) Track - Rear 1539.2 (60.6) 2 1539.2 (60.6) 2 
1 1521.5 mm (59.9 in) for Mustang GT 
2 1526.5 mm (60.1 in) for Mustang GT 
242
Maintenance and Specifications 
2 
5 
3 
4 
1 
IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE 
Certification label 
The National Highway 
Traffic Safety 
Administration 
Regulations require 
that a Certification 
label be affixed to a 
vehicle and prescribe 
where the Certification 
label may be located. 
The Certification label 
is located on the front 
door latch pillar on the driver’s side. 
MFD. BY FORD MOTOR CO. IN U.S.A. 
DATE: XXXXX GVWR:XXXXXXXXXXXX 
FRONT GAWR: XXXXXX/XXXXXXX 
REAR GAWR: XXXXXXX/XXXXXXX 
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL 
MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY, BUMPER, AND THEFT PRE-VENTION 
STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF 
XXXXX 
XXXXX 
MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE. 
EXT PNT: XXXXXX XXXXXX RC: XX DSO: XXXX 
BAR INT TR TP/PS R AXLE TR SPR 
X XX XXX X XX X XXXX 
UPC ÑF85B-1520472-AB 
VIN: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 
TYPE: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 
243
Maintenance and Specifications 
Vehicle identification number (VIN) 
The vehicle 
identification number is 
attached to a metal tag 
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 
and is located on the 
driver side instrument 
panel. (Please note 
that in the graphic 
XXXX is representative 
of your vehicle 
identification number.) 
Engine number 
The engine number (the last eight numbers of the 
vehicle identification number) is stamped on the 
engine block and transmission. 
244
Accessories 
FORD ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE 
A wide selection of genuine Ford accessories are 
available for your vehicle through your local 
authorized Ford, Lincoln, Mercury or Ford of Canada 
dealer. These quality accessories have been 
specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive 
needs; they are custom designed to complement the 
style and aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle. 
In addition, each accessory is made from high 
quality materials and meets or exceeds Ford’s 
rigorous engineering and safety specifications. Ford 
Motor Company will repair or replace any properly 
dealer-installed Ford accessory found to be defective 
in factory-supplied materials or workmanship during 
the warranty period, as well as any component 
damaged by the defective accessory. The accessory 
will be warranted for whichever provides you the 
greatest benefit: 
² 12 months or 2,000 km (12,000 miles) (whichever 
occurs first), or 
² the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty. 
This means that genuine Ford accessories purchased 
along with your new vehicle and installed by the 
dealer are covered for the full length of your New 
Vehicle’s Limited Warranty — 3 years or 60,000 km 
(36,000 miles) (whichever occurs first). Contact 
your dealer for details and a copy of the warranty. 
Not all accessories are available for all models. 
Vehicle Security 
Air bag anti-theft locks 
Styled wheel locks 
Vehicle security systems 
Comfort and convenience 
Ash Cup 
Cargo nets 
Cargo organizers 
Cargo tray 
245
Accessories 
Dash trim 
Electrochromic mirror with compass 
Electrochromic mirror with compass and 
temperature display 
Engine block heaters 
Remote keyless entry system 
Remote start system 
Travel equipment 
Auto headlamps with daytime running lights (DRL) 
Daytime running lights (DRL) 
First aid kit 
Fog lights 
Highway safety kit 
Removable luggage rack 
Removable luggage rack adapters (Bike, ski, 
snowboard) 
Speed control 
Protection and appearance equipment 
All-weather vinyl floor mats 
Car cover 
Cargo liners, interior 
Carpet floor mats 
Door edge guards 
Door sill scuff plates, stainless 
Flat splash guards 
Front end covers (full and mini) 
Gearshift knob 
Leather steering wheel 
Molded splash guards 
Pedal covers 
Seat belt extenders 
246
Accessories 
Side air deflector 
Spoiler 
Styled hood deflector 
Tonneau cover (mini, for convertible top) 
Universal floor mats 
Wheels (chrome and painted) 
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the 
following information in mind when adding 
accessories or equipment to your vehicle: 
² When adding accessories, equipment, passengers 
and luggage to your vehicle, do not exceed the 
total weight capacity of the vehicle or of the front 
or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the 
Safety compliance certification label). Consult 
your dealer for specific weight information. 
² The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) 
and Canadian Radio Telecommunications 
Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile 
communications systems - such as two-way 
radios, telephones and theft alarms - that are 
equipped with radio transmitters. Any such 
equipment installed in your vehicle should comply 
with FCC or CRTC regulations and should be 
installed only by a qualified service technician. 
² Mobile communications systems may harm the 
operation of your vehicle, particularly if they are 
not properly designed for automotive use or are 
not properly installed. When operated, such 
systems may cause the engine to stumble or stall 
or cause the transmission to be damaged or 
operate improperly. In addition, such systems may 
be damaged or their performance may be affected 
by operating your vehicle. (Citizens band [CB] 
transceivers, garage door openers and other 
transmitters with outputs of five watts or less will 
not ordinarily affect your vehicle’s operation.) 
² Ford cannot assume responsibility for any adverse 
effects or damage that may result from the use of 
such equipment. 
247
A 
ABS (see Brakes) ... 140 
Air bag supplemental 
restraint 
system .............. 114–115 
and child safety 
seats ....................... 116 
description ............ 115 
disposal .................. 119 
driver air bag ........ 117 
indicator 
light .................. 11, 119 
operation ............... 117 
passenger 
air bag .................... 117 
Air cleaner filter ..... 237 
Air conditioning 
manual heating 
and air conditioning 
system ..................... 63 
Antifreeze 
(see Engine 
coolant) ................... 206 
Anti-lock brake system 
(see Brakes) .... 140–141 
Anti-theft system 
warning light ........... 11 
Audio system 
(see Radio) .......... 19, 43 
Automatic 
transmission ............ 144 
driving an automatic 
overdrive ............... 146 
fluid, adding .......... 228 
fluid, checking ...... 228 
fluid, refill 
capacities ............... 238 
fluid, 
specification .......... 242 
Auxiliary power 
point ........................... 78 
Axle 
lubricant 
specifications ... 240, 242 
refill capacities ...... 238 
traction lok ............ 144 
B 
Battery ..................... 203 
acid, treating 
emergencies .......... 203 
charging system 
warning light ........... 11 
jumping a disabled 
battery ................... 170 
maintenance-free .. 203 
replacement, 
specifications ........ 237 
servicing ................ 203 
voltage gauge .......... 16 
BeltMinder ............... 109 
Brakes .............. 138, 141 
anti-lock ......... 140–141 
anti-lock brake 
system (ABS) 
warning light ... 13, 141 
brake warning 
light .......................... 14 
fluid, checking 
and adding ............ 226 
fluid, refill 
capacities ............... 238 
fluid, 
specifications ... 240, 242 
lubricant 
specifications ... 240, 242 
parking .................. 139 
shift interlock ........ 144 
Break-in period ........... 5 
Bulbs .......................... 71 
Index 
248
C 
Capacities for 
refilling fluids .......... 238 
Cargo net ................... 78 
CD player .................. 43 
CD-single premium ... 19 
Certification Label .. 243 
Changing a tire ....... 165 
Child safety 
restraints ................. 120 
child safety 
belts ....................... 120 
Child safety seats .... 123 
attaching with 
tether straps ......... 127 
in front seat .......... 125 
in rear seat ............ 125 
Cleaning your vehicle 
engine 
compartment ......... 188 
instrument panel .. 190 
interior ................... 191 
plastic parts .......... 190 
washing .................. 187 
waxing ................... 187 
wheels .................... 188 
wiper blades .......... 190 
Climate control 
(see Air conditioning 
or Heating) ................ 63 
Clock .............. 24, 34, 48 
Clutch 
adjusting ................ 228 
operation while 
driving ................... 150 
recommended 
shift speeds ........... 151 
Index 
Console ...................... 84 
Controls 
power seat ............. 100 
Convertible ................ 85 
cleaning ................. 192 
installation of 
the boot ................... 86 
lowering the 
convertible top ........ 85 
raising the 
convertible top ........ 87 
Coolant 
checking and 
adding .................... 206 
refill 
capacities ....... 212, 238 
specifications ... 240, 242 
Cruise control 
(see Speed control) .. 80 
Customer 
Assistance ................ 157 
Ford accessories 
for your vehicle .... 192 
Ford Extended 
Service Plan .......... 178 
Getting assistance 
outside the U.S. 
and Canada ........... 183 
Getting roadside 
assistance .............. 157 
Getting the service 
you need ............... 176 
Ordering additional 
owner’s literature . 184 
The Dispute 
Settlement Board . 179 
Utilizing the 
Mediation/Arbitration 
Program ................. 183 
249
D 
Daytime running lamps 
(see Lamps) .............. 67 
Defrost 
rear window ............ 66 
Dipstick 
automatic 
transmission 
fluid ........................ 228 
engine oil ............... 199 
Doors 
lubricant 
specifications ........ 240 
Driving under 
special conditions 
through water ....... 153 
E 
Emergencies, roadside 
jump-starting ........ 170 
Emission control 
system ...................... 223 
Engine ...................... 242 
check engine/service 
engine soon light .... 11 
cleaning ................. 188 
coolant ................... 206 
idle speed control .... 203 
lubrication 
specifications ... 240, 242 
refill capacities ...... 238 
service 
points ............. 197–198 
starting after 
a collision .............. 159 
Engine block 
heater ....................... 137 
Engine oil ................ 199 
checking and 
adding .................... 199 
dipstick .................. 199 
filter, 
specifications ... 202, 237 
recommendations .... 202 
refill capacities ...... 238 
specifications ... 240, 242 
Exhaust fumes ........ 137 
F 
Floor mats ................. 85 
Fluid capacities ....... 238 
Foglamps ................... 67 
Fuel .......................... 214 
calculating fuel 
economy ................ 219 
cap ................... 12, 216 
capacity ................. 238 
choosing the 
right fuel ................ 217 
comparisons with 
EPA fuel economy 
estimates ............... 223 
detergent in fuel ... 218 
filling your 
vehicle with 
fuel ......... 214, 216, 219 
filter, 
specifications ... 219, 237 
fuel pump shut-off 
switch .................... 159 
gauge ....................... 16 
improving fuel 
economy ................ 219 
low fuel warning 
light .......................... 13 
octane 
rating ............. 217, 242 
quality .................... 218 
Index 
250
running out 
of 
fuel ......................... 218 
safety information 
relating to 
automotive fuels ... 214 
Fuses ........................ 160 
G 
Gas cap 
(see Fuel cap) ... 12, 216 
Gas mileage 
(see 
Fuel economy) ........ 219 
Gauges ....................... 15 
battery voltage 
gauge ....................... 16 
engine coolant 
temperature 
gauge ....................... 15 
engine oil pressure 
gauge ....................... 16 
fuel gauge ................ 16 
odometer ................. 17 
speedometer ........... 17 
tachometer .............. 17 
trip odometer .......... 18 
GAWR (Gross Axle 
Weight Rating) ........ 154 
definition ............... 154 
driving with a 
heavy load ............. 154 
location .................. 154 
GVWR (Gross Vehicle 
Weight Rating) ........ 154 
calculating ............. 154 
definition ............... 154 
driving with a 
heavy load ............. 154 
location .................. 154 
Index 
H 
Hazard flashers ....... 158 
Head restraints ......... 99 
Headlamps ................. 67 
aiming ................ 68–69 
bulb specifications .. 71 
daytime running 
lights ........................ 67 
flash to pass ............ 68 
high beam ......... 10, 68 
replacing bulbs ....... 72 
turning on and off .. 67 
warning chime ........ 15 
Heating 
heating and air 
conditioning 
system ..................... 63 
Hood ........................ 196 
I 
Ignition ............. 133, 242 
removing the key .. 153 
Infant seats (see 
Safety seats) ........... 123 
Inspection/maintenance 
(I/M) testing ............ 224 
Instrument panel 
cleaning ................. 190 
cluster ...................... 10 
lighting up panel 
and interior ............. 68 
J 
Jack .......................... 165 
positioning ............. 165 
storage ................... 165 
251
Jump-starting your 
vehicle ...................... 170 
K 
Keys ..................... 95–97 
key in ignition 
chime ....................... 14 
positions of the 
ignition .................. 133 
removing from 
the ignition ............ 153 
L 
Lamps 
bulb replacement 
specifications 
chart ........................ 71 
cargo lamps ............. 68 
daytime running 
light .......................... 67 
fog lamps ................. 67 
headlamps ......... 67, 72 
headlamps, flash 
to pass ..................... 68 
instrument panel, 
dimming ................... 68 
interior lamps ... 70, 72 
replacing 
bulbs .................. 71–75 
Lane change indicator 
(see Turn signal) ...... 70 
Lights, warning and 
indicator .................... 10 
air bag ...................... 11 
anti-lock brakes 
(ABS) .............. 13, 141 
anti-theft ................. 11 
brake ........................ 14 
charging system ...... 11 
fuel cap light ........... 12 
high beam ............... 10 
low fuel .................... 13 
overdrive off ............ 13 
safety belt ............... 10 
service engine 
soon ......................... 11 
traction control 
active ....................... 13 
turn signal 
indicator .................. 10 
Limited slip axle 
(see Traction Loc) .. 144 
Load limits ............... 154 
GAWR .................... 154 
GVWR .................... 154 
trailer towing ........ 154 
Locks 
doors ........................ 89 
Lubricant 
specifications ... 240, 242 
Lug nuts, 
anti-theft .................. 169 
Lumbar support, 
seats ......................... 100 
M 
Manual 
transmission ............ 150 
fluid capacities ...... 238 
lubricant 
specifications ........ 242 
reverse ................... 152 
Mirrors 
side view mirrors 
(power) ................... 80 
Motorcraft 
parts ................. 219, 237 
O 
Octane rating .......... 217 
Index 
252
Odometer ................... 17 
Oil (see 
Engine oil) ............... 199 
Overdrive ........... 84, 146 
P 
Panic alarm feature, 
remote entry 
system ........................ 92 
Parking brake .......... 139 
Parts (see Motorcraft 
parts) ....................... 237 
Power distribution 
box (see Fuses) ...... 163 
Power door locks ...... 89 
Power mirrors ........... 80 
Power point ............... 78 
Power steering ........ 142 
fluid, checking 
and adding ............ 225 
fluid, refill 
capacity ................. 238 
fluid, 
specifications ... 240, 242 
Power Windows ......... 78 
R 
Radio .................... 19, 43 
Radio reception ... 61–62 
Rear window 
defroster .................... 66 
Relays ...................... 160 
Remote entry 
system .................. 91–92 
illuminated entry .... 94 
Index 
locking/unlocking 
doors .................. 89, 92 
opening the trunk ... 93 
panic alarm ............. 92 
replacement/additional 
transmitters ............. 94 
replacing the 
batteries .................. 93 
Roadside 
assistance ................ 157 
S 
Safety belts (see 
Safety restraints) ..... 14, 
102, 104–107 
Safety defects, 
reporting .................. 186 
Safety 
restraints ... 102, 104–107 
belt minder ........... 109 
cleaning the 
safety belts ............ 113 
extension 
assembly ................ 113 
for adults ....... 104–107 
for children ... 119–120 
warning light 
and chime ............... 10, 
14, 108–109 
Safety seats 
for children .............. 123 
Seat belts (see Safety 
restraints) ................ 102 
Seats .......................... 99 
child safety seats .. 123 
SecuriLock passive 
anti-theft 
system .................. 95–97 
253
Servicing your 
vehicle ...................... 194 
Spare tire 
(see Changing 
the Tire) .................. 165 
Spark plugs, 
specifications ... 237, 242 
Specification chart, 
lubricants ......... 240, 242 
Speed control ............ 80 
Speedometer ............. 17 
Starting your 
vehicle ...... 133–134, 136 
jump starting ........ 170 
Steering wheel 
controls .............. 77, 80 
tilting ....................... 77 
T 
Tachometer ............... 17 
Tires ......... 165, 232–234 
changing ........ 165–166 
checking the 
pressure ................. 234 
replacing ................ 235 
rotating .................. 234 
snow tires and 
chains .................... 236 
tire grades ............. 233 
treadwear .............. 232 
Towing ..................... 156 
recreational 
towing .................... 156 
trailer towing ........ 156 
wrecker .................. 175 
Traction control ...... 142 
active light .............. 13 
Traction-lok rear 
axle .......................... 144 
Transmission 
automatic 
operation ............... 144 
fluid, checking 
and adding 
(automatic) ........... 228 
fluid, checking 
and adding 
(manual) ............... 231 
fluid, refill 
capacities ............... 238 
lubricant 
specifications ... 240, 242 
manual operation .. 150 
Trip odometer ........... 18 
Trunk ......................... 89 
remote release .. 85, 93 
Turn signal .......... 10, 70 
V 
Vehicle dimensions . 242 
Vehicle Identification 
Number (VIN) ......... 244 
Vehicle loading ........ 154 
Ventilating your 
vehicle ...................... 138 
W 
Warning chimes ... 14–15 
Warning lights 
(see Lights) ............... 10 
Washer fluid ............ 199 
Water, Driving 
through .................... 153 
Index 
254
Windows 
power ....................... 78 
Windshield washer 
fluid and wipers 
checking and 
adding fluid ........... 199 
Index 
checking and 
cleaning ................... 76 
operation ................. 76 
replacing wiper 
blades ...................... 77 
Wrecker towing ....... 175 
255
256

More Related Content

PDF
02 cougar
PDF
02 town car
PDF
02 sable
PDF
02 expedition
PDF
02 taurus
PDF
01 taurus
PDF
02 escape
PDF
02 windstar
02 cougar
02 town car
02 sable
02 expedition
02 taurus
01 taurus
02 escape
02 windstar

What's hot (20)

PDF
02 grand marquis
PDF
03 excursion
PDF
02 excursion
PDF
02 ranger
PDF
02 navigator
PDF
03 marauder
PDF
02 continental
PDF
02 ls
PDF
02 villager
PDF
02 explorer sport trac
PDF
03 escort
PDF
02 crown victoria
PDF
02 explorer sport
PDF
02 escort
PDF
02 thunderbird
PDF
03 escape
PDF
03 f series 650 750
PDF
01 explorer sport trac
PDF
03 ranger
PDF
01 escape
02 grand marquis
03 excursion
02 excursion
02 ranger
02 navigator
03 marauder
02 continental
02 ls
02 villager
02 explorer sport trac
03 escort
02 crown victoria
02 explorer sport
02 escort
02 thunderbird
03 escape
03 f series 650 750
01 explorer sport trac
03 ranger
01 escape
Ad

Viewers also liked (20)

PDF
2011 Ford Focus Regina Ford Dealer
PPT
Dynamic Actions On Steroids
PPTX
Pub med
PDF
amerisoureceBergen 2007 Summary Annual Report
PDF
trane 2005Proxyl reports
PDF
amerisoureceBergen 2007 Summary Annual Report
PDF
[Cassandra tate] cigarette war
PDF
J Fraser Mesa Metrics Repeating Session RSTech Ed June 2012
PPTX
Urgencias y Emergencias en Odontología
PPT
Surface Engineering Research for Bio-Medical & Medical Electronics Applicatio...
PDF
Marie Curie
PPT
Uses of internet
PPTX
Auto Insurance Presentation
PDF
Ijg 19-3
PPT
RAeAT SIG Presentation 270109 V0.3
PDF
4 cd1 nature
PDF
trane2006Proxy reports
PDF
Pitney Bowes: How to Organize Internally for Reputation Management Externally...
PDF
Urban Landscape Plantings: A Selection of Plant Species Suitable for the Melb...
2011 Ford Focus Regina Ford Dealer
Dynamic Actions On Steroids
Pub med
amerisoureceBergen 2007 Summary Annual Report
trane 2005Proxyl reports
amerisoureceBergen 2007 Summary Annual Report
[Cassandra tate] cigarette war
J Fraser Mesa Metrics Repeating Session RSTech Ed June 2012
Urgencias y Emergencias en Odontología
Surface Engineering Research for Bio-Medical & Medical Electronics Applicatio...
Marie Curie
Uses of internet
Auto Insurance Presentation
Ijg 19-3
RAeAT SIG Presentation 270109 V0.3
4 cd1 nature
trane2006Proxy reports
Pitney Bowes: How to Organize Internally for Reputation Management Externally...
Urban Landscape Plantings: A Selection of Plant Species Suitable for the Melb...
Ad

Similar to 02 mustang (13)

PDF
03 sable
PDF
03 explorer sport
PDF
03 navigator
PDF
03 taurus
PDF
03 expedition
PDF
03 focus
PDF
03 ls
PDF
02 f series 650 750
PDF
03 mountaneer
PDF
03 f 53 motorhome
PDF
02 econoline e150 250-350-450
PDF
02 f series 250 350 450 550 lihgt super duty
PDF
01 expedition
03 sable
03 explorer sport
03 navigator
03 taurus
03 expedition
03 focus
03 ls
02 f series 650 750
03 mountaneer
03 f 53 motorhome
02 econoline e150 250-350-450
02 f series 250 350 450 550 lihgt super duty
01 expedition

More from rukford (20)

PDF
6.0 l dies
PDF
тнвдбошденсолука1
PDF
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru бесприборная диагностика неисправностей легковых автомобилей
PDF
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru справочник по диагностике неисправностей автомобиля
PDF
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru техобслуживание, мелкий ремонт и покраска автомобиля свои...
PDF
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru справочник автомеханика2008
PDF
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru советы автомеханика техобслуживание, диагностика, ремонт
PDF
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru справочник автомеханика
PDF
97continental
PDF
Vnx.su аэростар 1986—1997 руководство по ремонту и схемы
PDF
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru eec iv-usa
PDF
Ford
PDF
дигностика двигателя. коды неисправностей. руководство 2003
PDF
97aerostar
PDF
97aspire
PDF
Vnx.su escort-i-orion-90-99
PDF
Vnx.su escort-90-pl
PDF
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru escort zetec-1-8-16-v
PDF
Vnx.su scorpio 1994-1998
PDF
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru systema upravleniy
6.0 l dies
тнвдбошденсолука1
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru бесприборная диагностика неисправностей легковых автомобилей
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru справочник по диагностике неисправностей автомобиля
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru техобслуживание, мелкий ремонт и покраска автомобиля свои...
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru справочник автомеханика2008
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru советы автомеханика техобслуживание, диагностика, ремонт
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru справочник автомеханика
97continental
Vnx.su аэростар 1986—1997 руководство по ремонту и схемы
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru eec iv-usa
Ford
дигностика двигателя. коды неисправностей. руководство 2003
97aerostar
97aspire
Vnx.su escort-i-orion-90-99
Vnx.su escort-90-pl
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru escort zetec-1-8-16-v
Vnx.su scorpio 1994-1998
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru systema upravleniy

02 mustang

  • 1. Table of Contents Introduction 3 Instrument Cluster 10 Warning and control lights 10 Gauges 15 Entertainment Systems 19 AM/FM stereo cassette with CD 19 AM/FM stereo with CD 28 AM/FM stereo cassette (CD changer compatible) 43 Climate Controls 63 Lights 67 Headlamps 67 Turn signal control 70 Bulb replacement 71 Driver Controls 76 Windshield wiper/washer control 76 Steering wheel adjustment 77 Power windows 78 Mirrors 80 Speed control 80 Locks and Security 89 Keys 89 Locks 89 Anti-theft system 91 Seating and Safety Restraints 99 Seating 99 Safety restraints 102 Air bags 114 Child restraints 119 Driving 133 Starting 133 1
  • 2. Table of Contents Brakes 138 Traction control/AdvanceTrac 142 Transmission operation 144 Vehicle loading 154 Trailer towing 156 Roadside Emergencies 157 Getting roadside assistance 157 Hazard flasher switch 158 Fuel pump shut-off switch 159 Fuses and relays 160 Changing tires 165 Jump starting 170 Wrecker towing 175 Customer Assistance 176 Reporting safety defects (U.S. only) 186 Cleaning 187 Maintenance and Specifications 194 Engine compartment 197 Engine oil 199 Battery 203 Fuel information 214 Part numbers 237 Refill capacities 238 Lubricant specifications 240 Accessories 245 Index 248 All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written authorization from Ford Motor Company. Ford may change the contents without notice and without incurring obligation. Copyright © 2002 Ford Motor Company 2
  • 3. Introduction The following warning may be required by California law: CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. CONGRATULATIONS Congratulations on acquiring your new Ford. Please take the time to get well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook. The more you know and understand about your vehicle the greater the safety and pleasure you will derive from driving it. For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the following website: ² In the United States: www.ford.com ² In Canada: www.ford.ca ² In Australia: www.ford.com.au ² In Mexico: www.ford.com.mx Additional owner information is given in separate publications. 3
  • 4. Introduction This Owner’s Guide describes every option and model variant available and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your particular vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may describe options before they are generally available. Remember to pass on the Owner’s Guide when reselling the vehicle. It is an integral part of the vehicle. Fuel pump shut-off switch In the event of an accident the safety switch will automatically cut off the fuel supply to the engine. The switch can also be activated through sudden vibration (e.g. collision when parking). To reset the switch, refer to the Fuel pump shut-off switch in the Roadside emergencies chapter. SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION Warning symbols in this guide How can you reduce the risk of personal injury and prevent possible damage to others, your vehicle and its equipment? In this guide, answers to such questions are contained in comments highlighted by the warning triangle symbol. These comments should be read and observed. 4
  • 5. Introduction Warning symbols on your vehicle When you see this symbol, it is imperative that you consult the relevant section of this guide before touching or attempting adjustment of any kind. Protecting the environment We must all play our part in protecting the environment. Correct vehicle usage and the authorized disposal of waste cleaning and lubrication materials are significant steps towards this aim. Information in this respect is highlighted in this guide with the tree symbol. BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE There are no particular guidelines for breaking-in your vehicle. During the first 1,600 km (1,000 miles) of driving, vary speeds frequently. This is recommended to give the moving parts a chance to break in. 5
  • 6. Introduction SPECIAL NOTICES Emission warranty The New Vehicle Limited Warranty includes Bumper-to-Bumper Coverage, Safety Restraint Coverage, Corrosion Coverage, and 7.3L Power Stroke Diesel Engine Coverage. In addition, your vehicle is eligible for Emissions Defect and Emissions Performance Warranties. For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered, refer to the Warranty Guide that is provided to you along with your Owner’s Guide. Special instructions For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic controls. By operating other electronic equipment (e.g. mobile telephone without exterior aerial) electromagnetic fields can occur which can cause malfunctions of the vehicle electronics. Therefore you should observe the instructions of the equipment manufacturers. Please read the section Air bag in the Seating and safety restraints chapter. Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal injury. Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats should NEVER be used in front of a passenger side air bag. 6
  • 7. Introduction Notice to owners of Cobra vehicles Before you drive your vehicle, be sure to read the “SVT Cobra Owner’s Guide Supplement.” This book contains important operation and maintenance information. MIDDLE EAST/NORTH AFRICA VEHICLE SPECIFIC INFORMATION For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with features and options that are different from the ones that are described in this Owner Guide; therefore, a supplement has been supplied that complements this book. By referring to the pages in the provided supplement, you can properly identify those features, recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. Refer to this Owner Guide for all other required information and warnings. 7
  • 8. These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle. Vehicle Symbol Glossary Safety Alert See Owner’s Guide Fasten Safety Belt Air Bag-Front Air Bag-Side Child Seat Child Seat Installation Warning Child Seat Tether Anchorage Brake System Anti-Lock Brake System Brake Fluid - Non-Petroleum Based Traction Control AdvanceTrac Master Lighting Switch Hazard Warning Flasher Fog Lamps-Front Fuse Compartment Fuel Pump Reset Windshield Wash/Wipe Windshield Defrost/Demist Rear Window Defrost/Demist Power Windows Front/Rear Power Window Lockout Child Safety Door Lock/Unlock Introduction 8
  • 9. Vehicle Symbol Glossary Interior Luggage Compartment Release Symbol Panic Alarm Engine Oil Engine Coolant Engine Coolant Temperature Do Not Open When Hot Battery Avoid Smoking, Flames, or Sparks Battery Acid Explosive Gas Fan Warning Power Steering Fluid Maintain Correct Fluid Level MAX MIN Emission System Engine Air Filter Passenger Compartment Air Filter Jack Check fuel cap Low tire warning Introduction 9
  • 10. Instrument Cluster WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES Base instrument cluster 40 30 50 60 60 70 80 100 120 80 90 140 160 180 100 110 120 4 5 3 2 RPMX1000 H L H 0 C E F 20 10 40 20 1 MPH km/h FUEL DOOR THEFT LOW FUEL AIR BAG SERVICE ENGINE SOON Optional instrument cluster 6 BRAKE ! P L SELECT/RESET . 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 H O/D OFF ABS CHECK FUEL CAP 50 40 60 80 70 90 100120 140 80 100 160 110 120 180 200 220 240 4 5 6 3 2 RPMX1000 H L H 7 BRAKE ! P L 0 SELECT/RESET . 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 C E F 30 20 60 40 10 20 130 140 150 8 1 H MPH km/h FUEL DOOR THEFT LOW FUEL O/D OFF AIR BAG SERVICE ENGINE SOON CHECK FUEL CAP ABS Turn signals Illuminates when the turn signals or the hazard lights are turned on. If the lights stay on continuously or flash faster, check for a burned-out bulb. High beams Illuminates when the high beam headlamps are turned on. Safety belt Illuminates to remind you to fasten your safety belts. For more information, refer to the Seating and safety restraints chapter. 10
  • 11. Instrument Cluster Charging system Illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. Air bag readiness Illuminates to confirm AIR that the air bags (front BAG or side) are operational. If the light fails to illuminate, continues to flash or remains on, have the system serviced immediately. Anti-theft system Illuminates when the SecuriLocky Passive Anti-theft System is armed. If the light fails to illuminate, continues to flash or remains on, have the system serviced. Service engine soon Illuminates briefly to SERVICE ensure the system is ENGINE functional. If it comes SOON on after the engine is started, one of the engine’s emission control systems may be malfunctioning. The light may illuminate without a driveability concern being noted. The vehicle will usually be drivable and will not require towing. Light turns on solid: Temporary malfunctions may cause the light to illuminate. Examples are: 1. The vehicle has run out of fuel. 2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel. 3. The fuel cap may not have been properly installed and securely tightened. These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank with high quality fuel of the 11
  • 12. recommended octane and/or properly installing and securely tightening the fuel cap. After three driving cycles without these or any other temporary malfunctions present, the light should turn off. (A driving cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city/highway driving.) No additional vehicle service is required. If the light remains on, have your vehicle serviced at the first available opportunity. Light is blinking: Engine misfire is occurring which could damage your catalytic converter. You should drive in a moderate fashion (avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced at the first available opportunity. Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust temperatures could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel system, interior floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly causing a fire. Check fuel cap Illuminates when the CHECK fuel cap is not installed FUEL correctly. Check the CAP fuel cap for proper installation. When the fuel filler cap is properly re-installed, the light(s) will turn off after a period of normal driving. Continuing to operate the vehicle with the check fuel cap light on, or a mis-installed fuel cap can activate the Service Engine Soon/Check Engine warning light. It may take a long period of time for the system to detect an improperly installed fuel filler cap. For more information, refer to Fuel filler cap in the Maintenance and specifications chapter. Instrument Cluster 12
  • 13. Instrument Cluster Low fuel Illuminates when the fuel level in the fuel LOW tank is at, or near, FUEL empty (refer to Fuel gauge in this chapter for more information). O/D off (if equipped) Illuminates when the O/D overdrive function has OFF been turned OFF using the transmission control switch (TCS) on the gearshift. If the light does not come on or the light flashes steadily, have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, damage to the transmission could occur. Traction ControlY active Illuminates when the Traction Controly system is active. It will be lit for a minimum of four seconds or for the duration of the Traction Controly event. For more information, refer to the Driving chapter. Anti-lock brake system (ABS) To confirm the anti-lock brake system ABS (ABS) warning light is functional it will momentarily illuminate when the ignition is turned to the ON position (alternatively for some vehicles when the ignition is moved from the ON position to the START position, the light will momentarily illuminate just prior to reaching the START position). If the light remains on, continues to flash or fails to illuminate, have the ABS serviced immediately. If the ABS light remains on, it means the anti-lock brake system has malfunctioned and is disabled, however, the normal brake system will still function unless the brake warning light also remains 13
  • 14. illuminated and parking brake is off. Refer to Brakes in the Driving chapter for more information. Brake system warning To confirm the brake BRAKE system warning light is functional, it will ! P momentarily illuminate when the ignition is turned to the ON position (alternatively for some vehicles when the ignition is moved from the ON position to START position, the light will momentarily illuminate prior to reaching the START position). It also illuminates if the parking brake is engaged. If the brake system warning light does not illuminate as described, seek service immediately. Illumination after the parking brake is released indicates low brake fluid level or a brake system malfunction and the brake system should be serviced immediately by a qualified technician. Refer to Brakes in the Driving chapter for more information. Safety belt warning chime Sounds to remind you to fasten your safety belts. BeltMinderY chime Sounds intermittently to remind you to fasten your safety belts. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) warning chime Sounds when a malfunction in the supplemental restraint system (front or side airbags) has been detected. Have the supplemental restraint system inspected immediately. Key-in-ignition warning chime Sounds when the key is left in the ignition and the driver’s door is opened. Instrument Cluster 14
  • 15. Instrument Cluster Headlamps on warning chime Sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are on, the key is removed from the ignition and the driver’s door is opened. GAUGES Base instrument cluster gauges 40 30 50 60 60 70 80 100 120 80 90 140 160 180 100 110 120 4 5 3 2 RPMX1000 H L H 6 BRAKE ! P C E F 20 10 40 20 7 1 MPH km/h FUEL DOOR THEFT SELECT/RESET LOW FUEL 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 O/D OFF AIR BAG SERVICE ENGINE SOON ABS Optional instrument cluster gauges L H CHECK FUEL CAP 50 40 60 80 70 90 100120 140 80 100 160 110 120 180 200 220 240 4 5 6 3 2 RPMX1000 H H 7 BRAKE ! P 0 SELECT/RESET . 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 F 30 20 60 40 10 20 130 140 150 8 1 H MPH km/h FUEL DOOR THEFT LOW FUEL O/D OFF AIR BAG SERVICE ENGINE SOON ABS L L CHECK FUEL CAP Engine coolant temperature gauge Indicates the temperature of the C H engine coolant. At normal operating temperature, the needle remains within the normal area (the area between the “H” and “C”). If it enters the red section, the engine is overheating. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible, switch off the engine immediately and let the engine cool. Refer to Engine coolant in the Maintenance and specifications chapter. 15
  • 16. Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot. Steam and scalding liquid from a hot cooling system can burn you badly. This gauge indicates the temperature of the engine coolant, not the coolant level. If the coolant is not at its proper level the gauge indication will not be accurate. Engine oil pressure gauge Indicates engine oil pressure. At normal L H operating temperature, the needle will be in the normal range (the area between the “L” and “H”); if the needle goes below the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and switch off the engine immediately. Check the oil level. Add oil if needed (refer to Engine oil in the Maintenance and specifications chapter). If the oil level is correct, have your vehicle checked at your dealership or by a qualified technician. Battery voltage gauge Indicates battery voltage. If the pointer L H moves and stays outside the normal operating range, have the vehicle’s electrical system checked as soon as possible. Fuel gauge Displays approximately how much fuel is in the F fuel tank. The fuel gauge may vary slightly when the vehicle is in motion or on a grade. Instrument Cluster 16
  • 17. Instrument Cluster When refueling the vehicle from empty indication, the amount of fuel that can be added will be less than the advertised capacity due to the reserve fuel. The FUEL DOOR icon and arrow indicates which side of the vehicle the fuel filler door is located. Speedometer Indicates the current vehicle speed. ² Base instrument cluster gauge ² Optional instrument cluster gauge Odometer Registers the total kilometers (miles) of the vehicle. Tachometer Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute. Driving with your tachometer pointer at the top of the scale or in the red zone may damage the engine. 17
  • 18. ² Base instrument cluster gauge ² Optional instrument cluster gauge Trip odometer Registers the 4 kilometers (miles) of 3 5 RPMX1000 2 6 individual journeys. Press and release the 1 7 reset button until a ’T’ 0 8 SELECT/RESET appears in the display 0 0 0 0 0 0 . 0 (this represents the trip mode). Press and hold the button for three seconds to reset. Instrument Cluster 18
  • 19. Entertainment Systems PREMIUM AM/FM STEREO/CASSETTE/SINGLE CD DISC FM 1 AMC BL RF EJ TAPE CD DOLBY B NR ST SCAN BASS TREB SEL BAL VOL PUSH ON AM FM SEEK TUNE REW FF FADE SIDE 1-2 COMP SHUFFLE 1 2 3 4 5 6 Volume/power control Press the control to turn the audio system on or off. Audio power can also be turned on by pressing the AM/FM select control or the TAPE/CD select control. Turn control to raise or lower volume. EJ MUTE AUTO CLK VOL - PUSH ON VOL - PUSH ON If the volume is set above a certain level and the ignition is turned off, the volume will come back on at a “nominal” listening level when the ignition switch is turned back on. Bass adjust The bass adjust control allows you to increase BASS TREB or decrease the audio system’s bass output. 19
  • 20. Entertainment Systems Press the BASS control then press: ² to decrease the bass output and ² to increase the bass output. Treble adjust The treble adjust control allows you to increase or decrease the audio system’s treble output. Press the TREB control then press: ² to decrease the treble output and ² to increase the treble output. Speaker balance adjust Speaker sound distribution can be adjusted between the right and left speakers. Press the BAL control then press: ² to shift sound to the left and ² to shift sound to the right. Speaker fade adjust Speaker sound can be adjusted between the front and rear speakers. BASS TREB BAL FADE BAL FADE 20
  • 21. Entertainment Systems Press the FADE control then press: ² to shift the sound to the front and ² to shift the sound to the rear. Seek function The seek function control works in radio, tape or CD mode. Seek function in radio mode ² Press to find the next listenable station down the frequency band. ² Press to find the next listenable station up the frequency band. Seek function in tape mode ² Press to listen to the previous selection on the tape. ² Press to listen to the next selection on the tape. Seek function for CD or CD changer (if equipped) ² Press to seek to the previous track of the current disc. If a selection has been playing for three seconds or more and you press , the CD changer will replay that selection from the beginning. ² Press to seek forward to the next track of the current disc. After the last track has been completed, the first track of the current disc will automatically replay. 21
  • 22. Scan function The scan function SCAN works in radio, tape or CD mode. Scan function in radio mode Press the SCAN control to hear a brief sampling of all listenable stations on the frequency band. Press the control again to stop the scan mode. Scan function in tape mode Press the SCAN control to hear a short sampling of all selections on the tape. (The tape scans in a forward direction. At the end of the tape’s first side, direction automatically reverses to the opposite side of the tape.) To stop on a particular selection, press the control again. Scan function in CD or CD changer mode (if equipped) Press the SCAN control to hear a short sampling of all selections on the CD. (The CD scans in a forward direction, wrapping back to the first track at the end of the CD.) To stop on a particular selection, press the control again. AM/FM select The AM/FM select control works in radio, AM FM tape and CD modes. AM/FM select in radio mode This control allows you to select AM or FM frequency bands. Press the control to switch between AM, FM1 or FM2 memory preset stations. AM/FM select in tape mode Press this control to stop tape play and begin radio play. AM/FM select in CD or CD changer mode (if equipped) Press this control to stop CD play and begin radio play. Entertainment Systems 22
  • 23. Entertainment Systems Radio station memory preset The radio is equipped with six station memory preset controls. These controls can be used to select up to six preset AM stations and twelve FM stations (six in FM1 and six in FM2). Setting memory preset stations 1. Select the frequency band with the AM/FM AM FM select control. 2. Select a station. Refer to Tune adjust or Seek function for more information on selecting a station. 3. Press and hold a memory preset control until the sound returns, indicating the station is held in memory of the control you selected. Autoset memory preset Autoset allows you to set strong radio stations without losing your original manually set preset stations. This feature is helpful on trips when you travel between cities with different radio stations. Starting autoset memory preset 1. Select a frequency using the AM/FM select controls. 2. Press the control. 3. When the first six AUTO strong stations are filled, the station stored in memory preset CLK control 1 will start playing. If there are less than six strong stations available on the frequency band, the remaining memory preset controls will all store the last strong station available. 23
  • 24. These stations are temporarily stored in the memory preset controls (until deactivated) and are accessed in the same manner as your original presets. To deactivate autoset and return to your audio system’s manually set memory stations, press the AUTO control again. Setting the clock To set the hour, press and hold the CLK control and press SEEK: ² to decrease hours and ² to increase hours. To set the minute, press and hold the CLK control and press TUNE: ² to decrease minutes and ² to increase minutes. AUTO CLK AUTO CLK If your vehicle has a separate clock, (other than the digital radio display), the CLK control will not function in the above manner. The CLK control will allow you to switch AUTO between media display mode (radio station, stereo information, CLK etc.) and clock display mode (time). When in Entertainment Systems 24
  • 25. Entertainment Systems clock mode, the media information will display for 10 seconds, when the radio is turned on, and then revert to clock information. Any time that the media is changed, (new radio station, etc.), the media information will again display for 10 seconds before reverting back to the clock. In media mode, the media information will always be displayed. Tune adjust The tune control works in radio mode. Tune adjust in radio mode ² Press to move to the next frequency down the band (whether or not a listenable station is located there). Hold the control to move through the frequencies quickly. ² Press to move to the next frequency up the band (whether or not a listenable station is located there). Hold for quick movement. Tape/CD select ² To begin tape play TAPE CD (with a tape loaded into the audio system) while in the radio or CD mode, press the TAPE control. Press again during rewind or fast forward to stop the rewind or fast forward function. ² To begin CD play (if TAPE CD CD(s) are loaded), press the CD control. The first track of the disc will begin playing. If returning from radio or tape mode, CD play will begin where it stopped last. Press the CD control to toggle between single CD and CD changer (if equipped). 25
  • 26. Rewind The rewind control works in tape and CD modes. ² In tape mode, radio play will continue until rewind is stopped (with the TAPE control) or the beginning of the tape is reached. ² In CD mode, pressing the REW control rewinds the CD within the current track. Fast forward The fast forward control works in tape and CD modes. ² In the tape mode, tape direction will automatically reverse when the end of the tape is reached. ² In CD mode, pressing the FF control fast forwards the CD within the current track. Tape direction select Press to play the alternate side of the tape. Eject function Press the EJ control to stop and eject a tape. Press the EJ control to stop and eject a CD. REW 1 FF 2 SIDE 1-2 3 EJ EJ Entertainment Systems 26
  • 27. Entertainment Systems DolbyT noise reduction Dolbyt noise reduction operates in tape mode. 4 Dolbyt noise reduction reduces the amount of hiss and static during tape playback. Press the control to activate (and deactivate) the Dolbyt noise reduction. Dolbyt noise reduction is manufactured under license from Dolbyt Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “Dolbyt” and the double-D symbol are registered trademarks of Dolbyt Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Compression adjust Compression adjust COMP brings soft and loud 5 CD passages together for a more consistent listening level. Press the COMP control to activate and deactivate compression adjust. Shuffle feature The shuffle feature SHUFFLE operates in CD mode 6 and plays all tracks on the current disc in random order. If equipped with the CD changer, the shuffle feature continues to the next disc after all tracks on the current disc are played. Press to start this feature. Random order play will continue until the control is pressed again. 27
  • 28. Entertainment Systems Mute mode Press the MUTE control to mute the playing media. Press the MUTE control again to return to the playing media. MACHT MP3 MUSIC SYSTEM 1. ON/OFF and volume control 2. AM/FM control 3. Bass control 4. Treble control 5. Fade control 6. Balance control 7. Seek control 8. Scan control 9. Clock control 10. Tune/Directory control EJ MUTE 11. CD control 12. MP3 directory control 13. Eject control 14. CD rewind control 15. CD fast forward control 16. Shuffle control 17. Compression control 18. Track control 19. Repeat control 28
  • 29. Entertainment Systems Volume/power control Press the control to turn the audio system on or off. Turn the control to raise or lower the volume. If the volume is set above a certain level and the ignition is turned off, the volume will come back on at a “nominal” listening level when the ignition switch is turned back on. AM/FM select The AM/FM select control works in radio mode. AM/FM select in radio mode This control allows you to select AM or FM frequency bands. Press the control to switch between AM, FM1 or FM2 memory preset stations. Bass adjust The bass adjust control allows you to increase or decrease the audio system’s bass output. Treble adjust The treble adjust control allows you to increase or decrease the audio system’s treble output. 29
  • 30. Entertainment Systems Speaker fade adjust Speaker sound can be adjusted between the front and rear speakers. Speaker balance adjust Speaker sound distribution can be adjusted between the right and left speakers. MP3 functions Your audio system is equipped with MP3 capability which allows you to listen to songs in MP3 flat file mode and MP3 directory mode. To engage MP3 flat file mode, insert an MP3 disc. If an MP3 disc is already present in the player, press the CD control. The MP3 icon will display while the player is in MP3 mode. While in MP3 flat file mode, press the MP3 DIR control to enter into MP3 directory mode. The MP3 icon and the DIR icon will display while the player is in directory mode. Your MACHt MP3 player is also equipped with an anti-shock buffer for MP3 discs. MP3 file directory structure The MACHt MP3 music system recognizes MP3 disc file and directory (folder) structure as follows: ² There are two different modes for MP3 disc playback: MP3 flat file mode (default) and MP3 directory mode. ² MP3 flat file mode ignores any directory structure present on the MP3 disc. The player sequentially 30
  • 31. Entertainment Systems numbers each MP3 track on the disc (denoted by the .mp3 file extension) from T001 to T255. ² MP3 directory mode represents a directory structure consisting of one level of directories (folders). The CD player sequentially numbers all MP3 tracks on the disc (denoted by .mp3 extension) and all directories containing MP3 files, from 01–01 to 99–99. The first two digits denote the directory number and the last two digits denote the track number within that directory. ² Creating discs with only one level of subdirectories will help with navigation through the disc files. Seek function The seek function control works in radio, CD, MP3 flat file mode and MP3 directory modes. Seek function in radio mode ² Press to find the next listenable station down the frequency band. ² Press to find the next listenable station up the frequency band. Seek function in CD, MP3 flat file and MP3 directory modes ² Press to select and play the previous track on the disc. If the current track is the first track on the disc, pressing will select the last track on the disc. ² Press to select and play the next track on the disc. If the current track is the last track on the disc, pressing will select the first track on the disc. 31
  • 32. Entertainment Systems Press and hold the SEEK control to quickly seek through all tracks in MP3 flat file mode or all tracks in the current MP3 directory. Note: If a track has been playing for three seconds or more and you press on the SEEK control, the player will replay that track from the beginning. Scan function The scan function works in radio, CD, MP3 flat file and MP3 directory modes. Scan function in radio mode Press SCN to engage scan mode and to hear a brief sampling of all listenable stations on the frequency band. When the top of the band is reached, the tuner will continue to scan from the lowest frequency upward. Press SCN again to disengage scan mode. Scan function in CD mode Press SCN to engage scan mode and to hear a brief sampling of all tracks on the disc. The track number in the display will blink while the scan function is enabled. When the end of the disc is reached, the player will continue to scan from the first track forward. Press SCN again to disengage scan mode. Scan function in MP3 flat file mode The scan function in MP3 flat file mode allows you to briefly audition all tracks on the MP3 disc. Press SCN to engage scan mode and to hear a brief sampling of all tracks on the MP3 disc. The track number in the display will blink while the 32
  • 33. Entertainment Systems scan function is enabled. When the end of the disc is reached, the player will continue to scan from the first track forward. Press SCN again to disengage scan mode. Scan function in MP3 directory mode The scan function in MP3 directory mode allows you to briefly audition all tracks within the current directory on the MP3 disc. Press SCN to engage scan mode and to hear a brief sampling of all tracks in the current directory. The track number in the display will blink while the scan function is enabled. When the last track is reached, the player will continue to scan from the first track in the current directory forward. Press SCN again to disengage scan mode. To scan tracks in another directory, press or on the TUNE DIR control to select the desired directory. The scan function will be disabled when you change directories. Press the SCN control again to enable the scan function for the selected directory. Radio station memory preset The radio is equipped with six station memory preset controls. These controls can be used to select up to six preset AM stations and twelve FM stations (six in FM1 and six in FM2). 33
  • 34. Entertainment Systems Setting memory preset stations 1. Select the frequency band with the AM/FM select control. 2. Select a station. Refer to Tune adjust or Seek function for more information on selecting a station. 3. Press and hold a memory preset control until the sound returns, indicating the station is held in memory on the control you selected. Accessing memory preset stations 1. Select the desired frequency band with the AM/FM select control. 2. Press the preset control which contains the desired station frequency. The desired station will begin to play. Setting the clock To set the hour, press and hold the CLK control while performing the following functions: 34
  • 35. Entertainment Systems ² Press on the SEEK control to decrease the hours. ² Press on the SEEK control to increase the hours. To set the minutes, press and hold the CLK control while performing the following functions: ² Press on the TUNE DIR control to decrease the minutes. ² Press on the TUNE DIR control to increase the minutes. Release the CLK control to save the clock settings. Press the CLK control again to return the display to radio mode. Tune adjust The tune adjust control works in radio mode. Tune adjust in radio mode ² Press to move to the next frequency down the band. Hold for quick movement through the frequencies. ² Press to move to the next frequency up the band. Hold for quick movement through the frequencies. When the top of the band is reached, the tuner will continue to select from the lowest frequency upward. When a radio frequency is in tune, the ST icon will appear in the display for stereo broadcasts. CD select The CD select function allows you to play CDs. 35
  • 36. Entertainment Systems Playing a CD ² If a CD is already loaded, press the CD control. CD play will begin where it stopped last. ² If a CD is not already loaded, insert the CD into the system. CD will briefly appear in the display and then the first track on the disc will begin playing. Playing an MP3 disc in MP3 flat file mode and MP3 directory mode ² Insert an MP3 disc into the player. CD and LOAD will appear in the display. Initialization may take up to two minutes for discs containing complex file directories. ² The display will briefly show the total number of tracks on the disc as TXXX (XXX= number of tracks). ² If an MP3 disc is already present in the player, press the CD control to begin play. ² Press the MP3 DIR control to engage MP3 directory mode, if desired. The track number format on the display will change from TXXX (XXX=current track number) to XX-XX (directory —track number). Note: If the car’s ignition is turned off and on again, play will begin at the beginning of the last song played. If the radio was powered off by the VOL control, play will start where it last left off. ² To stop MP3 disc play, eject the disc or press the AM/FM control. The player will return to radio mode. 36
  • 37. Entertainment Systems Selecting a directory in MP3 directory mode The TUNE DIR control allows you to select a different directory to play on the MP3 disc. ² Press on the TUNE DIR control to advance to the next directory on the MP3 disc. If the current directory is the last directory on the disc, pressing will select the first directory on the disc. Press and hold for fast selection. ² Press on TUNE DIR to revert to the previous directory on the MP3 disc. If the current directory is the first directory on the disc, pressing will select the last directory on the disc. Press and hold for fast selection. Eject function Press the control to stop and eject a disc. If a disc is ejected and not removed from the player, the player will automatically reload the disc and return to radio mode. This feature will operate when the ignition is on or off. Rewind The rewind control works in CD mode. It is not enabled in MP3 flat file mode or MP3 directory mode. Press and hold the rewind control until the desired selection point is reached. The display will show the elapsed time for each track as you reverse through it. When the beginning of the disc is reached, the first track on the disc will begin to play. Release the rewind control again to disengage rewind mode. 37
  • 38. Entertainment Systems Fast forward The fast forward control works in CD mode. It is not enabled in MP3 flat file mode or MP3 directory mode. Press and hold the control until the desired selection point is reached. The display will show the elapsed time for each track as you fast-forward through it. When the end of the disc is reached, the player will continue fast-forwarding from the first track forward. Release the control to disengage fast-forwarding. Shuffle feature The shuffle feature works in CD mode, MP3 flat file mode and MP3 directory mode. Shuffle feature in CD mode The shuffle feature plays all tracks on the current disc in random order. ² Press the SHUFFLE control to engage random play. SHF and then ON will briefly appear in the display. The player will then begin random play. ² To select another random track on the disc, press or on the SEEK control. ² Press the SCN control to scan through random tracks. The track number will flash in the display. The shuffle feature will remain enabled. Press the SHUFFLE control again to disable the shuffle function. SHF and then OFF will briefly appear in the display. 38
  • 39. Entertainment Systems Shuffle feature in MP3 flat file mode The shuffle feature in MP3 flat file mode allows you to play all the tracks on the MP3 disc in random order. ² Press the SHUFFLE control to engage random play. SHF and then ON will briefly appear in the display. The player will then begin random play. ² To select another random track on the disc, press or on the SEEK control. ² Press SCN to scan through random tracks. The track number will flash in the display. The shuffle function will remain enabled. ² Press SHUFFLE again to disengage the shuffle feature. SHF and then OFF will briefly display and the current track will continue to play. Shuffle feature in MP3 directory mode The shuffle feature in MP3 directory mode allows you to play all the tracks in the current directory in random order. ² Press the SHUFFLE control to engage random play in the current directory. SHF and then ON will briefly appear in the display. The player will then begin random play. 39
  • 40. Entertainment Systems ² To select another random track in the current directory, press or on the SEEK control. ² Press the SCN control to scan through random tracks in the current directory. The track number will flash in the display. The shuffle feature will remain enabled. To shuffle tracks in another directory, press or on the TUNE DIR control to select the desired directory. The shuffle function still remains enabled. Press the SHUFFLE control again to disengage the SHUFFLE feature. SHUF and OFF will briefly display and the current track will continue to play. Compression feature The compression feature works in CD, MP3 flat file mode and MP3 directory mode. Compression adjust brings soft and loud CD passages together for a more consistent listening level. Press the COMP control to activate compression adjust. The compression icon (c) will illuminate in the display while the compression function is enabled. Press the COMP control again to disengage the feature. MACHT Track function The MACHt track function allows you to quickly search through a large number of tracks or directories on the MP3 disc. The function works in MP3 flat file mode and MP3 directory mode. 40
  • 41. Entertainment Systems Track function in MP3 flat file mode and MP3 directory mode ² Press the TRACK control. TRAC will appear in the display. ² Rotate the volume control to advance or reverse through the tracks. The MP3 icon will blink in the display while the MACHt track function is enabled. When the desired track is reached, the selected track will begin play after a two second delay. To disengage the MACHt track function, press the TRACK control again. Repeat track function This function works in MP3 flat file mode or MP3 directory mode and allows you repeat the current track on the MP3 disc. Repeat track function in MP3 flat file mode and MP3 directory mode. Press the REPEAT control to repeat the current track. The repeat icon will display and the current track will continue to repeat until the repeat function is disengaged. Press the REPEAT control again to disengage the feature. 41
  • 42. Entertainment Systems Error messages You may experience an error message for the following situations: ² NO DISC when the CD control is pressed and there is not a CD present. ² DISC ERR when there is a damaged or unreadable disc. Such as, data discs containing no .mp3 files, or for data discs containing more than 255 files or directories. ² CD ERR for any other disc malfunction. Saving and naming MP3 files ² Your MACHt MP3 music system supports discs containing up to 255 files in 255 directories. Discs containing more than 255 files will not play. ² Always save MP3 files with the .mp3 extension. The player recognizes an MP3 file by the .mp3 extension, so MP3 files saved with different extensions will not be played. Never save a non-MP3 file with the .mp3 extension as the file will not play properly and damage may occur to the player or your sound system. ² The player supports multi session discs. However, be sure to import the previous session of the disc before you add new files. If you do not import the previous session, only the last session will be played. ² When burning a disc, ensure that you close/finalize the disc before playback, or the disc may not play properly or an error message may appear. ² The player supports DAM (Digital Automatic Music) discs. 42
  • 43. Entertainment Systems MACHT 460 SOUND SYSTEM RADIO (CD CHANGER COMPATIBLE) DISC SEEK REW FF TUNE SHUF DSP MUTE SCAN LOAD EJ BASS BAL TREB FADE PUSH ON AM CD 1 2 3 4 5 6 MENU FM MACHT 1000 SOUND SYSTEM RADIO (CD CHANGER COMPATIBLE) SEL MACH 1000T AUDIO SYSTEM Your vehicle may be equipped with the MACH 1000t audio system. This system is equipped with a rack of amplifiers in the trunk of the vehicle. Do not store or rest items on the amplifier rack, as this could cause damage to the amplifiers and void your warranty. The MACH 1000t audio system is capable of producing very high sound pressure levels. For your 43
  • 44. Entertainment Systems listening comfort and protection, it is not recommended to listen to the MACH 1000t audio system at high volume levels for extended periods of time. Volume/power control Press the control to turn the audio system on or off. Turn the control to raise or lower volume. If the volume is set above a certain level and the ignition is turned off, the volume will come back on at a “nominal” listening level when the ignition switch is turned back on. Speed sensitive volume With this feature, radio volume changes automatically and slightly with vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise. The recommended level for speed sensitive volume is from level 1 through level 3. Level 0 turns the speed sensitive volume off and level 7 is the maximum setting. To engage the speed sensitive volume feature, press and hold the volume control for five seconds (with the radio on), then press: ² to increase volume compensation. ² to decrease or shut off the volume compensation. PUSH ON PUSH ON SEL The selected level will appear in the display. 44
  • 45. Entertainment Systems Bass adjust The bass adjust control BASS allows you to increase + SEL or decrease the audio TREB system’s bass output. Press the BASS control. Use the SEL control to increase or decrease the amount of bass. Treble adjust The treble adjust BASS control allows you to + SEL increase or decrease TREB the audio system’s treble output. Press the TREB control. Use the SEL control to increase or decrease the amount of treble. Speaker balance adjust Speaker sound BAL distribution can be + SEL adjusted between the FADE right and left speakers. Press the BAL control. Use the SEL control to adjust the sound between the left and right speakers. Speaker fade adjust Speaker sound can be BAL adjusted between the + SEL front and rear FADE speakers. Press the FADE control. Use the SEL control to adjust the sound between the front and rear speakers. MACH mode (if equipped) MACH mode is available with the MACH 1000 Sound System. This mode allows you to toggle between occupancy modes (DRIVER SEAT, ALL SEATS) and MACH 1000 mode. MACH 1000 mode engages the extra speakers and amplifiers that are included in this package. 45
  • 46. Entertainment Systems Press the MACH control to toggle between occupancy modes. Seek function The seek function works in radio or CD mode. Seek function in radio mode ² Press to find the next listenable station down the frequency band. SEEK DOWN will display. ² Press to find the next listenable station up the frequency band. SEEK UP will display. Seek function in CD mode ² Press to seek to the previous track of the current disc. If the beginning of the disc is reached, the CD player seeks to the beginning of the last track on the current disc and begins playing. ² Press to seek forward to the next track of the current disc. After the last track has been completed, the first track of the current disc will automatically replay. Scan function The scan function works in radio or CD mode. Scan function in radio mode Press the SCAN control to hear a brief sampling of all listenable stations on the frequency band. Press the SCAN control again to stop the scan mode. Scan function in CD mode Press the SCAN control to hear a short sampling of all selections on the CD. (The CD scans in a forward direction, wrapping back to the first track at the end of the CD.) To stop on a particular selection, press the control again. 46
  • 47. Entertainment Systems AM/FM select The AM/FM select AM control works in radio FM CD and CD modes. AM/FM select in radio mode This control allows you to select AM or FM frequency bands. Press the control to switch between AM, FM1 or FM2 memory preset stations. AM/FM select in CD mode Press this control to stop CD play and begin radio play. Radio station memory preset The radio is equipped with six station memory preset controls. These controls can be used to select up to six preset AM stations and twelve FM stations (six in FM1 and six in FM2). Setting memory preset stations 1. Select the frequency band with the AM/FM select control. Press the AM/FM control to toggle between AM, FM1, or FM2. 2. Press the SEEK control to access the next listenable station up or down the frequency band. Press the TUNE control to go up or down the listening band in individual increments. 3. Select a station. Refer to Seek function for more information on selecting a station. 4. Press and hold a memory preset control. The playing media will mute momentarily. When the sound returns, the station is held in memory on the control you selected. The display will read SAVED. Autostore Autostore allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without losing your original manually set 47
  • 48. Entertainment Systems preset stations. This feature is helpful on trips when you travel between cities with different radio stations. Starting autostore 1. Press and momentarily hold the AM/FM control. 2. AUTOSET will flash in the display as the frequency band is scrolled through. 3. When the six strongest stations are filled, the station stored in memory preset control 1 will start playing. If there are fewer than six strong stations available on the frequency band, the remaining memory preset controls will all store the last strong station available. To deactivate autoset and return to your audio system’s manually set memory stations, press the AM/FM control again. Setting the clock Press the MENU control until SELECT HOUR or SELECT MINUTE is displayed. (The menu mode must be engaged to enable clock mode). Use the SEL control to manually set the time. ² Press to increase hours/minutes. AM CD FM SEL ² Press to decrease hours/minutes. Press the MENU control again to disengage the clock mode. Tune/disc adjust The tune control works in radio or CD mode. 48
  • 49. Entertainment Systems Tune adjust in radio mode ² Press to move to DISC TUNE the next frequency down the band (whether or not a listenable station is located there). Hold the control to move through the frequencies quickly. ² Press to move to the next frequency up the band (whether or not a listenable station is located there). Hold for quick movement. Disc adjust for CD mode ² Press to select DISC TUNE the previous disc. (Play will begin on the first track of the disc unless shuffle mode is engaged.) Refer to Shuffle feature for more information. Hold the control to continue reversing through the discs. ² Press to select the next disc. Hold the control to fast-forward through the remaining discs. CD select CD mode may be AM entered by pressing the FM CD CD control and the LOAD control. Load the CD into the audio system. The first track of the disc will begin playing. After that, CD play will begin where it stopped last. If an alternative CD is desired, press the corresponding preset control (1–6) of a loaded CD, or press the TUNE control to access the other loaded CDs. NO CD will display if the CD control is activated when there is not a CD present in the audio system. NO CD will illuminate in the display if the CD control and a present number (that is currently empty) are pressed. The system will play the next available disc. 49
  • 50. If your vehicle is equipped with a CD changer, pressing the CD control again will allow you to toggle between accessing the multi disc system and the CD changer. The display will read CD or CDDJ. Display description Six circles are always lit in the digital display. These signify the six CD slots in the audio system. When a disc is loaded into a particular slot (1–6), the number inside that specific circle lights. If the circle is empty, there is no CD in that particular slot. Rewind The rewind control REW FF works in CD modes. Press and hold the REW control until the desired selection is reached. If the beginning of the disc is reached, the CD will begin play at the first track. Release the control to disengage rewind mode. When in rewind mode, your audio system will automatically lower the volume level of the playing media. Fast forward The fast forward REW FF control works in CD modes. Press and hold the FF control until the desired selection is reached. If the end of the disc is reached, the CD will return to the first track. Release the control to disengage fast forward mode. When in fast forward mode, your audio system will automatically lower the volume level of the playing media. Entertainment Systems 50
  • 51. Entertainment Systems Load The load feature allows LOAD you to load single CDs into the player internal to the radio. This six disc CD player is equipped with a CD door. Compact discs should only be inserted into the player after the CD door has been opened by the player. Do not attempt to force the door open. Compact discs should only be loaded by pressing the LOAD control. Press the LOAD control. (You can choose which slot will be loaded by pressing the desired preset number. If you do not choose a slot, the system will choose the next available one.) Wait until the CD door opens. Load the CD into the player. LOADING CD# is displayed. When the CD has been loaded, the door will close and the CD will begin to play. For example, to load a CD into slot 2, press the LOAD control and then press preset 2. Auto load This feature allows you LOAD to autoload up to 6 discs into the multi disc CD player internal to the radio. Press and hold the LOAD control until AUTOLOAD # is displayed. The CD door will open. Load the desired discs, one at a time. The CD is loaded into position and the audio system will display CD#. Each time the CD door opens, INSERT CD# is displayed. The door will close and the player will move to the next slot after each disc has been loaded. The process is repeated until all 6 slots are full. The audio system plays the last CD loaded and the display is updated. If some slots are already full and autoload is activated, the system will fill all empty slots. 51
  • 52. Eject Press the EJ control to EJ stop and eject a CD. You can choose which CD will be ejected by pressing the EJ control and the desired preset number (1–6). For example, to eject CD 2, press the EJ control and then press the preset 2 control. If you do not choose a specific CD, the player will eject the current CD. If a CD is ejected and not removed from the door of the CD player, the player will automatically reload the CD. This feature may be used when the ignition is ON or OFF. Auto eject Press and momentarily EJ hold the EJ control to engage auto eject. All CDs which are present in the player will be ejected one at a time. If a CD is ejected and not removed from the door of the CD player, the player will automatically reload the CD. This feature may be used when the ignition is ON or OFF. Shuffle feature Press the SHUF control until the desired shuffle mode is displayed. The audio system will then engage the desired shuffle mode. When engaged, the shuffle feature has two different modes: SHUFFLE DISC and SHUFFLE TRK. SHUFFLE DISC randomly plays tracks from all the discs presently in the audio system. SHUFFLE TRK plays all the tracks on the current disc in random order. Entertainment Systems 52
  • 53. Entertainment Systems Compression feature (if equipped) The compression feature operates in CD mode and brings soft and loud CD passages together for a more consistent listening level. On Audiophile audios, press the MENU control until compression status is displayed. Press the SEL control to enable the compression feature when COMP OFF is displayed. Press the SEL control again to disable the feature when COMP ON is displayed. On Premium audios, press the COMP control until COMP ON is displayed. Menu mode The MENU control allows you to access many different features within your audio system. There are three sets of menus available depending upon which mode or feature is activated. While in FM mode, two menus are available. If RDS is turned OFF, you can access the following: ² SELECT HOURS — Refer to Setting the clock. ² SELECT MINUTES — Refer to Setting the clock. ² RDS OFF — Refer to Radio data system feature. If RDS is turned ON, you can access the following: ² TRAFFIC ON/OFF-Refer to Traffic announcements. MENU + SEL ² FIND type-Refer to Program type. ² SHOW (NAME, TYPE, NONE)- Refer to Radio data system feature. ² RDS ON— Refer to Radio data system feature. 53
  • 54. Entertainment Systems ² SELECT HOURS — Refer to Setting the clock. ² SELECT MINUTES —Refer to Setting the clock. When in CD mode, you can access: SELECT HOURS, SELECT MINUTES or COMP ON/OFF. SELECT HOURS, SELECT MINUTES— Allows you to adjust the hours and minutes. Refer to Setting the clock. TRAFFIC ON/OFF— Traffic announcements can be programmed as local or distant. Refer to Traffic announcements. RDS ON/OFF— This feature allows your audio system to receive text information from RDS-equipped FM radio stations. Refer to Radio Data System feature. FIND type — Allows you to select your desired FM program type and search for that selection. SHOW — Allows you to select from NAME (displays the name of the radio station), TYPE (displays the RDS program type: rock, jazz, etc.), or NONE (deactivates the RDS display). Radio data system (RDS) feature This feature allows your audio system to receive text information from RDS-equipped FM radio stations. To activate RDS: ² When in FM mode, press the MENU control until RDS OFF displays. ² Press the SEL control to engage this feature (RDS ON). MENU + SEL 54
  • 55. Entertainment Systems RDS features: Once the RDS feature is on, press the MENU control to scroll through the following selections: Traffic announcements This feature allows you to hear traffic announcements while in CD mode. These announcements are broadcast by traffic capable RDS stations. When in this mode, traffic announcements will interrupt radio and CD play. ² Press the MENU control until TRAFFIC is displayed. ² Press the SEL control to engage the feature. The display will read TRAFFIC ON. This feature also allows you to control the volume of traffic announcements. With the display reading TRAFFIC ON, adjust the volume using the volume control to the desired level. The volume level will show at the bottom of the display. Interrupting traffic announcements will be at the selected volume level. To disengage the feature, press the MENU control until TRAFFIC ON displays. Press the SEL control. The display will read TRAFFIC OFF. Traffic announcements are not available in most U.S. markets. Program type This feature allows you to search for RDS stations selectively by their program type. Press the MENU control until FIND MENU + SEL program type is displayed. 55
  • 56. Entertainment Systems Use the SEL control to select the program type. With the feature on, use the SEEK or SCAN control to find the desired program type from the following selections: ² Classic ² Country ² Info ² Jazz ² Oldies ² R & B ² Religious ² Rock ² Soft ² Top 40 Show This feature allows you to select the type of MENU + SEL RDS broadcast information the radio will regularly show in the display. With RDS activated, press the MENU MENU + SEL control until SHOW is displayed. Use the SEL control to select TYPE (displays the RDS program type: rock, jazz, etc), NAME (displays the name of the radio station) or NONE (deactivates the RDS display). Digital signal processing The digital signal processing (DSP) feature allows you to change the signal mode to suit your listening tastes. Press the DSP control to access the DSP DSP + SEL menu. 56
  • 57. Entertainment Systems Use the SEL control to select the desired signal mode (the selected mode will appear in the display). The following can be selected: ² DSP OFF—disengages the feature ² STADIUM—outdoor SEL stadium with a capacity of about 30 000 ² CHURCH—church with a high vault ² HALL—rectangular concert hall capacity of about 2 000 ² JAZZ CLUB—jazz club with clearly reflected sounds ² NEWS—”voice-only” type of sound with a limited audio band Press the DSP control again to access the occupancy modes. Use the SEL control to optimize the sound based upon the occupants in the vehicle. The following occupancy modes can be selected for the MACH 460 Sound System: ² ALL SEATS ² DRIVER SEAT ² REAR SEATS The following occupancy modes can be selected for the MACH 1000 Sound System: ² ALL SEATS ² DRIVER SEAT ² MACH 1000 MACH 1000 mode raises the bass response of the trunk mounted subwoofers. Mute mode Press the control to mute the playing media. Press the control again to return to the playing media. 57
  • 58. Entertainment Systems CD CARE CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 12cm audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players. Irregular shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted into the CD player. The label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be identified with permanent marker rather than adhesive labels. Please contact your dealer for further information. TROUBLESHOOTING THE CD PLAYER (IF EQUIPPED) The laser beam used in the compact disc player is harmful to the eyes. Do not attempt to disassemble the case. If sound skips: ² You may be traveling on a rough road, playing badly scratched discs or the disc may be dirty. Skipping will not scratch the discs or damage the player. If your changer does not work, it may be that: ² A disc is already loaded where you want to insert a disc. ² The disc is inserted with the label surface downward. ² The disc is dusty or defective. ² The player’s internal temperature is above 60°C (140°F). Allow the player to cool down before operating. ² A disc with format and dimensions not within industry standards is inserted. 58
  • 59. Entertainment Systems MP3 DISC QUALITY FACTORS The MACHt MP3 music system is designed for use with CD-DA (regular audio discs), CD-R and CD-RW discs. Discs must comply with ISO 9660 and Joliet standards. Several factors can effect disc playback quality: ² Disc capacity — Each disc contains about 650 MB of storage capacity. We do not recommend using high capacity discs containing 700MB of storage. ² Disc type — Some CD-RW discs may operate inconsistently and may cause an error message to appear. We recommend burning MP3 files onto CD-R discs. ² Disc finalization — The disc may be left open for the purpose of adding sessions to it at a later time, but be sure to close each session or the disc will not play. ² Bit rate — The player supports bit rates from 56–320 kbps, as well as variable bit rate MP3 files, but lower bit rates will have a noticeable effect on sound quality and are recommended only for speech or low fidelity music material. We recommend that you encode MP3 files using a high quality encoder. ² PC configuration — Encoding MP3 files requires intensive use of your computer’s resources. Follow the PC configuration recommendations of the encoder software vendor. We recommend that you avoid running other software applications on your PC during MP3 encoding to avoid undesirable noise and distortion. CLEANING COMPACT DISCS Inspect all discs for contamination before playing. If necessary, clean discs only with an approved CD cleaner and wipe from the center out to the edge. Do not use circular motion. 59
  • 60. Entertainment Systems CD, MP3 AND CD PLAYER CARE ² Handle discs by their edges only. Never touch the playing surface. ² Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods of time. ² Do not insert more than one disc into the slot of the CD player (if equipped). ² Always store discs out of direct sunlight. Excessive heat may damage or warp discs. ² Use care when handling and playing CD-R and CD-RW discs, which are more susceptible to damage from heat, light and stress than are regular CDs. ² Always insert and remove a disc by holding the disc flat, with the playing surface facing down, in order to prevent damage to the disc or the player. ² Never insert any object other than a compact disc into the player, as doing so may damage the player and may cause injury to you. ² Do not disassemble the player. The laser used in disc playback is extremely harmful to the eyes. CLEANING CASSETTE PLAYER (IF EQUIPPED) Clean the tape player head with a cassette cleaning cartridge after 10 to 12 hours of play in order to maintain the best sound and operation. 60
  • 61. Entertainment Systems CASSETTE AND CASSETTE PLAYER CARE ² Use only cassettes that are 90 minutes long or less. ² Do not expose tapes to direct sunlight, high humidity, extreme heat or extreme cold. Allow tapes that may have been exposed to extreme temperatures to reach a moderate temperature before playing. ² Tighten very loose tapes by inserting a finger or pencil into the hole and turning the hub. ² Remove loose labels before inserting tapes. ² Do not leave tapes in the cassette player for a long time when not being played. RADIO FREQUENCY INFORMATION The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications Commission(CRTC) establish the frequencies AM and FM stations may use for their broadcasts. Allowable frequencies are: AM 530, 540–1600, 1610 kHz FM 87.7, 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz Not all frequencies are used in a given area. 61
  • 62. Entertainment Systems RADIO RECEPTION FACTORS Three factors can affect radio reception: ² Distance/strength. The further an FM signal travels, the weaker it is. The listenable range of the average FM station is approximately 40 km (24 miles). This range can be affected by “signal modulation.” Signal modulation is a process radio stations use to increase their strength/volume relative to other stations. ² Terrain. Hills, mountains and tall buildings between your vehicle’s antenna and the radio station signal can cause FM reception problems. Static can be caused on AM stations by power lines, electric fences, traffic lights and thunderstorms. Moving away from an interfering structure (out of its “shadow”) returns your reception to normal. ² Station overload. Weak signals are sometimes captured by stronger signals when you pass a broadcast tower. A stronger signal may temporarily overtake a weaker signal and play while the weak station frequency is displayed. The audio system automatically switches to single channel reception if it will improve the reception of a station normally received in stereo. AUDIO SYSTEM WARRANTIES AND SERVICE Refer to the Warranty Guide for audio system warranty information. If service is necessary, see your dealer or a qualified technician. 62
  • 63. Climate Controls MANUAL HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM Fan speed control Controls the volume of air circulated in the vehicle. Temperature control knob Controls the temperature of the airflow inside the vehicle. Mode selector control Controls the direction of the airflow to the inside of the vehicle. A/C MAX A/C A/C MAX A/C ² MAX A/C – Distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel registers. The A/C compressor will only function if the outside temperature is above approximately 6°C (43°F). MAX A/C is noisier than A/C, but more economical and efficient. This mode may prevent undesirable odors from entering the vehicle. ² A/C – Distributes outside air through the instrument panel registers. The A/C compressor will only function if the outside temperature is above approximately 6°C (43°F) . 63
  • 64. Climate Controls ² (Panel) – Distributes outside air through the instrument panel registers. The air can not be cooled below the outside temperature. ² O (Off) – Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate. This mode may reduce undesirable odors from entering the vehicle but may increase the possibility of interior window fogging. ² (Floor) – Distributes outside air through the floor ducts. The air cannot be cooled below the outside temperature. ² (Floor and defrost) – Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster ducts and the floor duct and the side window demisters. The A/C compressor will operate automatically if the outside temperature is above approximately 6°C (43°F) . The air distributed through the floor ducts will be slightly warmer than the air sent to the windshield defrost ducts and the side window demisters. ² (Defrost) – Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster ducts and the side window demisters. The A/C compressor will operate automatically if the outside temperature is above approximately 6°C (43°F). This mode will clear ice and fog from the windshield. Since the air conditioner removes moisture from the air, it is considered normal operation if water drips on the ground under the air conditioner drain. 64
  • 65. Climate Controls Operating tips ² To reduce fogging in humid weather, place the climate control system in Defrost and Rear Defrost mode (if equipped) before driving. ² To reduce humidity buildup inside the vehicle under warm weather conditions, do not drive with the climate control system in the Off mode. ² To reduce humidity buildup inside the vehicle under cold weather conditions, do not drive with he climate control system in Max A/C (if equipped), recirculation mode (if equipped) or Off mode. ² Under normal weather conditions, do not leave your vehicle in the Max A/C (if equipped), recirculation mode (if equipped) or Off mode when turning off the vehicle. ² Under snowy or dirty weather conditions, leave your vehicle in the Max A/C (if equipped), recirculation mode (if equipped) or Off mode when turning off the ignition. ² Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the exterior base of the windshield. ² To increase the efficiency of the A/C (if equipped), drive with the windows slightly open for two to three minutes. or until the vehicle has been “aired out”. ² Do not place objects under the front seat or over the defroster ducts. They may reduce visibility, fall into the ducts, or degrade the performance of your climate control system. Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel, as these objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop. 65
  • 66. Climate Controls REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER (IF EQUIPPED) The rear defroster control is located on the instrument panel. Press the rear defroster control to clear the rear window of thin ice and fog. ² A small LED will illuminate when the rear defroster is activated. The ignition must be in the ON position to operate the rear window defroster. The defroster turns off automatically after 10 minutes or when the ignition is turned to the OFF position. To manually turn off the defroster before 10 minutes have passed, push the control again. 66
  • 67. HEADLAMP CONTROL ² Pull the headlamp control toward you to the first position to turn on the parking lamps, tail lamps, license plate lamps and marker lamps. Lights ² Pull the headlamp control toward you to the outer position to turn on the headlamps (in addition to the previous lamps). Foglamp control (if equipped) The foglamps can be turned on when the headlamp control is in either of the following positions: ² Parking lamps ² Low beams Press the foglamp control to activate the foglamps. Press the foglamp control again to deactivate the foglamps. When the highbeams are activated, the foglamps will not operate. Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped) Turns the headlamps on with a reduced output. To activate: ² the ignition must be turned on ² the headlamp control is in the OFF or Parking lamps position ² the high beam headlamps must be turned off ² the parking brake is released 67
  • 68. Lights Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk or during inclement weather. The Daytime Running Light (DRL) System does not activate your tail lamps and generally may not provide adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate your headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision. High beams Push the lever toward the instrument panel to activate. Pull the lever towards you to deactivate. Flash to pass Pull toward you slightly to activate and release to deactivate. PANEL DIMMER CONTROL To adjust the brightness of the instrument panel: ² Rotate clockwise/ ounterclockwise when the headlamp control is in the parking lamp or low-beam position. HI LO OFF HI LO OFF To turn on the courtesy lamps: ² Rotate fully counterclockwise. AIMING THE HEADLAMPS The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant. 68
  • 69. Lights If your vehicle has been in an accident the alignment of your headlamps should be checked by a qualified service technician. Headlamp vertical aim adjustment 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface approximately 7.6 meters (25 feet) from a vertical wall or screen directly in front of it. ² (1) Eight feet ² (2) Center height of lamp to ground ² (3) Twenty five feet ² (4) Horizontal reference line 2. Measure the height from the center of your headlamp to the ground and mark a 2.4 meter (8 foot) horizontal reference line on the vertical wall or screen at this height (a piece of masking tape works well). The center of the lamp is marked by a 3.0 mm circle on the headlamp lens. 3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and open the hood. 69
  • 70. 4. On the wall or screen you will observe a light pattern with flat edges at the top of the beam pattern. If the flat edges are not at the horizontal reference line, the beam will need to be adjusted. 5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each headlamp, then use a 6 mm allen wrench or screwdriver to adjust the headlamp up or down. 6. HORIZONTAL AIM IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THIS VEHICLE AND IS NON-ADJUSTABLE. 7. Close the hood and turn off the lamps. TURN SIGNAL CONTROL ² Push down to activate the left turn signal. ² Push up to activate the right turn signal. INTERIOR LAMPS Map lamps (if equipped) If equipped with a convertible top the map lamps and controls are located on the rearview mirror. Press the controls on the bottom of the mirror to activate the lamps. HI LO OFF Lights 70
  • 71. Lights BULBS Replacing exterior bulbs Check the operation of the following lamps frequently: ² Headlamps ² Tail lamps ² Brakelamps ² High-mount brakelamp ² Turn signal lamps ² Backup lamps ² License plate lamp Do not remove lamp bulbs unless they will be replaced immediately. If a bulb is removed for an extended period of time, contaminants may enter the lamp housings and affect performance. Using the right bulbs Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs must be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America and an “E” for Europe to assure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn time. Function Trade Number Tail lamp, brakelamp, turn lamp 3157K Park lamp, turn lamp, side marker (front) 3157 AK (amber) Backup lamp 3156K License plate lamp 168 High-mount brakelamp 906 Headlamps 9007 Luggage compartment lamp 906 Dome lamp 575 Map lamp 575 Visor vanity lamp 74 Glove compartment 194 Rearview mirror map lamps 192 Fog lamp 899 All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted. To replace all instrument panel lights - see your dealer. 71
  • 72. Lights Interior bulbs Check the operation of the following interior bulbs frequently: ² interior overhead lamp ² map lamp For bulb replacement, see a dealer or qualified technician. Map lamps For bulb replacement, see a qualified service technician or your dealer. Replacing headlamp bulbs To remove the headlamp bulb: 1. Make sure headlamp switch is in OFF position, then open the hood. 2. At the back of the headlamp, pull two retainer pins up to release the headlamp assembly. 3. Pull headlamp assembly forward disengaging the lamp from the rear hidden snap retainers to expose the back of the bulb. 4. Disconnect the electrical connector from the bulb by pulling rearward. 5. Remove the bulb retaining ring by rotating it counterclockwise (when viewed from the rear) to free it from the bulb socket, and slide the ring off the plastic base. Keep the ring to retain the new bulb. 72
  • 73. 6. Without turning, remove the old bulb from the lamp assembly by gently pulling it straight out of the lamp assembly. To install the new bulb: Lights Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated. 1. With the flat side of the new bulb’s plastic base facing upward, insert the glass end of the bulb into the lamp assembly. You may need to turn the bulb left or right to align the grooves in the plastic base with the tabs in the lamp assembly. When the grooves are aligned, push the bulb into the lamp assembly until the plastic base contacts the rear of the lamp assembly. 2. Install the bulb retaining ring over the plastic base until it contacts the rear of the socket by rotating clockwise until you feel a “stop.” 3. Connect the electrical connector into the plastic base until it snaps, locking it into position. 4. Install the headlamp on vehicle by aligning the lamp with the rear snap retainers, push to seat and secure with two retainer pins. 5. Turn the headlamps on and make sure they work properly. If the headlamp was correctly aligned before you changed the bulb, you should not need to align it again. Replacing front parking lamp/turn signal bulbs 1. Make sure the headlamp control is in the OFF position. 2. Open the hood. 73
  • 74. Lights 3. At the back of the headlamp, pull two retainer pins up to release the headlamp assembly. 4. Pull headlamp assembly forward disengaging the lamp from the rear snap retainers to expose the back of the bulb. 5. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove from lamp assembly. 6. Carefully pull the bulb straight out from the socket and push in the new bulb. 7. To complete installation, follow the removal procedure in reverse orer. Replacing high-mount brakelamp bulbs 1. Open trunk. 2. Inside trunk, locate access hole under the rear decklid. 3. Remove the bulb socket by rotating it 45 degrees and pulling it out of the lamp assembly. 4. Carefully pull bulb straight out of socket and push in new bulb. 5. To complete installation, follow the removal procedure in reverse order. 74
  • 75. Lights Replacing foglamp bulbs The halogen bulb contains gas under pressure. The bulb may shatter if the glass envelope is scratched or if the bulb is dropped. Handle the bulb carefully. Grasp the bulb only by its base. Avoid touching the glass envelope. 1. Rotate the foglamp bulb counterclockwise and remove from foglamp (the rear side of the foglamp is shown). 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the foglamp bulb. 3. Connect the electrical connector to the new foglamp bulb. 4. Install the foglamp bulb in foglamp by rotating clockwise. Replacing license plate lamp bulbs 1. Open trunk and remove bulb socket from the trunk lid by turning counterclockwise. 2. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket. Install the new bulb in reverse order. Replacing tail lamp/backup bulbs For bulb replacement, see a dealer or qualified technician. 75
  • 76. WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHER CONTROLS Rotate the windshield wiper control to the desired interval, low or HI LO high speed position. OFF The bars of varying length are for intermittent wipers. When in this position rotate the control upward for fast intervals and downward for slow intervals. Push the control on HI the end of the stalk to LO activate washer. Push OFF and hold for a longer wash cycle. The washer will automatically shut off after ten seconds of continuous use. Mist Function To operate the Mist HI function of the LO windshield wipers, OFF push and release the windshield washer control quickly. The wipers will cycle one or two times. Windshield wiper blades Check the wiper blades for wear at least twice a year or when they seem less effective. Substances such as tree sap and some hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes reduce the effectiveness of wiper blades. Checking the wiper blades If the wiper blades do not wipe properly, clean both the windshield and wiper blades using undiluted windshield wiper solution or a mild detergent. Rinse thoroughly with clean water. To avoid damaging the blades, do not use fuel, kerosene, paint thinner or other solvents. Driver Controls 76
  • 77. Driver Controls Changing the wiper blades To replace the wiper blades: 1. Pull the wiper arm away from the windshield and lock into the service position. 2. Turn the blade at an angle from the wiper arm. Push the lock pin manually to release the blade and pull the wiper blade down toward the windshield to remove it from the arm. 3. Attach the new wiper to the wiper arm and press it into place until a click is heard. TILT STEERING WHEEL (IF EQUIPPED) Pull the tilt steering control toward you to move the steering wheel up or down. Hold the control while adjusting the wheel to the desired position, then release the control to lock the steering wheel in position. Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving. 77
  • 78. Driver Controls OVERHEAD STORAGE NET (IF EQUIPPED) Be sure to secure objects when placed in the storage net in order to help reduce the risk that they become projectiles in the event of a collision. AUXILIARY POWER POINT The power point is an additional power source for electrical accessories. Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty. A power point is located inside the center console storage bin. POWER WINDOWS Press and hold the rocker switches to open and close windows. ² Press the top portion of the rocker switch to close. 78
  • 79. ² Press the bottom portion of the rocker switch to open. Driver Controls Express down To make the driver window open fully without holding the window control, press the bottom portion of the driver window control completely down and release quickly. Depress again to stop window operation. Window lock (if equipped) The window lock feature allows only the driver to operate the power windows. LOCK To lock out all the window controls except for the driver’s press the control. Press the control again to restore the window controls. 79
  • 80. POWER SIDE VIEW MIRRORS (IF EQUIPPED) To adjust your mirrors: 1. Move the mirror selector control all the way to the left to adjust the left mirror or all the way to the right to adjust the right mirror. 2. Move the control in the direction you wish to tilt the mirror. 3. Return the control to the center position. SPEED CONTROL To turn speed control on ² Press ON. Vehicle speed cannot be controlled until the ON vehicle is traveling at or above 48 km/h (30 mph). Do not shift the gearshift lever into N (Neutral) with the speed control on. Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, slippery, or unpaved. OFF Driver Controls 80
  • 81. To turn speed control off ² Press OFF or ² Turn off the vehicle ignition. Once speed control is switched off, the previously programmed set speed will be erased. To set a speed ² Press SET ACCEL. For speed control to operate, the speed control must be ON and the vehicle speed must be greater than 48 km/h (30 mph). Driver Controls ON If you drive up or down a steep hill, your vehicle speed may vary momentarily slower or faster than the set speed. This is normal. Speed control cannot reduce the vehicle speed if it increases above the set speed on a downhill. If your vehicle speed is faster than the set speed while driving on a downhill, you may want to shift to the next lower gear or apply the brakes to reduce your vehicle speed. If your vehicle slows down more than 16 km/h (10 mph) below your set speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage. This is normal. Pressing RESUME will re-engage it. Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, slippery, or unpaved. OFF RESUME SET ACCEL COAST 81
  • 82. To set a higher set speed ² Press and hold SET ACCEL. Release the control when the desired vehicle speed is reached or ² Press and release SET ACCEL to operate the Tap-Up function. Each press will increase the set speed by 1.6 km/h (1 mph) or ² Accelerate with your accelerator pedal. When the desired vehicle speed is reached, press and release SET ACCEL. You can accelerate with the accelerator pedal at any time during speed control usage. Releasing the accelerator pedal will return your vehicle to the previously programmed set speed. To set a lower set speed ² Press and hold COAST. Release the control when the desired speed is reached or ² Press and release COAST to operate the Tap-Down function. Each press will decrease the set speed by 1.6 km/h (1 mph) or ² Depress the brake pedal. When the desired vehicle speed is reached, press SET ACCEL. RESUME SET ACCEL COAST RESUME SET ACCEL COAST RESUME SET ACCEL COAST Driver Controls 82
  • 83. Driver Controls To disengage speed control ² Depress the brake pedal or ² Depress the clutch pedal (if equipped). Disengaging the speed control will not erase the previously programmed set speed. Pressing OFF will erase the previously programmed set speed. To return to a previously set speed ² Press RESUME. For RESUME to operate, the vehicle speed must be faster than 48 km/h (30 mph). ON OFF RESUME SET ACCEL COAST 83
  • 84. Driver Controls OVERDRIVE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED) Activating overdrive (Overdrive) is the normal drive position for the best fuel economy. The overdrive function allows automatic upshifts and downshifts through all available gears. Deactivating overdrive Press the Transmission Control Switch (TCS) located on the gearshift. The O/D OFF indicator light will illuminate on the instrument cluster. The transmission will operate in all gears except overdrive. To return to normal overdrive mode, press the Transmission Control Switch again. The O/D OFF indicator light will no longer be illuminated. When you shut off and re-start your vehicle, the transmission will automatically return to normal (Overdrive) mode. For additional information about the gearshift and the transmission control switch operation refer to the Automatic Transmission Operation section of the Driving chapter. CENTER CONSOLE Your vehicle may be equipped with a variety of console features. These include: ² Dual cupholders ² Auxiliary power point ² Coin holder slots (if equipped) ² Convertible top control (if equipped) 84
  • 85. Driver Controls Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard objects can injure you in a collision. POSITIVE RETENTION FLOOR MAT (IF EQUIPPED) Position the floor mat so that the eyelet is over the pointed end of the retention post and rotate forward to lock in. Make sure that the mat does not interfere with the operation of the accelerator or the brake pedal. To remove the floor mat, reverse the installation procedure. TRUNK REMOTE CONTROL The remote trunk release control is located in the glove compartment. Press to open trunk. CONVERTIBLE (IF EQUIPPED) Do not store articles behind rear seat. Articles stored in the convertible top stowage compartment may break the rear glass window when the top is lowered. Lowering the convertible top The convertible top can be lowered with the side windows either up or down. The convertible top will not operate unless the parking brake is engaged. Do not lower the top while the vehicle is moving because the top may be severely damaged. Also, do not lower the top when the top material is wet. To lower the convertible top: 1. Bring vehicle to a complete stop. Engage the parking brake. Key must be in the ON position. 2. Check the convertible top stowage compartment behind the rear seat to be sure it is empty and ready to receive the top. 85
  • 86. 3. Unclamp the top from the windshield header at both the right and left sides by pulling each clamp rearward until the hook in the windshield header is free. The clamps are flush with the header when in the closed position. 4. Close the windshield header clamps immediately after disengagement, to avoid cutting the top material and to permit installation of the vinyl boot. 5. If the top has not been lowered for some time and sticks to the windshield header, push the front of the top up slightly with your hand to loosen it. 6. Push the convertible top switch on the PARK SET BRAKE console in front of the armrest and hold until the top is completely stored. 7. Disengage the parking brake. Installation of the boot 1. Push boot rearward and engage boot under the body molding at the rear and sides. Driver Controls 86
  • 87. 2. Fasten snap on boot to quarter trim panel on both sides of the vehicle. 3. Insert boot tongue into groove located on rear of seat. 4. To remove, unfasten the snaps and the boot tongue. 5. Pull forward and lift off. Driver Controls Raising the convertible top The convertible top will not operate unless the parking brake is engaged. Do not raise the top while the vehicle is moving because the top may be severely damaged. To raise the convertible top: 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop. Engage the parking brake. Key must be in the ON position. 2. Remove the boot cover and store it in the luggage compartment. 3. Lower the front and rear side windows. 4. Push the convertible top button, holding it until the top unfolds and moves forward toward the windshield header. 87
  • 88. Driver Controls 5. Open both top clamps before the top meets the windshield header 6. Continue to use the top motor to raise the top until it has reached the fully closed position flush to the header. 7. The two pins under the forward edge of the top should seat themselves in the matching holes in the header. 8. To fasten both clamps securely, push the clamp handles into the header on the top until they are flush with the header. Pulling down on the header at the center grip while closing the latches may assist in fastening the clamps. 9. Raise the front and rear side windows. 10. Disengage the parking brake. 88
  • 89. Locks and Security KEYS The key operates all locks on your vehicle. In case of loss, replacement keys are available from your dealer. You should always carry a second key with you in a safe place in case you require it in an emergency. Refer to SecuriLocky Passive Anti-Theft System for more information. POWER DOOR LOCKS Press U to unlock all doors and L to lock all doors. U L INTERIOR LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT RELEASE Your vehicle is equipped with a mechanical interior luggage compartment release handle that provides a means of escape for children and adults in the event they become locked inside the luggage compartment. Adults are advised to familiarize themselves with the operation and location of the release handle. 89
  • 90. Locks and Security To open the luggage compartment door (lid) from within the luggage compartment, pull the illuminated “T” shaped handle and push up on the trunk lid. The handle is composed of a material that will glow for hours in darkness following brief exposure to ambient light. The “T” shaped handle will be located either on the luggage compartment door (lid) or inside the luggage compartment near the tail lamps. Keep vehicle doors and luggage compartment locked and keep keys and remote transmitters out of a child’s reach. Unsupervised children could lock themselves in an open trunk and risk injury. Children should be taught not to play in vehicles. 90
  • 91. Locks and Security On hot days, the temperature in the trunk or vehicle interior can rise very quickly. Exposure of people or animals to these high temperatures for even a short time can cause death or serious heat-related injuries, including brain damage. Small children are particularly at risk. REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. The remote entry system allows you to: ² lock or unlock all vehicle doors without a key ² open the trunk ² activate the panic alarm ² confirms that the vehicle is locked with a short “beep” from the horn. The remote entry features only operate with the ignition in the LOCK position. If there is any potential remote keyless entry problem with your vehicle, ensure ALL remote entry transmitters are brought to the dealership, to aid in troubleshooting. 91
  • 92. Locks and Security Unlocking the doors Press this control to unlock the driver’s door. The interior lamps will illuminate. With the all-door remote entry system, press the control a second time within three seconds to unlock the passenger door. Locking the doors Press this control to lock all doors. To confirm all doors are closed and locked, press the control a second time within three seconds. The doors will lock again, the horn will chirp and the lamps will flash. If any of the doors are ajar, the horn will make two quick chirps and the chime may sound, reminding you to properly close all doors. Sounding a panic alarm Press this control to activate the alarm. To deactivate the alarm, press the control again or turn the ignition to ACC or ON. Panic alarm will only operate with the ignition in the OFF position. 92
  • 93. Locks and Security Opening the trunk Press the control once to open the trunk. Ensure that the trunk is closed and latched before driving your vehicle. Failure to latch the trunk may cause objects to fall out of the trunk or block the rear view. This feature will not work with the transmission out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) if the ignition is in either the ACC or ON position. Replacing the batteries The transmitter is powered by two coin type three-volt lithium batteries. Typical operating range will allow you to be up to 10 meters (33 feet) away from your vehicle. A decrease in operating range can be caused by: ² Weather conditions ² Nearby radio towers ² Structures around the vehicle ² Other vehicles parked next to the vehicle To replace the batteries: 1. Twist a thin coin between the two halves of the transmitter near the key ring. DO NOT TAKE THE FRONT PART OF THE TRANSMITTER APART. 2. Place the positive (+) side of new batteries down. Refer to the diagram inside the transmitter unit. 3. Snap the two halves back together. 93
  • 94. Locks and Security Replacement of the battery will not cause the remote transmitter to become deprogrammed from your vehicle. The remote transmitter should operate normally after battery replacement. Replacing lost transmitters ² Take all your vehicle’s transmitters to your dealer if service is required. ² If you purchase additional transmitters (up to four may be programmed into memory), perform the following procedure. To reprogram the transmitters yourself, place the key in the ignition and turn from LOCK to OFF and cycle between OFF and ON eight times in rapid succession (within 10 seconds) ending in ON. After doors lock/unlock, press any control on all transmitters (up to four). With each control press of the transmitters, the door should cycle (lock/unlock) to confirm programming. When completed, turn the ignition to OFF. The door locks should cycle (lock/unlock) one last time to confirm completion of programming. All transmitters must be programmed at the same time. Illuminated entry The interior lamps illuminate when the remote entry system is used to unlock the door(s) or sound the personal alarm. The system automatically turns off after 25 seconds or when the ignition is turned to the START/RUN or ACC position. The dome lamp control (if equipped) must not be set to the OFF position for the illuminated entry system to operate. 94
  • 95. Locks and Security The inside lights will not turn off if: ² they have been turned on with the dimmer control, or ² any door is open. The battery saver will shut off the interior lamps 30 minutes after the ignition has been turned to the OFF position, 10 minutes after if the door is left open, and 30 minutes after if the trunk is left open or the dome lamp control is left on. SECURILOCKY PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM SecuriLocky passive anti-theft system is an engine immobilization system. This system is designed to prevent the engine from being started unless a coded key programmed to your vehicle is used. The SecuriLocky passive anti-theft system is not compatible with non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection. THEFT INDICATOR The theft indicator is the flashing red indicator located on top of the instrument panel. ² When the ignition is in the OFF position, the indicator will flash once every 2 seconds to indicate the SecuriLocky system is functioning as a theft deterrent. ² When the ignition is in the ON position, the indicator will glow for 3 seconds to indicate normal system functionality. If a problem occurs with the SecuriLocky system, the indicator will flash rapidly or glow steadily when the ignition is in the ON position. If this occurs, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer for service. 95
  • 96. Locks and Security Automatic arming The vehicle is armed immediately after 4 switching the ignition 3 to the 3 (OFF) position. The THEFT 2 indicator in the instrument cluster will 1 flash every two seconds when the vehicle is armed. Automatic disarming Switching the ignition to the 4 (ON) position with a coded key disarms the vehicle. The THEFT indicator will illuminate for three seconds and then go out. If the THEFT indicator stays on for an extended period of time or flashes rapidly, have the system serviced by your dealership or a qualified technician. Key information Your vehicle is supplied with two coded keys. Only a coded key will start your vehicle. Spare coded keys can be purchased from your dealership. Your dealership can program your key or you can “do it yourself.” Refer to Programming spare keys. The following items may prevent the vehicle from starting: ² Large metallic objects ² Electronic devices on the key chain that can be used to purchase gasoline or similar items 5 ² A second key on the same key ring as the coded key If any of these items are present, you need to keep these objects from touching the coded key while starting the engine. These objects and devices cannot damage the coded key, but can cause a momentary “no start” condition if they are too close to the key during engine start. If a problem occurs, 96
  • 97. Locks and Security turn ignition OFF and restart the engine with all other objects on the key ring held away from the ignition key. Check to make sure the coded key is an approved Ford coded key. If your keys are lost or stolen you will need to do the following: ² Use your spare key to start the vehicle, or ² Have your vehicle towed to a dealership or a locksmith. The key codes will need to be erased from your vehicle and new key codes will need to be re-coded. Replacing coded keys can be very costly and you may want to store an extra programmed key away from the vehicle in a safe place to prevent an unforeseen inconvenience. The correct coded key must be used for your vehicle. The use of the wrong type of coded key may lead to a “no start” condition. If an unprogrammed key is used in the ignition it will cause a “no start” condition. Programming spare keys A maximum of eight keys can be coded to your vehicle. Only SecuriLocky keys can be used. To program a coded key yourself, you will need two previously programmed coded keys (keys that already operate your vehicle’s engine) and the new unprogrammed key(s) readily accessible for timely implementation of each step in the procedure. If two previously programmed coded keys are not available, you must bring your vehicle to your dealership to have the spare coded key(s) programmed. Please read and understand the entire procedure before you begin. 97
  • 98. 1. Insert the first previously programmed 4 coded key into the 3 ignition and turn the 5 ignition from 3 (OFF) 2 to 4 (ON) (maintain ignition in 4 (ON) for 1 at least one second). 2. Turn ignition to 3 (OFF) then 2 (LOCK) and remove the first coded key from the ignition. 3. Within ten seconds of removing the first coded key, insert the second previously programmed coded key into the ignition and turn the ignition from 3 (OFF) to 4 (ON) (maintain ignition in 4 (ON) for at least one second but no more than ten seconds). 4. Turn the ignition to 3 (OFF) then 2 (LOCK) and remove the second coded key from the ignition. 5. Within 20 seconds of removing the second coded key, insert the new unprogrammed key (new key/valet key) into the ignition and turn the ignition from 3 (OFF) to 4 (ON) (maintain ignition in 4 (ON) for at least one second). This step will program your new key to a coded key. 6. To program additional new unprogrammed key(s), repeat this procedure from step 1. If successful, the new coded key(s) will start the vehicle’s engine and the theft indicator will illuminate for three seconds and then go out. If not successful, the new coded key(s) will not start the vehicle’s engine and the theft indicator will flash on and off and you may repeat steps 1 through 6. If failure repeats, bring your vehicle to your dealership to have the new spare key(s) programmed. Locks and Security 98
  • 99. Seating and Safety Restraints SEATING Adjustable head restraints (if equipped) Your vehicle’s seats may be equipped with head restraints which are vertically adjustable. The purpose of these head restraints is to help limit head motion in the event of a rear collision. To properly adjust your head restraints, lift the head restraint so that it is located directly behind your head or as close to that position as possible. Refer to the following to raise and lower the head restraints. The head restraints can be moved up and down. Adjusting the front manual seat Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the vehicle is moving. Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to reduce the risk of injuring people in a collision or sudden stop. Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips. Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision. 99
  • 100. Seating and Safety Restraints Lift handle to move seat forward or backward. Pull lever up to adjust seatback. Using the power lumbar support (if equipped) The power lumbar control is located on the outboard side of the seat. Press one side of the control to adjust firmness. Press the other side of the control to adjust softness. Adjusting the front power seat (if equipped) Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the vehicle is moving. Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to avoid injuring people in a collision or sudden stop. Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips. 100
  • 101. Seating and Safety Restraints Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision. The control is located on the front outboard corner of the driver’s seat. Press front to raise or lower the front portion of the seat cushion. Press rear to raise or lower the rear portion of the seat cushion. Press the control to move the seat forward, backward, up or down. REAR SEATS Use the seatback release to fold the back of the front seat forward for rear seat passenger entry or exit. This release handle is located on the lower 101
  • 102. Seating and Safety Restraints outboard back of the seat. The seatback locks automatically when returned to the normal position. The rotating boot on the front seat belt is designed to allow rear seat entry/exit. To enter the rear seat: 1. Remove safety belt from safety belt guide on top of front seat. 2. Rotate the safety belt boot rearward. 3. Enter the rear seat in front of the safety belt. 4. Rotate the safety belt boot forward and place the belt in the belt guide on the seat back to allow use by the front driver/passenger. 2nd seat/split-folding rear seat (if equipped) One or both rear seatbacks can be folded down to provide additional cargo space. To lower the seatback(s) from inside the vehicle, pull tab to release seat back and then fold seatback down. When raising the seatback(s), make sure you hear the seat latch into place. SAFETY RESTRAINTS Safety restraints precautions Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips. 102
  • 103. Seating and Safety Restraints To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit where they can be properly restrained. Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision. All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag (SRS) is provided. It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a safety belt. Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. 2) Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person. 103
  • 104. Seating and Safety Restraints Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints. Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a small child. Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child anywhere near them. Combination lap and shoulder belts Before fastening the safety belt, make sure the shoulder belt passes through the belt guide on the top of the seatback. Coupe shown, convertible is similar and safety belt must also pass through the belt guide. 1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle (the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from) until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle. 104
  • 105. Seating and Safety Restraints 2. To unfasten, push the release button and remove the tongue from the buckle. The front and rear outboard safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts. The front passenger and rear seat outboard safety belts have two types of locking modes described below: Energy Management Feature ² This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy management feature at the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on collision. ² This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to pay out webbing in a controlled manner. This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant’s chest. After any vehicle collision, the safety belt system at all outboard seating positions (except driver, which has no “automatic locking retractor” feature) must be checked by a qualified technician to verify that the “automatic locking retractor” feature for child seats is still functioning properly. In addition, all safety belts should be checked for proper function. BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE REPLACED if the safety belt assembly “automatic locking retractor” feature or any other safety belt function is not operating properly when checked according to the procedures in Workshop Manual. 105
  • 106. Seating and Safety Restraints Failure to replace the Belt and Retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions. Vehicle sensitive mode The vehicle sensitive mode is the normal retractor mode, allowing free shoulder belt length adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 8 km/h (5 mph) or more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce forward movement of the driver and passengers. The safety belt system can also be made to lock manually by quickly pulling on the shoulder belt. Automatic locking mode In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt. When to use the automatic locking mode ² Any time a child safety seat is installed in a passenger front or outboard rear seating position (if equipped). Children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible. Refer to Safety Restraints for Children or Safety Seats for Children later in this chapter. 106
  • 107. Seating and Safety Restraints How to use the automatic locking mode ² Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. ² Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted. ² Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking mode. How to disengage the automatic locking mode Ford Motor Company recommends that all safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware should be inspected by a qualified technician after any collision. Safety belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. 107
  • 108. Seating and Safety Restraints Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode. After any vehicle collision, the front passenger and rear outboard seat belt systems must be checked by a qualified technician to verify that the “automatic locking retractor” feature for child seats is still functioning properly. In addition, all seat belts should be checked for proper function. BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE REPLACED if the seat belt assembly “automatic locking retractor” feature or any other seat belt function is not operating properly when checked according to the procedures in Workshop Manual. Failure to replace the Belt and Retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions. Safety belt warning light and indicator chime The seat belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts. 108
  • 109. Seating and Safety Restraints Conditions of operation If... Then... The driver’s safety belt is not buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the ON position... The safety belt warning light illuminates1-2 minutes and the warning chime sounds 4-8 seconds. The driver’s safety belt is buckled while the indicator light is illuminated and the warning chime is sounding... The safety belt warning light and warning chime turn off. The driver’s safety belt is buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the ON position... The safety belt warning light will turn on for 3 seconds and then turn off. The indicator chime will remain off. BeltMinder The BeltMinder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt warning function. This feature provides additional reminders to the driver that the driver’s safety belt is unbuckled by intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster. If... Then... The driver’s safety belt is not buckled approximately 5 seconds after the safety belt warning light has turned off... The BeltMinder feature is activated - the safety belt warning light illuminates and the warning chime sounds for 6 seconds every 30 seconds, repeating for approximately 5 minutes or until safety belt is buckled. The driver’s safety belt is buckled while the safety belt indicator light is illuminated and the safety belt warning chime is sounding... The BeltMinder feature will not activate. 109
  • 110. Seating and Safety Restraints If... Then... The driver’s safety belt is buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the ON position... The BeltMinder feature will not activate. The purpose of the BeltMinder is to remind occasional wearers to wear safety belts all of the time. The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts: (All statistics based on U.S. data) Reasons given... Consider... “Crashes are rare events” 36700 crashes occur every day. The more we drive, the more we are exposed to “rare” events, even for good drivers. 1 in 4 of us will be seriously injured in a crash during our lifetime. “I’m not going far” 3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25 miles of home. “Belts are uncomfortable” We design our safety belts to enhance comfort. If you are uncomfortable - try different positions for the safety belt upper anchorage and seatback which should be as upright as possible; this can improve comfort. “I was in a hurry” Prime time for an accident. BeltMinder reminds us to take a few seconds to buckle up. “Seat belts don’t work” Safety belts, when used properly, reduce risk of death to front seat occupants by 45% in cars, and by 60% in light trucks. “Traffic is light” Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in single-vehicle crashes, many when no other vehicles are around. “Belts wrinkle my clothes” Possibly, but a serious crash can do much more than wrinkle your clothes, particularly if you are unbelted. 110
  • 111. Seating and Safety Restraints Reasons given... Consider... “The people I’m with don’t wear belts” Set the example, teen deaths occur 4 times more often in vehicles with TWO or MORE people. Children and younger brothers/sisters imitate behavior they see. “I have an air bag” Air bags offer greater protection when used with safety belts. Frontal airbags are not designed to inflate in rear and side crashes or rollovers. “I’d rather be thrown clear” Not a good idea. People who are ejected are 40 times more likely to DIE. Safety belts help prevent ejection, WE CAN’T “PICK OUR CRASH”. Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt to avoid the Belt Minder chime. Sitting on the safety belt will increase the risk of injury in an accident. To disable (one-time) or deactivate the Belt Minder feature please follow the directions stated below. One time disable Any time the safety belt is buckled and then unbuckled during an ignition ON cycle, BeltMinder will be disabled for that ignition cycle only. Deactivating/activating the BeltMinder feature Read steps 1 - 9 thoroughly before proceeding with the deactivation/activation programming procedure. The BeltMinder feature can be deactivated/activated by performing the following procedure: Before following the procedure, make sure that: ² The parking brake is set. ² The gearshift is in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or the neutral position (manual transmission). ² The ignition switch is in the OFF position. ² All vehicle doors are closed. 111
  • 112. Seating and Safety Restraints ² The driver’s safety belt is unbuckled. ² The parklamps/headlamps are in OFF position (If vehicle is equipped with Autolamps, this will not affect the procedure). To reduce the risk of injury, do not deactivate/activate the Belt Minder feature while driving the vehicle. BeltMinder activation and deactivation procedure 1. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN (or ON) position. (DO NOT START THE ENGINE.) 2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off. (Approximately 1–2 minutes.) ² Steps 3–5 must be completed within 60 seconds or the procedure will have to be repeated. 3. Buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three times, ending with the safety belt unbuckled. This can be done before or during BeltMinder warning activation. 4. Turn on the parklamps/headlamps, turn off the parklamps/headlamps. 5. Buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three times, ending with the safety belt unbuckled. ² After step 5 the safety belt warning light will be turned on for three seconds. 6. Within seven seconds of the safety belt warning light turning off, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt. ² This will disable BeltMinder if it is currently enabled, or enable BeltMinder if it is currently disabled. 7. Confirmation of disabling BeltMinder is provided by the safety belt warning light flashing four times per second for three seconds. 8. Confirmation of enabling BeltMinder is provided by: ² The safety belt warning light flashing four times per second for three seconds. 112
  • 113. Seating and Safety Restraints ² Followed by three seconds with the safety belt warning light off. ² Once again, the safety belt warning light will flash four times per second for three seconds. 9. After receiving confirmation, the deactivation/activation procedure is complete. Safety belt extension assembly If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, there is a 20 cm (8 inch) safety belt extension assembly that can be added (part number 611C22). This assembly can be obtained from your dealer at no cost. Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too short for you when fully extended. Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt across the torso. Safety belt maintenance Inspect the safety belt systems periodically to make sure they work properly and are not damaged. Inspect the safety belts to make sure there are no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary. All safety belt assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle assemblies, buckle support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback (if equipped), child safety seat tether bracket assemblies (if equipped), LATCH child seat tether anchors and lower anchors (if equipped), and attaching hardware, should be inspected after a collision. Ford Motor Company recommends that all safety belt assemblies used in vehicles involved in a collision be replaced. However, if the collision was minor and a qualified technician finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety 113
  • 114. Seating and Safety Restraints belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the safety belt assembly under the above conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision. Refer to Cleaning and maintaining the safety belts in the Cleaning chapter. AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module which records information about the air bag and sensor systems. In the event of a collision this module may save information related to the collision including information about the air bag system and impact severity. This information will assist Ford Motor Company in servicing the vehicle and in helping to better understand real world collisions and further improve the safety of future vehicles. 114
  • 115. Seating and Safety Restraints Important supplemental restraint system (SRS) precautions The supplemental restraint system is designed to work with the safety belt to help protect the driver and right front passenger from certain upper body injuries. Air bags DO NOT inflate slowly or gently and the risk of injury from a deploying air bag is greatest close to the trim covering the air bag module. All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag (SRS) is provided. Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints. National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) recommends a minimum distance of at least 25 cm (10 inches) between an occupant’s chest and the driver air bag module. Never place your arm over the air bag module as a deploying air bag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries. Steps you can take to properly position yourself away from the air bag: ² Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably. 115
  • 116. Seating and Safety Restraints ² Recline the seat slightly (one or two degrees) from the upright position. Do not put anything on or over the air bag module. Placing objects on or over the air bag inflation area may cause those objects to be propelled by the air bag into your face and torso causing serious injury. Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the air bag supplemental restraint systems or its fuses. See your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer. Modifications to the front end of the vehicle, including frame, bumper, front end body structure and tow hooks may affect the performance of the air bag sensors increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of the vehicle. Children and air bags For additional important safety information, read all information on safety restraints in this guide. Children must always be properly restrained. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of injury in a collision. 116
  • 117. Seating and Safety Restraints Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active air bag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat all the way back. How does the air bag supplemental restraint system work? The air bag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains longitudinal deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an electrical circuit that initiates air bag inflation. The fact that the air bags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation. Air bags are designed to inflate in frontal and near-frontal collisions, not rollover, side-impact, or rear-impacts unless the collision causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration. The air bags inflate and deflate rapidly upon activation. After air bag deployment, it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery residue or smell the burnt propellant. This may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder (to lubricate the bag) or sodium compounds (e.g., baking soda) that result from the combustion process that inflates the air bag. Small 117
  • 118. Seating and Safety Restraints amounts of sodium hydroxide may be present which may irritate the skin and eyes, but none of the residue is toxic. While the system is designed to help reduce serious injuries, contact with a deploying air bag may also cause abrasions, swelling or temporary hearing loss. Because air bags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force, there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or internal injuries, particularly to occupants who are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of air bag deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be properly restrained as far away from the air bag module as possible while maintaining vehicle control. The SRS consists of: ² driver and passenger air bag modules (which include the inflators and air bags) ² one or more impact and safing sensors ² a readiness light and tone ² a diagnostic module ² and the electrical wiring which connects the components The diagnostic module monitors its own internal circuits and the supplemental air bag electrical system warning (including the impact sensors), the system wiring, the air bag system readiness light, the air bag back up power and the air bag ignitors. Several air bag system components get hot after inflation. Do not touch them after inflation. If the air bag has deployed, the air bag will not function again and must be replaced immediately. If the air bag is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a collision. 118
  • 119. Seating and Safety Restraints Determining if the system is operational The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to indicate the condition of the system. Refer to Air bag readiness section in the Instrument cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the air bag is not required. A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following: ² The readiness light will either flash or stay lit. AIR BAG ² The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is turned on. ² A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired. If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced at your dealership or by a qualified technician immediately. Unless serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a collision. Disposal of air bags and air bag equipped vehicles (including pretensioners) For disposal of air bags or air bag equipped vehicles, see your local dealership or qualified technician. Air bags MUST BE disposed of by qualified personnel. SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety restraints for children. Also see Air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using air bags. Important child restraint precautions You are required by law to use safety restraints for children in the U.S. and Canada. If small children ride in your vehicle (generally children who are four 119
  • 120. Seating and Safety Restraints years old or younger and who weigh 18 kg [40 lbs] or less), you must put them in safety seats made especially for children. Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety of children in your vehicle. Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision. Always follow the instructions and warnings that come with any infant or child restraint you might use. When possible, always place children under age 12 in the rear seat of your vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Children and safety belts If the child is the proper size, restrain the child in a safety seat. Children who are too large for child safety seats (as specified by your child safety seat manufacturer) should always wear safety belts. Follow all the important safety restraint and air bag precautions that apply to adult passengers in your vehicle. If the shoulder belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt can be positioned so it does not cross or rest in front of the child’s face or neck, the child should wear the lap and shoulder belt. Moving the child closer to the center of the vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt fit. Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets unattended in your vehicle. Child booster seats Children outgrow a typical convertible or toddler seat when they weigh 40 pounds and are around 4 120
  • 121. years of age. Although the lap/shoulder belt will provide some protection, these children are still too small for lap/shoulder belts to fit properly, which could increase the risk of serious injury. To improve the fit of both the lap and shoulder belt on children who have outgrown child safety seats, Ford Motor Company recommends use of a belt-positioning booster. Booster seats position a child so that safety belts fit better. They lift the child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips and the knees bend comfortably. Booster seats also make the shoulder belt fit better and more comfortably for growing children. When children should use booster seats Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and lap/shoulder belt to fit properly. Generally this is when they weigh about 80 lbs (about 8 to 12 years old). Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these questions: ² Can the child sit all the way back against the vehicle seat back with knees bent comfortably at the edge of the seat without slouching? ² Does the lap belt rest low across the hips? ² Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest? ² Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip? Seating and Safety Restraints 121
  • 122. Seating and Safety Restraints Types of booster seats There are two types of belt-positioning booster seats: ² Those that are backless. If your backless booster seat has a removable shield, remove the shield and use the lap/shoulder belt. If a seating position has a low seat back and no head restraint, a backless booster seat may place your child’s head (top of ear level) above the top of the seat. In this case, move the backless booster to another seating position with a higher seat back and lap/shoulder belts. ² Those with a high back. If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot find a seating position that adequately supports your child’s head, a high back booster seat would be a better choice. Both can be used in any vehicle in a seating position equipped with lap/shoulder belts if your child is over 40 lbs. The shoulder belt should cross the chest, resting snugly on the center of the shoulder. The lap belt should rest low and snug across the hips, never up high across the stomach. If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this condition. The importance of shoulder belts Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child’s head hitting a hard surface in a 122
  • 123. Seating and Safety Restraints collision. For this reason, you should never use a booster seat with a lap belt only. It is best to use a booster seat with lap/shoulder belts in the back seat-the safest place for children to ride. Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the booster seat. Never put the shoulder belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it eliminates the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision. Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child. They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a collision. SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN Child and infant or child safety seats Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the child. Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions with the safety seat you 123
  • 124. Seating and Safety Restraints put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision. When installing a child safety seat: ² Review and follow the information presented in the Air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) section in this chapter. ² Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position (the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from). ² Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle. ² Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button, to prevent accidental unbuckling. ² Place seat back in upright position. ² Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to Automatic locking mode (passenger side front and outboard rear seating positions) (if equipped) section in this chapter. Ford recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top tether strap. Install the child safety seat in a seating position which is capable of providing a tether anchorage. For more information on top tether straps, refer to Attaching child safety seats with tether straps. in this chapter. Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions included with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision. 124
  • 125. Seating and Safety Restraints Installing child safety seats in combination lap and shoulder belt seating positions If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat (reminder - children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat) the shoulder belt must be routed through the belt guide at the top of the seatback, refer to Safety Restraints earlier in this chapter for routing through the belt holder. Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active air bag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat all the way back. 1. Position the child safety seat in a seat with a combination lap and shoulder belt. Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible. 125
  • 126. Seating and Safety Restraints 2. Pull down on the shoulder belt and then grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt together. 3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt portions together, route the tongue through the child seat according to the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted. 4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle (the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from) for that seating position until you hear a snap and feel the latch engage. Make sure the tongue is latched securely by pulling on it. 5. To put the retractor in the automatic locking mode, grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and pull downward until all of the belt is extracted and a click is heard. 126
  • 127. Seating and Safety Restraints 6. Allow the belt to retract. The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode. 7. Pull the lap belt portion across the child seat toward the buckle and pull up on the shoulder belt while pushing down with your knee on the child seat. 8. Allow the safety belt to retract to remove any slack in the belt. 9. Before placing the child in the seat, forcibly move the seat forward and back to make sure the seat is securely held in place. To check this, grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side to side and forward. There should be no more than one inch of movement for proper installation. 10. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat steps two through nine. Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use. Attaching child safety seats with tether straps in addition to the safety belt Most new forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which goes over the back of the seat and hooks to an anchoring point. Tether straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats. Contact the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a tether strap. 127
  • 128. Seating and Safety Restraints The rear seats of your vehicle are equipped with built-in tether strap anchors located behind the seats on the package tray behind the speakers (coupe) or on the lower backside of the seatback (convertible). The tether anchors in your vehicle are either located under a cover marked with the child tether anchor symbol (shown with title) or are under a flap in the convertible top boot. The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions (shown from top view): Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as shown. The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other than the correct tether anchor. 1. Position the child safety seat on the seat cushion. 2. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat. For vehicles with adjustable head restraints, route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the head restraint posts, otherwise route the tether strap over the top of the seatback. 3. Locate the correct anchor for the selected seating position as shown previously. 128
  • 129. Seating and Safety Restraints For Coupe only: 4. Open the tether anchor covers. 5. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as shown. For Convertible only: The tether anchors on the convertible are located on the lower backside of the seatback. 4. Access tether anchors located behind the seatback and pull away vinyl flap to expose anchors. 5. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as shown. 129
  • 130. Seating and Safety Restraints If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly, the child safety seat may not be retained properly in the event of a collision. 6. Refer to the Installing child safety seats in combination lap and shoulder belt seating positions section of this chapter for further instructions to secure the child safety seat. 7. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions. If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being injured in a collision greatly increases. Attaching safety seats with LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) attachments (if equipped) Some child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that connect to two anchors at certain seating positions in your vehicle. This type of child seat eliminates the need to use safety belts to attach the child seat. For forward-facing child seats, the tether strap must also be attached to the proper tether anchor. See Attaching safety seats with tether straps in this chapter. 130
  • 131. Seating and Safety Restraints Your vehicle has LATCH anchors for child seat installation at the seating positions marked with the child seat symbol. The center of the rear seat is NOT designed as a seating position. The LATCH anchors were not designed to be used with a child seat in the center position and there is no tether anchor available at the center. Putting a child seat in the center would also block access to the safety restraint buckles. Use as a seating position, with or without a child restraint, may increase the risk of injury or death. Never attach two LATCH child safety seats to the same anchor. In a crash, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child safety seat attachments and may break, causing serious injury or death. 131
  • 132. Seating and Safety Restraints The lower anchors for child seat installation are located at the rear section of the rear seat between the cushion and seat back. The LATCH anchors are below the locator symbols on the seat back. One pair of anchors are provided for each rear designated seating position. Follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions to properly install a child seat with LATCH attachments. Two plastic LATCH guides can be obtained at no charge from any Ford or Lincoln- Mercury Dealer. They snap onto the LATCH lower anchors in the seat to help attach a child seat with rigid attachments. The guides hold the seat trim away to expose the anchor and make it easier to attach some child seats. Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the anchors shown. If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments, do not tighten the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat cushion when the child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug without lifting the front of the child seat. Keeping the child seat just touching the vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash. Each time you use the safety seat, check that the seat is properly attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor. Try to tilt the child seat from side to side. Also try to tug the seat forward. Check to see if the anchors hold the seat in place. If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being injured in a crash greatly increases. 132
  • 133. Driving STARTING Positions of the ignition 1. ACCESSORY, allows 4 the electrical 3 accessories such as the 5 radio to operate while 2 the engine is not running. 1 2. LOCK, locks the steering wheel, automatic transmission gearshift lever and allows key removal. For vehicle equipped with a manual transmission, you must depress the ignition release lever to release the key. 3. OFF, shuts off the engine and all accessories without locking the steering wheel. This position also allows the automatic transmission shift lever to be moved from the P (Park) position without the brake pedal being depressed. In the ignition OFF position, the automatic transmission shift lever can be moved from the P (Park) position without the brake pedal depressed. To avoid unwanted vehicle movement, always set the parking brake. 4. ON, all electrical circuits operational. Warning lights illuminated. Key position when driving. 5. START, cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine starts. Preparing to start your vehicle Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system. This system meets all Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio noise. When starting a fuel-injected engine, avoid pressing the accelerator before or during starting. Only use 133
  • 134. Driving the accelerator when you have difficulty starting the engine. For more information on starting the vehicle, refer to Starting the engine in this chapter. Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system, creating the risk of fire or other damage. Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire. Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open the garage door before you start the engine. See Guarding against exhaust fumes in this chapter for more instructions. If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes. Important safety precautions A computer system controls the engine’s idle revolutions per minute (RPM). When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs higher than normal in order to warm the engine. If the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, have the vehicle checked. Do not allow the vehicle to idle for more than 10 minutes at high engine RPM. Before starting the vehicle: 1. Make sure all vehicle occupants have buckled their safety belts. For more information on safety belts and their proper usage, refer to the Seating and safety restraints chapter. 134
  • 135. Driving 2. Make sure the headlamps and vehicle accessories are off. If starting a vehicle with an automatic transmission: ² Make sure the parking brake is set. ² Make sure the gearshift is in P (Park). If starting a vehicle with a manual transmission: ² Make sure the parking brake is set. ² Push the clutch pedal to the floor. 3. Turn the key to 4 (ON) without turning the key to 5 (START). 1 2 3 4 5 135
  • 136. 40 30 50 60 60 70 80 100 120 80 90 140 160 180 100 110 120 4 5 3 2 RPMX1000 H L H 6 BRAKE ! P L 0 SELECT/RESET . 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 C E F 20 10 40 20 7 1 H MPH km/h FUEL DOOR THEFT LOW FUEL O/D OFF AIR BAG SERVICE ENGINE SOON ABS CHECK FUEL CAP Make sure the corresponding lights illuminate or illuminate briefly. If a light fails to illuminate, have the vehicle serviced. ² If the driver’s safety belt is fastened, the light may not illuminate. Starting the engine Note: Whenever you start your vehicle, release the key as soon as the engine starts. Excessive cranking could damage the starter. 1. Turn the key to 5 (START) without 4 pressing the 3 accelerator pedal and 5 release as soon as the 2 engine starts. The key will return to 4 (ON). 1 2. If the temperature is above –12° C (10° F) and the engine does not start within five seconds on the first try, turn the key to OFF, wait 10 seconds and try again. If the engine does not start in two attempts, press the accelerator all the way to the floor and hold. Turn the key to the START position. Driving 136
  • 137. Driving 3. If the temperature is below -12° C (10° F) and the engine does not start in 15 seconds on the first try, turn the key OFF and wait 10 seconds and try again. If the engine does not start in two attempts, press the accelerator pedal all the way to floor and hold. Turn the key to START position. 4. When the engine starts, release the key, then release the accelerator pedal gradually as the engine speeds up. 5. After idling for a few seconds, apply the brake, shift into gear and drive. Using the engine block heater (if equipped) An engine block heater warms the engine coolant, which improves starting, warms up the engine faster and allows the heater-defroster system to respond quickly. Use of an engine block heater is strongly recommended if you live in a region where temperatures reach -23° C (-10° F) or below. For best results, plug the heater in at least three hours before starting the vehicle. Using the heater for longer than three hours will not harm the engine, so the heater can be plugged in the night before starting the vehicle. To prevent electrical shock, do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged (cheater) adapters. Guarding against exhaust fumes Although odorless and colorless, carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid its dangerous effects. If you ever smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside your vehicle, have your dealer inspect and fix your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes. These fumes are harmful and could kill you. 137
  • 138. Driving Have the exhaust and body ventilation systems checked whenever: ² the vehicle is raised for service. ² the sound of the exhaust system changes. ² the vehicle has been damaged in a collision. WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Important ventilating information If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped in an open area for long periods of time, open the windows at least 2.5 cm (one inch). Adjust the heating or air conditioning (if equipped) to bring in fresh air. Improve vehicle ventilation by keeping all air inlet vents clear of snow, leaves and other debris. BRAKES Your service brakes are self-adjusting. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for scheduled maintenance. Occasional brake noise is normal and often does not indicate a performance concern with the vehicle’s brake system. In normal operation, automotive brake systems may emit occasional or intermittent squeal or groan noises when the brakes are applied. Such noises are usually heard during the first few brake applications in the morning; however, they may be heard at any time while braking and can be aggravated by environmental conditions such as 138
  • 139. Driving cold, heat, moisture, road dust, salt or mud. If a “metal-to-metal,” “continuous grinding” or “continuous squeal” sound is present while braking, the brake linings may be worn-out and should be inspected by a qualified service technician. If you are driving down a long or steep hill, shift to a lower gear. Do not apply your brakes continuously, as they may overheat and become less effective. Parking brake Apply the parking brake whenever the vehicle is parked. To set the parking brake, apply the brake pedal and pull the parking brake handle up as far as possible. The BRAKE warning BRAKE lamp in the instrument cluster illuminates and ! P remains illuminated (when the ignition is turned ON) until the parking brake is released. Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or in 1 (First Gear) (manual transmission). The parking brake is not recommended to stop a moving vehicle. However, if the normal brakes fail, the parking brake can be used to stop your vehicle in an emergency. Since the parking brake applies only the rear brakes, the vehicle’s stopping distance will increase greatly and the handling of your vehicle will be adversely affected. 139
  • 140. Driving To release the parking brake, the brake handle may need to be pulled up slightly to release pressure before pushing in the button. Push the button on the end of the parking brake handle and push the handle down as far as possible. Driving with the parking brake applied will cause the brakes to wear out quickly and reduce fuel economy. Anti-lock brake system (ABS) On vehicles equipped with an anti-lock braking system (ABS), a noise from the hydraulic pump motor and pulsation in the pedal may be observed during ABS braking events. Pedal pulsation coupled with noise while braking under panic conditions or on loose gravel, bumps, wet or snowy roads is normal and indicates proper functioning of the vehicle’s anti-lock brake system. The ABS performs a self-check after you start the engine and begin to drive away. A brief mechanical noise may be heard during this test. This is normal. If a malfunction is found, the ABS warning light will come on. If the vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking, the vehicle should be inspected by a qualified service technician. The ABS operates by detecting the onset of wheel lockup during brake applications and compensates for this tendency. The wheels are prevented from locking even when the brakes are firmly applied. The accompanying illustration depicts the advantage of an ABS equipped vehicle (on bottom) to a non-ABS equipped vehicle (on top) during hard braking with loss of front braking traction. 140
  • 141. Driving ABS warning lamp ABS The ABS warning lamp in the instrument cluster momentarily illuminates when the ignition is turned to the ON position. If the light does not illuminate momentarily at start up, remains on or continues to flash, the ABS needs to be serviced. With the ABS light on, BRAKE the anti-lock brake system is disabled and ! P normal braking is still effective unless the brake warning light also remains illuminated with parking brake released. (If your brake warning lamp illuminates, have your vehicle serviced immediately.) Using ABS ² In an emergency or when maximum efficiency from the four-wheel ABS is required, apply continuous force on the brake. The four wheel ABS will be activated immediately, thus allowing you to retain full steering control of your vehicle and, providing there is sufficient space, will enable you to avoid obstacles and bring the vehicle to a controlled stop. ² The anti-lock system does not reduce stopping distance. Always leave enough room between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to stop. ² We recommend that you familiarize yourself with this braking technique. However, avoid taking any unnecessary risks. Hydraulic brake booster system (Hydroboost) The Hydroboost system receives fluid pressure from the power steering pump to provide power assist during braking. The sound of the pump operating may be heard by the driver, but this is a normal characteristic of the system. For Hydroboost-equipped vehicles operating under normal conditions, the noise of the fluid flowing 141
  • 142. Driving through the booster may be heard whenever the brake is applied. This condition is normal. Vehicle service is not required. If braking performance or pedal response becomes very poor, even when the pedal is strongly depressed, it may indicate the presence of air in the hydraulic system or leakage of fluid. Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible and seek service immediately. STEERING Your vehicle is equipped with power steering. Power steering uses energy from the engine to decrease the driver’s effort in steering the vehicle. To prevent damage to the power steering pump: ² Never hold the steering wheel to the extreme right or the extreme left for more than a few seconds when the engine is running. ² Do not operate the vehicle with the power steering pump fluid level below the MIN mark on the reservoir. If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort. If the steering wanders or pulls, the condition could be caused by any of the following: ² Underinflated tire(s) on any wheel(s) ² Uneven vehicle loading ² High crown in center of road ² High crosswinds ² Wheels out of alignment ² Loose or worn suspension components TRACTION CONTROLY Your vehicle may be equipped with the optional Traction Controly system. This system helps you maintain the stability and steerability of your vehicle. It is especially useful on slippery road 142
  • 143. Driving surfaces. The system operates by detecting and controlling wheel spin. The system borrows many of the electronic and mechanical elements already present in the anti-lock braking system (ABS). Wheel-speed sensors allow excess rear wheel spin to be detected by the Traction Controly portion of the ABS computer. Any excessive wheel spin is controlled by automatically applying and releasing the rear brakes in conjunction with engine torque reductions. Engine torque reduction is realized via the fully electronic spark and fuel injection systems. This process is very sensitive to driving conditions and very fast acting. The rear wheels “search” for optimum traction several times a second and adjustments are made accordingly. The Traction Controly system will allow your vehicle to make better use of available traction on slippery surfaces. The system is a driver aid which makes your vehicle easier to handle primarily on snow, ice covered and gravel roads. During Traction Controly operation, the traction control active light will illuminate, you may hear an electric motor type of sound coming from the engine compartment and the engine will not “rev-up” when you push further on the accelerator. This is normal system behavior. The Traction Controly on/off switch, located below the radio, illuminates when the system is OFF. The Traction Controly system will revert to the ON position every time the ignition is turned OFF and ON. If you should become stuck in snow or ice or on a very slippery road surface, try switching the Traction Controly system off. This may allow excess wheel spin to “dig” the vehicle out and enable a successful “rocking” maneuver. 143
  • 144. Driving If a system fault is detected the OFF indicator lamp on the traction control switch will be illuminated and your vehicle should be serviced. TRACTION-LOK AXLE (IF EQUIPPED) This axle provides added traction on slippery surfaces, particularly when one wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under normal conditions, the Traction-Lok axle functions like a standard rear axle. Extended use of other than the manufacturer’s specified size tires on a Traction-Lok rear axle could result in a permanent reduction in effectiveness. This loss of effectiveness does not affect normal driving and should not be noticeable to the driver. To reduce the risk of injury, never run the engine with one wheel off the ground, such as when changing a tire. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED) Brake-shift interlock This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is in the ON position unless brake pedal is depressed. If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in the ON position and the brake pedal depressed: 1. Apply the parking brake, turn ignition key to LOCK, then remove the key. 2. Insert the key and turn it to OFF. Apply the brake pedal and shift to N (Neutral). In the ignition OFF position, the automatic transmission shift lever can be moved from the P (Park) position without the brake pedal depressed. To avoid unwanted vehicle movement, always set the parking brake. 144
  • 145. Driving 3. Start the vehicle. If it is necessary to use the above procedure to move the gearshift lever, it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle’s brakelamps are not operating properly. Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside emergencies chapter. Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brakelamps are working. If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by shifting from forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear. Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur. Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat. Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle. If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly. See your dealer or a qualified service technician. 145
  • 146. Driving Driving with an automatic overdrive transmission with console gearshift and O/D off switch Your automatic overdrive transmission provides fully automatic operation in either D (Overdrive) or with the O/D OFF switch depressed. Driving with the gearshift lever in D (Overdrive) gives the best fuel economy for normal driving conditions. For manual control, start in 1 (First) and then shift manually. Driving with a 4–speed automatic transmission (if equipped) Use the following procedure to put your vehicle in gear. 1. Start the engine. 2. Depress and hold the brake pedal. 3. Push and hold the thumb button. 4. Move gearshift lever out of P (Park). Hold the brake pedal down while you move the gearshift lever from P (Park) to another position. If you do not hold the brake pedal down, your vehicle may move unexpectedly and injure someone. 146
  • 147. Understanding gearshift positions P (Park) Always come to a complete stop before shifting into P (Park). Make sure the gearshift lever is securely latched in P (Park). This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from turning. Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift lever is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle. R (Reverse) With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward. Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R (Reverse). N (Neutral) With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this gear. Driving 147
  • 148. Driving (Overdrive) The normal driving position for the best fuel economy. Transmission operates in gears one through four. (Overdrive) can be deactivated by pressing the transmission control switch on the gearshift lever. The transmission O/D control indicator light (TCIL) will illuminate OFF on the instrument cluster. Drive – Not shown on the display. Activate by pressing the transmission control switch on the gearshift lever with the gearshift in the position. The O/D OFF indicator will illuminate on the instrument cluster. Transmission operates in gears one through three. (Drive) provides more engine braking than (Overdrive) and is useful when: ² driving with a heavy load. ² towing a trailer up or down steep hills. ² additional engine braking is desired. If towing a trailer, refer to Driving while you tow in this chapter. 148
  • 149. Driving To return to (Overdrive) mode, press the transmission control switch. The O/D OFF indicator will no longer be illuminated. Each time the vehicle is started, the transmission will automatically return to normal overdrive mode. Every time the vehicle is shut off and restarted, you must press the transmission control switch to cancel overdrive operation if driving in overdrive is not desired. 2 (Second) Use 2 (Second) to start-up on slippery roads or to provide additional engine braking on downgrades. Transmission operates only in Second gear. 1 (First) Use 1 (Low) to provide maximum engine braking on steep downgrades. Upshifts can be made by shifting to 2 (Second) or to (Overdrive). Selecting 1 (Low) at higher speeds causes the transmission to shift to a lower gear, and will shift to 1 (Low) after vehicle decelerates to the proper speed. Forced Downshifts To gain acceleration in (Overdrive) or Drive (O/D OFF) when passing another vehicle, push the accelerator to the floor. The transmission will downshift to the appropriate gear: third, second or first gear. 149
  • 150. Driving MANUAL TRANSMISSION OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED) Using the clutch Vehicles equipped with a manual transmission have a starter interlock that prevents cranking of the engine unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed. When starting a vehicle with a manual transmission, you must: 1. Make sure the parking brake is fully 1 3 5 set. 2 4 R 2. Depress the clutch pedal fully. 3. Put the gearshift lever in neutral. 4. Start the engine and let it idle for a few 4 3 seconds. 5 5. Depress the brake 2 pedal. 6. Release the parking 1 brake. 7. Move the gearshift lever to the desired gear. 8. Release the brake pedal. 9. Slowly release the clutch pedal while slowly pressing down on the accelerator pedal. ² Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal and do not use the clutch to hold your vehicle at a standstill while waiting on a hill. These actions will greatly reduce clutch life. 150
  • 151. Driving Recommended shift speeds Do not downshift into 1 (First) when your vehicle is moving faster then 24 km/h (15 mph). This will damage the clutch. Upshift according to the following chart: Upshifts when accelerating (recommended for best fuel economy) Shift from: 1 - 2 18 km/h (11 mph) 2 - 3 31 km/h (19 mph) 3 - 4 48 km/h (30 mph) 4 - 5 64 km/h (40 mph) Parking your vehicle 1. Disengage the clutch, apply brake and shift into Neutral. 2. Set parking brake. 3. Shift into 1 (First). 1 3 5 2 4 R 151
  • 152. 4. Turn the ignition key to position 3 (OFF). 3 2 1 5 4 Do not park your vehicle in Neutral, it may move unexpectedly and injure someone. Use 1 (First) gear and set the parking brake fully. Reverse You must be at a complete stop to shift into R (Reverse). You can shift into R (Reverse) only by moving the gearshift lever through the neutral plane. R (Reverse) can not be engaged directly from 5 (5th gear). This is a feature that protects the transmission from accidentally shifting into R (Reverse) when you downshift from 5 (Fifth). Make sure that your vehicle is at a complete stop before you shift into R (Reverse). Failure to do so may damage the transmission. To shift into R (Reverse): 1 3 5 1. Bring your vehicle to 2 4 R a complete stop. 2. Hold the brake pedal down. 3. Hold the clutch pedal down. 4. Move the gearshift lever all the way to the right and pull it back into R (Reverse). 5. Release the brake pedal. 6. Slowly release the clutch pedal. Driving 152
  • 153. Removing key from ignition ² Turn the ignition key to position 3 (OFF). ² Push the release lever forward and rotate the key towards you and remove. Driving DRIVING THROUGH WATER Do not drive quickly through standing water, especially if the depth is unknown. Traction or brake capability may be limited and if the ignition system gets wet, your engine may stall. Water may also enter your engine’s air intake and severely damage your engine. If driving through deep or standing water is unavoidable, proceed very slowly. Never drive through water that is higher than the bottom of the hubs (for trucks) or the bottom of the wheel rims (for cars). Once through the water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal. Driving through deep water where the transmission vent tube is submerged may allow water into the transmission and cause internal transmission damage. Have the fluid checked and, if water is found, replace the fluid. 153
  • 154. Driving VEHICLE LOADING Before loading a vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms: ² Base Curb Weight: Weight of the vehicle including any standard equipment, fluids, lubricants, etc. It does not include occupants or aftermarket equipment. ² Payload: Combined maximum allowable weight of cargo, occupants and optional equipment. The payload equals the gross vehicle weight rating minus base curb weight. ² GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight): Base curb weight plus payload weight. The GVW is not a limit or a specification. ² GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating): Maximum permissible total weight of the base vehicle, occupants, optional equipment and cargo. The GVWR is specific to each vehicle and is listed on the Safety Certification Label on the driver’s door pillar. ² GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating): Carrying capacity for each axle system. The GAWR is specific to each vehicle and is listed on the Safety Certification Label on the driver’s door pillar. ² GCW (Gross Combined Weight): The combined weight of the towing vehicle (including occupants and cargo) and the loaded trailer. ² GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating): Maximum permissible combined weight of towing vehicle (including occupants and cargo) and the loaded trailer ² Maximum Trailer Weight Rating: Maximum weight of a trailer the vehicle is permitted to tow. The maximum trailer weight rating is determined by subtracting the vehicle curb weight for each engine/transmission combination, any required option weight for trailer towing and the weight of the driver from the GCWR for the towing vehicle. ² Maximum Trailer Weight: Maximum weight of a trailer the loaded vehicle (including occupants 154
  • 155. and cargo) is permitted to tow. It is determined by subtracting the weight of the loaded trailer towing vehicle from the GCWR for the towing vehicle. ² Trailer Weight Range: Specified weight range that the trailer must fall within that ranges from zero to the maximum trailer weight rating. Remember to figure in the tongue load of your loaded trailer when figuring the total weight. Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label. Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the originals because they may lower the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a higher limit than the originals do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations. The Safety Certification Label, found on the driver’s door pillar, lists several important vehicle weight rating limitations. Before adding any additional equipment, refer to these limitations. If you are adding weight to the front of your vehicle, (potentially including weight added to the cab), the weight added should not exceed the front axle reserve capacity (FARC). Additional frontal weight may be added to the front axle reserve capacity provided you limit your payload in other ways (i.e. restrict the number of occupants or amount of cargo carried). Always ensure that the weight of occupants, cargo and equipment being carried is within the weight limitations that have been established for your vehicle including both gross vehicle weight and front and rear gross axle weight rating limits. Under no circumstance should these limitations be exceeded. Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury. Driving 155
  • 156. Driving TRAILER TOWING Your vehicle is not equipped to tow. No towing packages are available through Ford or Lincoln/Mercury dealers. RECREATIONAL TOWING (ALL WHEELS ON THE GROUND) Follow these guidelines for your specific powertrain combination to tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground (such as behind a recreational vehicle). These guidelines are designed to ensure that your transmission is not damaged due to insufficient lubrication. All Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) vehicles: This applies to all cars and 4x2 trucks/sport utilities with rear wheel drive capability. An example of recreational towing is towing your vehicle behind a motorhome. The following recreational towing guidelines are designed to ensure that your transmission is not damaged. ² Place the transmission in N (Neutral) ² Maximum speed is 56 km/h (35 mph) ² Maximum distance is 80 km (50 miles) If a distance of 80 km (50 miles) or a speed of 56 km/h (35 mph) must be exceeded, you must disconnect the driveshaft. Ford recommends the driveshaft be removed/installed only by a qualified technician. See your local dealer for driveshaft removal/installation. Improper removal/installation of the driveshaft can cause transmission fluid loss, damage to the driveshaft and internal transmission components. 156
  • 157. Roadside Emergencies GETTING ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service is available: ² 24–hours, seven days a week ² for the New Vehicle Limited Warranty period of three years or 60,000 km (36,000 miles), whichever occurs first on Ford and Mercury vehicles, and four years or 80,000 km (50,000 miles) on Lincoln vehicles. Roadside assistance will cover: ² changing a flat tire ² jump-starts ² lock-out assistance ² limited fuel delivery ² towing of your disabled vehicle to the nearest Ford Motor Company dealership, or your selling dealer if within 56.3 km (35 miles) of the nearest Ford Motor Company dealership (one tow per disablement). Even non-warranty related tows, like accidents or getting stuck in the mud or snow, are covered (some exclusions apply, such as impound towing or repossession). Canadian customers refer to your Owner Information Guide for information on: ² Coverage period ² Exact fuel amounts ² Towing of your disabled vehicle ² Emergency travel expense reimbursement ² Travel planning benefits USING ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your wallet for quick reference. In the United States, this card is found in the Owner Guide 157
  • 158. Roadside Emergencies portfolio in the glove compartment in Ford vehicles and is mailed to you if you own a Mercury or Lincoln. In Canada, the card is found in the Owner Information Guide in the glove compartment. U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicle customers who require roadside assistance, call 1–800–241–3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 1–800–521–4140. Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call 1–800–665–2006. If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor Company will reimburse a reasonable amount. To obtain reimbursement information, U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicles customers call 1-800-241-3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 1–800–521–4140. Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information, call 1–800–665–2006. ROADSIDE COVERAGE BEYOND BASIC WARRANTY In the United States, you may purchase additional roadside assistance coverage beyond this period through the Ford Auto Club by contacting your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer. Similarly in Canada, for uninterrupted Roadside Assistance coverage, you may purchase extended coverage prior to your Basic Warranty’s Roadside Assistance expiring. For more information and enrollment, contact 1–877–294–2582 or visit our website at www.ford.ca. HAZARD FLASHER Use only in an emergency to warn traffic of vehicle breakdown, approaching danger, etc. The hazard flashers can be operated when the ignition is off. 158
  • 159. Roadside Emergencies ² The hazard lights control is located on top of the steering column. ² Depress hazard lights control to activate all hazard flashers simultaneously. ² Depress control again to turn the flashers off. FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF SWITCH FUEL RESET The fuel pump shut-off switch is a device intended to stop the electric fuel pump when your vehicle has been involved in a substantial jolt. After a collision, if the engine cranks but does not start, the fuel pump shut-off switch may have been activated. The fuel pump shut-off switch is located on the left side of the trunk between the left rear tail light and the trunk liner, and to the left of the hole in the trunk liner. If you are unable to access the switch through the hole, loosen the trunk liner near the switch by removing the cargo net hook and pulling the liner forward to expose the switch. Use the following procedure to reset the fuel pump shut-off switch. 1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. 2. Check the fuel system for leaks. 3. If no fuel leak is apparent, reset the fuel pump shut-off switch by pushing in on the reset button. 4. Turn the ignition to the ON position. Pause for a few seconds and return the key to the OFF position. 5. Make a further check for leaks in the fuel system. 159
  • 160. Roadside Emergencies FUSES AND RELAYS Fuses If electrical components in the vehicle are not working, a fuse may have blown. Blown fuses are identified by a broken wire within the fuse. Check the appropriate fuses before replacing any electrical components. Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a fire. Standard fuse amperage rating and color COLOR Fuse rating Mini fuses Standard fuses Maxi fuses 15 Cartridge maxi fuses Fuse link cartridge 2A Grey Grey — — — 3A Violet Violet — — — 4A Pink Pink — — — 5A Tan Tan — — — 7.5A Brown Brown — — — 10A Red Red — — — 15A Blue Blue — — — 20A Yellow Yellow Yellow Blue Blue 25A Natural Natural — — — 30A Green Green Green Pink Pink 40A — — Orange Green Green 50A — — Red Red Red 60A — — Blue — Yellow 70A — — Tan — Brown 80A — — Natural — Black Passenger compartment fuse panel The fuse panel is located below and to the left of the steering wheel by the brake pedal. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. 160
  • 161. Roadside Emergencies To remove a fuse use the fuse puller tool provided on the fuse panel cover. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 SEE OWNERS MANUAL FOR FUSE INFO 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 The fuses are coded as follows: Fuse/Relay Fuse Amp Location Rating 42 44 43 Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Description 1 20A Cigar lighter 2 20A Engine controls 3 — Not used 4 10A Right-hand low beam headlamp 5 15A Instrument cluster, Traction control switch 6 20A Starter motor relay 7 15A GEM, Interior lamps 8 20A Engine controls 9 30A Mach 460 subwoofers 10 10A Left—hand low beam headlamp 11 15A Back-up lamps 12 — Not used 13 15A Electronic flasher 14 — Not used 15 15A Power lumbar 161
  • 162. Roadside Emergencies Fuse/Relay Location Fuse Amp Rating Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Description 16 — Not used 17 15A Speed control servo, Shift lock actuator 18 15A Electronic flasher 19 15A Power mirror switch, GEM, Anti-theft relay, Power door locks, Door ajar switches 20 15A Convertible top switch 21 5A Instrument cluster and engine control memory 22 — Not used 23 15A A/C clutch, Defogger switch 24 30A Climate control blower motor 25 25A Luggage compartment lid release 26 30A Wiper/Washer motor, Wiper relays 27 20A Radio 28 15A GEM, Overdrive cancel switch 29 15A Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) module 30 15A Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) module 31 10A Data link connector 32 15A Radio, GEM 33 15A Stop lamp switch, Speed control deactivation switch 34 20A Instrument Cluster, CCRM, Data link connector, Securilock transceiver module 35 15A Shift lock actuator, Powertrain Control Module (PCM), Speed control servo, ABS module 36 15A Air bag control module 37 5A Adjustable illumination 38 20A High beams 39 5A GEM 40 — Not used 162
  • 163. Fuse/Relay Location Roadside Emergencies Fuse Amp Rating Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Description 41 15A Brake lamp 42 — Not used 43 20A CB Power windows 44 — Not used Power distribution box The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment. The power distribution box contains high-current fuses that protect your vehicle’s main electrical systems from overloads. Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current fuses. Always replace the cover to the power distribution box before reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid reservoirs If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to the Battery section of the Maintenance and specifications chapter. 11 MAXI 10 MAXI 9 MAXI 8 MAXI 7 MAXI 6 MAXI 5 MAXI 4 MAXI 3 MAXI 2 MAXI 1 MAXI RELAY RELAY 5 RELAY 4 RELAY 3 RELAY 2 14 MINI DIODE 1 12 MAXI 29 28 CB 27 MAXI 26 MAXI 25 MAXI 24 MINI 23 MINI 22 MINI 21 MINI 18 MINI 20 MINI 19 MINI 17 MINI 16 MINI 15 MINI 13 MINI SEE OWNERS MANUAL CONSULTER LA GUIDE 163
  • 164. Roadside Emergencies The high-current fuses are coded as follows. Fuse/Relay Location Fuse Amp Rating Power Distribution Box Description Relay 1 — Fog lamp interrupt Relay 2 — Interval wiper Relay 3 — Wiper HI/LO Relay 4 — Starter Relay 5 — Fog lamps 1 50A** (4.6L), 30A CB (3.8L) Electric cooling fan motor 2 30A** Headlamps 3 40A** Starter motor relay, Ignition switch 4 40A** Ignition switch 5 40A** Ignition switch 6 40A** Instrument cluster, Powertrain Control Module (PCM) 7 30A** Secondary air injection (3.8L only) 8 50A** Anti-lock Brake Sytsem (ABS) module 9 20A** Auxiliary power point 10 30A** Parklamps 11 30A** Rear window defrost control 12 40A** Power windows, Power locks 13 30A* MACH 1000 left amplifiers 14 20A* Fuel pump 15 30A* MACH 1000 right amplifiers 16 20A* Horn 17 20A* ABS 18 30A* Power seats 19 10A* Intercooler pump (Cobra only) 20 20A* Alternator 21 — Not used 164
  • 165. Fuse/Relay Location Roadside Emergencies Fuse Amp Rating Power Distribution Box Description 22 — Not used 23 — Not used 24 20A* A/C pressure 25 — Not used 26 30A** PCM 27 20A** Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) module, Foglamp relay 28 25A CB Convertible top 29 Diode Convertible top circuit breaker * Mini Fuses ** Maxi Fuses CHANGING THE TIRES If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually decrease your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road. The use of tire sealants is not recommended and may compromise the integrity of your tires. The use of tire sealants may also affect your tire pressure monitoring system (if equipped). Temporary spare tire information Your vehicle may have a temporary spare tire. The temporary spare tire for your vehicle is labeled as such. It is smaller than a regular tire and is designed for emergency use only. Replace this tire with a full-size tire as soon as possible. 165
  • 166. Roadside Emergencies If you use the temporary spare tire continuously or do not follow these precautions, the tire could fail, causing you to lose control of the vehicle, possibly injuring yourself or others. When driving with the temporary spare tire do not: ² use more than one temporary spare tire at a time ² exceed 80 km/h (50 mph) or drive further than 3 200 km (2 000 miles) total under any circumstances ² load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the tire pressure label on the inside of the glove compartment door ² tow a trailer ² use tire chains ² drive through an automatic car wash, because of the vehicle’s reduced ground clearance ² try to repair the temporary spare tire or remove it from its wheel ² use the wheel for any other type of vehicle Use of a temporary spare tire at any one wheel location can lead to impairment of the following: ² handling, stability and braking performance ² comfort and noise ² ground clearance and parking at curbs ² Winter driving capability Tire change procedure To prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire, be sure the parking brake is set, then block (in both directions) the wheel that is diagonally opposite (other side and end of the vehicle) to the tire being changed. 166
  • 167. Roadside Emergencies If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else could be seriously injured. 1. Park on a level surface, activate hazard flashers and set parking brake. 2. Place gearshift lever in P (Park) or R (manual transmission), turn engine OFF, and block the diagonally opposite wheel. 3. Remove the spare tire, jack and lug wrench. 4. Remove the center ornament (if equipped) from the wheel. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half turn counterclockwise but do not remove them until the wheel is raised off the ground. 167
  • 168. Roadside Emergencies 5. Put the jack in the jack notch next to the tire you are changing. Turn the jack handle clockwise until the wheel is completely off the ground. Never use the rear differential as a jacking point. To lessen the risk of personal injury, do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while changing a tire. Do not start the engine when your vehicle is on the jack. The jack is only meant for changing the tire. 6. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench. 7. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem is facing outward. Reinstall lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered. If you are using the temporary tire, the lug nut washers will not appear to be flush with the rim. This is normal only when using the temporary spare tire. 8. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise. 168
  • 169. Roadside Emergencies 9. Remove the jack and 1 fully tighten the lug nuts in the order shown. 3 4 10. Put flat tire, wheel ornament (if 5 2 equipped), jack and lug wrench away. Make sure jack is fastened so it does not rattle when you drive. 11. Unblock the wheels. Anti-theft lug nuts (if equipped) If your vehicle is equipped with this feature, one of the lug nuts on each wheel must be removed and replaced with a special key. The key and registration card are attached to the lug wrench and stored with the spare tire. If you lose the key, send the registration card to the manufacturer (not the dealer) to get a replacement key. If the lug wrench/lug nut key assembly is lost, see your nearest Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer who has access to the master set of keys. Do not use an impact wrench with the anti-theft key. To remove the anti-theft lug nut: 1. Insert the key over the locking lug nut. Make sure you hold the key square to the lug nut. If you hold the key at an angle, you could damage the key and the lug nut. 2. Place the lug nut wrench over the lug nut key and apply pressure on the key with the wrench. 3. Turn the wrench in a counterclockwise direction to remove the lug nut. To install the anti-theft lug nut: 1. Insert the key over the locking lug nut. 2. Place the lug nut wrench over the lug nut key and apply pressure on the key with the wrench. 169
  • 170. Roadside Emergencies 3. Install the lug nut by turning the wrench clockwise. JUMP STARTING YOUR VEHICLE The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in injury or vehicle damage. Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin, eyes and clothing, if contacted. Do not attempt to push-start your vehicle. Automatic transmissions do not have push-start capability; also, the catalytic converter may become damaged. Preparing your vehicle When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the transmission may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation. 1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle. 2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could damage the vehicle’s electrical system. 3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving parts. 4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before you attach the battery cables. Ensure the vent caps are tight and level. 5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect any electrical surges. Turn all other accessories off. 170
  • 171. Roadside Emergencies Connecting the jumper cables + – + – 1. Connect the positive (+) booster cable to the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery. Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the assisting (boosting) battery. + – + – 2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the assisting battery. + – + – 3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the assisting battery. 171
  • 172. Roadside Emergencies + – + – 4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed metal part of the stalled vehicle’s engine, away from the battery and the carburetor/fuel injection system. Do not use fuel lines, engine rocker covers or the intake manifold as grounding points. Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative (-) terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery. 5. Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of both engines, or any fuel delivery system parts. Jump starting 1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at moderately increased speed. 2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle. 3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables. 172
  • 173. Roadside Emergencies Removing the jumper cables + – + – Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were connected. 1. Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface. Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the assisting (boosting) battery. + – + – 2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) connection of the booster vehicle’s battery. + – + – 3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster vehicle’s battery. 173
  • 174. Roadside Emergencies + – + – 4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the disabled vehicle’s battery. After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can relearn its idle conditions. 174
  • 175. Roadside Emergencies WRECKER TOWING If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing service or, if you are a member, your roadside assistance center. It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift or flatbed equipment. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor Company has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure. If your vehicle is to be towed from the rear using wheel lift equipment, the front wheels must be placed on a dolly to prevent damage to the front fascia (bumper). If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle damage may occur. Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle. 175
  • 176. Customer Assistance GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED At home Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada have authorized dealerships to service your vehicle. It is preferred that you return to the authorized dealer where your vehicle was purchased when warranty repairs are needed. However, you may also take your vehicle to another Ford Motor Company or Ford of Canada dealership authorized for warranty repairs. Certain warranty repairs require special training though, so not all dealers are authorized to perform all warranty repairs. That means that depending on the warranty repair needed, the vehicle may need to be taken to another dealer. If a particular dealership cannot assist you, then contact the Customer Relationship Center. If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you are receiving, follow these steps: 1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your selling/servicing dealership. 2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales Manager or Service Manager at the dealership. 3. If the inquiry or concern cannot be resolved at the dealership level, please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center. Away from home If you own a Ford or Mercury vehicle and are away from home when your vehicle needs service, or if you need more help than the dealership could provide, after following the steps described above, contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealership to help you. 176
  • 177. Customer Assistance In the United States: Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center 16800 Executive Plaza Drive P.O. Box 6248 Dearborn, Michigan 48121 1-800-392-3673 (FORD) (TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952) www.ford.com In Canada: Customer Relationship Centre Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited P.O. Box 2000 Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4 1-800-565-3673 (FORD) www.ford.ca If you own a Lincoln vehicle and are away from home when your vehicle needs service, or if you need more help than the dealership could provide, after following the steps described above, contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealership to help you. In the United States: Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center 16800 Executive Plaza Drive P.O. Box 6248 Dearborn, Michigan 48121 1-800-521-4140 (TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952) www.ford.com In Canada: Customer Relationship Centre Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited P.O. Box 2000 Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4 1-800-565-3673 (FORD) www.ford.ca 177
  • 178. Customer Assistance In order to help you service your Ford or Lincoln Mercury vehicle, please have the following information available when contacting a Customer Relationship Center: ² Your telephone number (home and business) ² The name of the dealer and the city where the dealership is located ² The year and make of your vehicle ² The date of vehicle purchase ² The current odometer reading ² The vehicle identification number (VIN) If you still have a complaint involving a warranty dispute, you may wish to contact the Dispute Settlement Board (U.S.). In some states (in the U.S.) you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also allowed a final repair attempt in some states. In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the Dispute Settlement Board before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing replacement or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This dispute handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or state replacement or repurchase laws. FORD EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN You can get more protection for your new car or light truck by purchasing Ford Extended Service Plan (Ford ESP) coverage. Ford ESP is an optional service contract which is backed by Ford Motor Company or Ford Motor Service Company (in the U.S.) and Ford of Canada (in Canada). It provides the following: ² Benefits during the warranty period depending on the plan you purchase (such as: reimbursement for rentals; coverage for certain maintenance and wear items). 178
  • 179. Customer Assistance ² Protection against covered repair costs after your Bumper-to-Bumper Warranty expires. You may purchase Ford ESP from any participating Ford and Lincoln Mercury and Ford of Canada dealer. There are several plans available in various time, distance and deductible combinations which can be tailored to fit your own driving needs. Ford ESP also offers reimbursement benefits for towing and rental coverage. When you buy Ford ESP, you receive Peace-of-Mind protection throughout the United States and Canada, provided by a network of more than 5,000 participating Ford or Lincoln Mercury and Ford of Canada dealers. If you did not take advantage of the Ford Extended Service Plan at the time of purchasing your vehicle, you may still be eligible. Please contact your dealer for further information. Since this information is subject to change, please ask your dealer for complete details about Ford Extended Service Plan coverage options, or visit the Ford ESP website at www.ford-esp.com. THE DISPUTE SETTLEMENT BOARD (U.S. ONLY) The Dispute Settlement Board is: ² an independent, third-party arbitration program for warranty disputes. ² available free to owners and lessees of qualifying Ford Motor Company vehicles. The Dispute Settlement Board may not be available in all states. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations, modify procedures and/or to discontinue this service without notice and without incurring obligations per applicable state law. What kinds of cases does the Board review? Unresolved warranty repair concerns or vehicle performance concerns as on Ford and Lincoln Mercury cars and Ford and Lincoln Mercury light 179
  • 180. Customer Assistance trucks which are within the terms of any applicable written new vehicle warranty are eligible for review, except those involving: ² a non-Ford product ² a non-Ford dealership ² sales disputes between customer and dealer except those associated with warranty repairs or concerns with the vehicle’s performance as designed ² a request for reimbursement of consequential expenses unless a service or product concern is being reviewed ² items not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty (including maintenance and wear items) ² alleged personal injury/property damage claims ² cases currently in litigation ² vehicles not used primarily for family, personal or household purposes (except in states where the Dispute Settlement Board is required to review commercial vehicles) ² vehicles with non-U.S. warranties Concerns are ineligible for review if the New Vehicle Limited Warranty has expired at receipt of your application and, in certain states eligibility is dependent upon the customer’s possession of the vehicle. Eligibility may differ according to state law. For example, see the unique brochures for California, West Virginia, Georgia and Wisconsin purchasers/lessees. Board membership The Board consists of: ² Three consumer representatives ² A Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealership representative Consumer candidates for Board membership are recruited and trained by an independent consulting 180
  • 181. firm. The dealership Board member is chosen from Ford and Lincoln Mercury dealership management, recognized for their business leadership qualities. What the Board needs To have your case reviewed you must complete the application in the DSB brochure and mail it to the address provided on the application form. Some states will require you to use certified mail, with return receipt requested. Your application is reviewed and, if it is determined to be eligible, you will receive an acknowledgment indicating: ² The file number assigned to your application. ² The toll-free phone number of the DSB’s independent administrator. Your dealership and a Ford Motor Company representative will then be asked to submit statements. To properly review your case, the Board needs the following information: ² Legible copies of all documents and maintenance or repair orders relevant to the case. ² The year, make, model, and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) listed on your vehicle ownership license. ² The date of repair(s) and mileage at the time of occurrence(s). ² The current mileage. ² The name of the dealer(s) who sold or serviced the vehicle. ² A brief description of your unresolved concern. ² A brief summary of the action taken by the dealer(s) and Ford Motor Company. ² The names (if known) of all the people you contacted at the dealership(s). ² A description of the action you expect to resolve your concern. Customer Assistance 181
  • 182. Customer Assistance You will receive a letter of explanation if your application does not qualify for Board review. Oral presentations If you would like to make an oral presentation, indicate YES to question 6 on the application. While it is your right to make an oral presentation before the Board, this is not a requirement and the Board will decide the case whether or not an oral presentation is made. An oral presentation may be requested by the Board as well. Making a decision Board members review all available information related to each complaint, including oral presentations, and arrive at a fair and impartial decision. Board review may be terminated at any time by either party. Every effort is made to decide the case within 40 days of the date that all requested information is received by the Board. Since the Board generally meets once a month, it may take longer for the Board to consider some cases. After a case is reviewed, the Board mails you a decision letter and a form on which to accept or reject the Board’s decision. The decisions of the Board are binding on Ford (and, in some cases, on the dealer) but not on consumers who are free to pursue other remedies available to them under state or federal law. To request a DSB Brochure/Application For a brochure/application, speak to your dealer or write/call to the Board at the following address/phone number: Dispute Settlement Board P.O. Box 5120 Southfield, MI 48086–5120 1–800–428–3718 You may also contact the North American Customer Relationship Center at 1-800-392-3673 (Ford), TDD 182
  • 183. Customer Assistance for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952 or by writing to the Center at the following address: Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center 16800 Executive Plaza Drive P.O. Box 6248 Dearborn, Michigan 48121 UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY) In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford and the dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial third party mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). The CAMVAP program is a straight-forward and relatively speedy alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal proceedings. In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final; the arbitrator’s award is binding both to you and Ford of Canada. CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces. For more information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685. GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel. 183
  • 184. Customer Assistance If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact a district or owner relations/customer relationship office. The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company/Ford of Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper fuel. In the United States, using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle back into the U.S. If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in Central or South America, the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the nearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannot help you, write or call: FORD MOTOR COMPANY WORLDWIDE DIRECT MARKET OPERATIONS 1555 Fairlane Drive Fairlane Business Park #3 Allen Park, Michigan 48101 U.S.A. Telephone: (313) 594-4857 FAX: (313) 390-0804 If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest Ford dealership. If the dealership employees cannot help you, they can direct you to the nearest Ford affiliate office. If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of the U.S. or Canada, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and new address with Ford Motor Company Worldwide Direct Market Operations. ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at: 184
  • 185. Customer Assistance HELM, INCORPORATED P.O. Box 07150 Detroit, Michigan 48207 Or call: For a free publication catalog, order toll free: 1-800-782-4356 Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website: www.helminc.com. (Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or money order.) Obtaining a French owner’s guide French Owner’s Guides can be obtained from your dealer or by writing to Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited, Service Publications, P.O. Box 1580, Station B, Mississauga, Ontario L4Y 4G3. IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY) California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund or replacement vehicle. California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership of a new vehicle or the first 29,000 km (18,000 miles), whichever occurs first: 1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR 185
  • 186. Customer Assistance 2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of the vehicle) OR 3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time) In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the following address: Ford Motor Company 16800 Executive Plaza Drive Mail Drop 3NE-B Dearborn, MI 48126 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY) If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor Company. To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1–800–424–9393 (or 366–0123 in the Washington D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA U.S. Department of Transportation Washington, D.C. 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline. 186
  • 187. Cleaning WASHING THE EXTERIOR Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral Ph shampoo, such as Detail Wash (ZC-3–A), which is available from your dealer. ² Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted surfaces. ² Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or during exposure to strong, direct sunlight. ² Always use a clean sponge or carwash mitt with plenty of water for best results. ² Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to eliminate water spotting. ² It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause damage to the vehicle. ² Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s paintwork and trim over time. ² Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a car wash. ² Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle, wash off as soon as possible. WAXING Applying a polymer paint sealant to your vehicle every six months will assist in reducing minor scratches and paint damage. ² Wash the vehicle first. ² Do not use waxes that contain abrasives. ² Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body (low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time. 187
  • 188. Cleaning PAINT CHIPS Your dealer has touch-up paint and sprays to match your vehicle’s color. Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the driver’s door jam) to your dealer to ensure you get the correct color. ² Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips. ² Always read the instructions before using the products. ALUMINUM WHEELS AND COVERS Aluminum wheel rims or covers are coated with a clearcoat paint finish. In order to maintain their shine: ² Clean with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37–A), which is available from your dealer. ² Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or covers. ² Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your wheel rims or covers. Chemical-strength cleaners, or cleaning chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust and dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time. ² Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent. ² To remove tar and grease, use Ford Extra Strength Tar and Road Oil Removal (B7A-19520–AA), available from your dealer. ENGINE Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing: ² Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause damage. 188
  • 189. Cleaning ² Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the engine block or other engine components. ² Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20) on all parts that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean. ² Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning the engine. ² 3.8L OHV V6 engine ² 4.6L SOHC V8 engine ² Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running; water in the running engine may cause internal damage. 189
  • 190. Cleaning PLASTIC (NON-PAINTED) EXTERIOR PARTS Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are available from your dealer. ² For routine cleaning, use Detail Wash (ZC-3–A). ² If tar or grease spots are present, use Ford Extra Strength Tar and Road Oil Removal (B7A-19520–AA). WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES The windshield, rear window and wiper blades should be cleaned regularly. If the wiper does not wipe properly, substances on the windshield, rear window or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, tree sap, or other organic contamination. To clean these items, please follow these tips: ² The windshield or rear window may be cleaned with a non-abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (ZC-23), available from your dealer. ² Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches. ² Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts. ² Wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or windshield washer solution. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear worn or do not function properly. INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CLUSTER LENS Clean the instrument panel with a damp cloth, then dry with a dry cloth. ² Avoid cleaners or polish that increase the gloss of the upper portion of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the driver from undesirable windshield reflection. 190
  • 191. Cleaning Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of the air bag system. ² Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the painted surfaces. INTERIOR For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts and seats equipped with side air bags: ² Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner. ² Remove light stains and soil with Ford Extra Strength Upholstery Cleaner (E8AZ-19523–AA). ² If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14). ² Never saturate the seat covers with cleaning solution. ² Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of the seat materials. Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle’s safety belts, as these actions may weaken the belt webbing. Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning the seat where the side air bag is mounted. Such products may contaminate the side air bag system and affect performance of the side air bag in a collision. The air bag may not function correctly and not provide any injury reduction benefits. 191
  • 192. Cleaning LEATHER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED) Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective coating over the leather. ² To clean, use a soft cloth with Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-11–A). Dry the area with a soft cloth. ² To help maintain its resiliency and color, use the Motorcraft Deluxe Leather Care Kit (ZC-11–D), available from your authorized dealer. ² Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing of the clear, protective coating. CONVERTIBLE TOP AND PADDED MOLDING Wash with Motorcraft Triple Clean (ZC-13), which is available from your dealer. ² Do not use stiff bristle brushes or abrasive materials or cleaners. ² Hot waxes applied by commercial car washes can affect the cleanability of vinyl material. ² Using high water pressure or wand-type car washes against the convertible top and windows may cause water leaks and possible seal damage. UNDERBODY Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and door drain holes free from packed dirt. FORD, LINCOLN AND MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS Your Ford, Lincoln or Mercury dealer has many quality products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. These quality products have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs; they are custom designed to 192
  • 193. Cleaning complement the style and appearance of your vehicle. Each product is made from high quality materials that meet or exceed rigid specifications. For best results, use the following products or products of equivalent quality: Motorcraft Custom Clearcoat Polish (ZC–8–A) Ford Custom Vinyl Protectant* (not available in Canada) (F2AZ—19530–A) Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-93) Motorcraft Vinyl Conditioner (Canada only) (CXC-94) Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (not available in Canada) (ZC-11–A) Ford Extra Strength Tar and Road Oil Remover* (not available in Canada) (B7A-19520–AA) Ford Extra Strength Upholstery Cleaner (not available in Canada) (E8AZ-19523–AA) Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15) Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37–A) Motorcraft Dash and Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-38–A) Motorcraft Car Care Kit (ZC-26) Ford Premium Car Wash Concentrate (F2SZ-19523–WC) Motorcraft Carlite Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100) Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14) Motorcraft Tire Detailer (ZC-28) Motorcraft Triple Clean (ZC-13) Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (not available in Canada) (ZC-23) Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20) * May be sold with the Motorcraft name 193
  • 194. Maintenance and Specifications SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS To help you service your vehicle: ² We highlight do-it-yourself items in the engine compartment for easy location. ² We provide a scheduled maintenance guide which makes tracking routine service easy. If your vehicle requires professional service, your dealership can provide the necessary parts and service. Check your Warranty Guide/Owner Information Guide to find out which parts and services are covered. Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts conforming to specifications. Motorcraft parts are designed and built to provide the best performance in your vehicle. PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE Be especially careful when inspecting or servicing your vehicle. ² Do not work on a hot engine. ² When the engine is running, keep loose clothing, jewelry or long hair away from moving parts. ² Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation. ² Keep all lit cigarettes, open flames and other lit material away from the battery and all fuel related parts. If you disconnect the battery, the engine must “relearn” its idle conditions before your vehicle will drive properly, as explained in the Battery section in this chapter. Working with the engine off ² Automatic transmission: 1. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park). 194
  • 195. Maintenance and Specifications 2. Turn off the engine and remove the key. 3. Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly. ² Manual transmission: 1. Set the parking brake. 2. Depress the clutch and place the gearshift in 1 (First). 3. Turn off the engine and remove the key. 4. Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly. Working with the engine on ² Automatic transmission: 1. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park). 2. Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly. Note: Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running. ² Manual transmission: 1. Set the parking brake, depress the clutch and place the gearshift in neutral. 2. Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly. Note: Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running. The cooling fan is automatic and may come on at any time. Always disconnect the negative terminal of the battery before working near the fan. 195
  • 196. Maintenance and Specifications OPENING THE HOOD 1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release handle located under the bottom left corner of the instrument panel. HOOD 2. Go to the front of the vehicle and release the auxiliary latch that is located under the front center of the hood. 3. Lift the hood and secure it with the prop rod. 196
  • 197. Maintenance and Specifications IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3.8L OHV V6 engine 1 1. Engine oil filler cap 2. Engine oil dipstick 3. Brake fluid reservoir 4. Power distribution box 5. Windshield washer fluid reservoir 6. Battery 7. Power steering fluid reservoir 8. Engine coolant reservoir 9. Air filter assembly 10. Automatic transmission fluid dipstick (if equipped) 6 10 2 3 4 5 9 8 7 197
  • 198. Maintenance and Specifications 4.6L SOHC V8 engine 1. Engine oil dipstick 2. Brake fluid reservoir 3. Power distribution box 4. Windshield washer fluid reservoir 5. Battery 6. Engine coolant reservoir 7. Power steering fluid reservoir 8. Engine oil filler cap 9. Air filter assembly 10. Automatic transmission fluid dipstick (if equipped) 198
  • 199. Maintenance and Specifications WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID Check the washer fluid whenever you stop for fuel. The reservoir is highlighted with a symbol. Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low. In very cold weather, do not fill the reservoir completely. Only use a washer fluid that meets Ford specification ESR-M17P5–A . Refer to Lubricant specifications in this chapter. State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive. Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system. Note: Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir. Washer fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system components. ENGINE OIL Checking the engine oil Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the appropriate intervals for checking the engine oil. 1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground. 2. Turn the engine off and wait 5 to 10 minutes for the oil to drain into the oil pan. 3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) (automatic transmissions) or 1 (First) (manual transmissions). 4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat. 199
  • 200. Maintenance and Specifications 5. Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level indicator (dipstick). ² 3.8L V6 engine ² 4.6L SOHC V8 engine 6. Wipe the indicator clean. Insert the indicator fully, then remove it again. ² If the oil level is between the MIN—MAX marks, the oil level is acceptable. DO NOT ADD OIL. ² If the oil level is below the MIN mark, add enough oil to raise the level within the MIN—MAX range. ² 3.8L V6 engine MIN MAX MIN MAX 200
  • 201. Maintenance and Specifications ² 4.6L SOHC V8 engine ² Oil levels above the MAX mark may cause engine damage. Some oil must be removed from the engine by a service technician. 7. Put the indicator back in and ensure it is fully seated. Adding engine oil 1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engine oil in this chapter. 2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal range, add only certified engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the engine oil filler cap and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening. 3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the MAX mark on the engine oil level indicator (dipstick). 4. Install the indicator and ensure it is fully seated. 5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise 1/4 of a turn until three clicks are heard or until the cap is fully seated. To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the engine oil level indicator and/or the engine oil filler cap removed. 201
  • 202. Maintenance and Specifications Engine oil and filter recommendations Look for this certification trademark. SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended. Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the American Petroleum Institute (API). Use Motorcraft or an equivalent oil meeting Ford specification WSS-M2C153–H. SAE 5W-20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and durability performance meeting all requirements for your vehicle’s engine. Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, oil treatments or engine treatments. They are unnecessary and could, under certain conditions, lead to engine damage which is not covered by your warranty. Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule listed in the scheduled maintenance guide. Ford production and aftermarket (Motorcraft) oil filters are designed for added engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used that does not meet Ford material and design specifications, start-up engine noises or knock may be experienced. It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter (or another brand meeting Ford specifications) for your engine application. 202
  • 203. Maintenance and Specifications BATTERY Your vehicle is equipped with a Motorcraft maintenance-free battery which normally does not require additional water during its life of service. However, for severe usage or in high temperature climates, check the battery electrolyte level. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the service interval schedules. Keep the electrolyte level in each cell up to the “level indicator”. Do not overfill the battery cells. If the electrolyte level in the battery is low, you can add plain tap water to the battery, as long as you do not use hard water (water with a high mineral or alkali content). If possible, however, try to only fill the battery cells with distilled water. If the battery needs water often, have the charging system checked. If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled after the battery has been cleaned or replaced. For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to the battery terminals. If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the acid with a solution of baking soda and water. 203
  • 204. Maintenance and Specifications Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted substances to come near the battery. When working near the battery, always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide proper ventilation. When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or battery. Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners. Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately. Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling. Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer, some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and performance. To begin this process: 1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake. 2. Put the gearshift in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or the neutral position (manual transmission), turn off all accessories and start the engine. 204
  • 205. Maintenance and Specifications 3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature. 4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute. 5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute. 6. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process. ² The vehicle may need to be driven 16 km (10 miles) or more to relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy. ² If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle trim is eventually relearned. When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the transmission must relearn its adaptive strategy. As a result of this, the transmission may shift firmly. This operation is considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time the adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation to its optimum shift feel. If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed, the clock and the preset radio stations must be reset once the battery is reconnected. ² Always dispose of LEAD RETURN automotive batteries in a responsible manner. Follow your local authorized standards for disposal. Call your local authorized RECYCLE recycling center to find out more about recycling automotive batteries. 205
  • 206. Maintenance and Specifications ENGINE COOLANT Checking engine coolant The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the mileage intervals in the scheduled maintenance guide. The coolant concentration should be maintained at 50/50 coolant and water, which equates to a freeze point of -36° C (-34° F). Coolant concentration testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester (such as the Rotunda Battery and Antifreeze Tester, 014–R1060). The level of coolant should be maintained at the “cold full” of “cold fill range” level in the coolant reservoir. If the level falls below, add coolant per the instructions in the Adding Engine Coolant section. Your vehicle was factory-filled with a 50/50 engine coolant and water concentration. If the concentration of coolant falls below 40% or above 60%, the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly. A 50–50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following: ² freeze protection down to -36° C (-34° F) ² boiling protection up to 129° C (265° F) ² protection against rust and other forms of corrosion ² enables calibrated gages to function properly ² 3.8L OHV V6 engine 206
  • 207. Maintenance and Specifications ² 4.6L SOHC V8 engine When the engine is cold, check the level of the engine coolant in the reservoir. ² The engine coolant should be at the “cold fill level” as listed on the engine coolant reservoir. ² Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for service interval schedules. ² Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your vehicle in this chapter. If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval, the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir is low or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Adding engine coolant in this chapter. Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine coolant, antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified function and vehicle location. Adding engine coolant When adding coolant, make sure it is a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water. Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir, when the engine is cool, until the appropriate fill level is obtained. Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot. Steam and scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. 207
  • 208. Maintenance and Specifications Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant could make it difficult to see through the windshield. The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with either green-colored Motorcraft Premium Engine Coolant meeting Ford specification ESE-M97B44–A or yellow-colored Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant meeting Ford Specification WSS-M97B51–A1. To determine your vehicle’s coolant type (color), check your coolant reservoir. ² Add Motorcraft Premium Engine Coolant (green-colored), VC-4–A (U.S.) or CXC-10 (Canada) or Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant (yellow-colored), VC-7–A (VC-7–B in Oregon), depending on the type of coolant originally equipped in your vehicle. If you are unsure which type of coolant your vehicle requires, check your coolant reservoir or contact your local dealer. Note: Use of Motorcraft Cooling System Stop Leak Pellets, VC-6, darkens the color of Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant from yellow to golden tan. ² Do not add/mix an orange-colored, extended life coolant such as Motorcraft Speciality Orange Engine Coolant, VC-2 (US) or CXC-209 (Canada), meeting Ford specification WSS-M97B44–D with the factory-filled coolant. Mixing Motorcraft Speciality Orange Engine Coolant or any orange-colored extended life product with your factory filled coolant can result in degraded corrosion protection. ² A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case of emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled 208
  • 209. Maintenance and Specifications water as soon as possible. Water alone (without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion, overheating or freezing. ² Do not use alcohol, methanol or brine or any engine coolants mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or freezing. ² Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine coolant. ² Do not mix with recycled coolant unless from a Ford-approved recycling process (see Use of Recycled Engine Coolant section). To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap. The cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly. If you must remove the pressure relief cap or radiator cap (depending upon engine application), follow these steps to avoid personal injury: 1. Before you remove the cap, turn the engine off and let it cool. 2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly turn cap counterclockwise until pressure begins to release. 3. Step back while the pressure releases. 4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap. Engine coolant refill procedure-3.8L V6 engine Note: Use the following procedure when refilling the cooling system of a vehicle equipped with a 3.8L V6 engine. Failure to follow this warning may result in damage to the engine and engine cooling system. 209
  • 210. Maintenance and Specifications The following procedure should be used when refilling the cooling system of a 3.8L V6 engine after it has been drained or become extremely low. 1. Remove the cap 2 from the engine coolant reservoir. 1 3 2. Open the cooling system vent plug. 3. Remove the radiator cap as previously outlined. 4. Add a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water to the radiator until full. 5. Add a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water to the engine coolant reservoir until the coolant level is at the “cold fill level” as listed on the reservoir. 6. Close the cooling system vent plug. 7. Reinstall the engine coolant reservoir cap. 8. Reinstall the radiator cap. 9. Start and idle the engine until the upper radiator hose is warm (this indicates the thermostat is open and coolant is flowing through the entire system). 10. Immediately shut the engine off. 11. Wrap a thick cloth around the radiator cap and cautiously remove the radiator cap. 12. Add a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water to the radiator until full. 13. Reinstall the radiator cap. 14. Check the coolant level in the reservoir before you drive your vehicle the next few times (with the engine cool). 15. If necessary, add a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water to the engine coolant reservoir until the coolant level is at the “cold fill level” as listed on the reservoir. If you are unsure of how to operate the cooling system vent plug when adding engine coolant to the 3.8L V6 engine, contact your dealer. 210
  • 211. Maintenance and Specifications Engine coolant refill procedure-4.6L V8 engine The following procedure should be used when refilling the cooling system of a 4.6L V8 engine after it has been drained or become extremely low. 1. Remove the pressure relief cap from the engine coolant reservoir as previously outlined. 2. Slowly add a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water to the engine coolant reservoir until the coolant level is at the “cold fill level” as listed on the reservoir. 3. Reinstall the pressure relief cap. 4. Start and idle the engine until the upper radiator hose is warm (this indicates the thermostat is open and coolant is flowing through the entire system). 5. Shut the engine off and let it cool. 6. Remove the pressure relief cap from the engine coolant reservoir as previously outlined. 7. Add a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water to the engine coolant reservoir until the coolant level is at the “cold fill level” as listed on the reservoir. 8. Reinstall the pressure relief cap. 9. Check the coolant level in the reservoir before you drive your vehicle the next few times (with the engine cool). 10. If necessary, add a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water to the engine coolant reservoir until the coolant level is at the “cold fill level” as listed on the reservoir. After any coolant has been added, check the coolant concentration see Checking Engine Coolant section). If the concentration is not 50/50 (protection to –34° F/–36° C), drain some coolant and adjust the concentration. It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50/50 coolant concentration. Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If necessary, add 211
  • 212. Maintenance and Specifications enough 50/50 concentration of engine coolant and distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level. If you have to add more than 1.0 liter (1.0 quart) of engine coolant per month, have your dealer check the engine cooling system. Your cooling system may have a leak. Operating an engine with a low level of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine damage. Recycled engine coolant Ford Motor Company recommends the use of a recycled engine coolant produced by Ford-approved processes in vehicles originally equipped with Motorcraft Premium Engine Coolant (green-colored). However, not all coolant recycling processes produce coolant that meets Ford specification ESE-M97B44–A. Use of such coolant may harm the engine and cooling system components. Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine coolant in vehicles originally equipped with Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet available. Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling and disposing of automotive fluids. Coolant refill capacity To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, refer to Refill capacities in this chapter. Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant in this chapter. Severe climates If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than –36° C [–34° F]): ² It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration above 50%. 212
  • 213. Maintenance and Specifications ² NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%. ² Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% will decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage. ² Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the winter months. If you drive in extremely hot climates: ² It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration above 40%. ² NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%. ² Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage. ² Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage. ² Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate protection at the temperatures in which you drive. Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system and engine protection. 213
  • 214. Maintenance and Specifications WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS Important safety precautions Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire. The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may spray out and injure you or others. If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive pressure or vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible personal injury. Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or mishandled. Gasoline may contain benzene, which is a cancer-causing agent. Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel: ² Extinguish all smoking materials and any open flames before fueling your vehicle. ² Always turn off the vehicle before fueling. ² Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if swallowed can cause death or permanent 214
  • 215. Maintenance and Specifications injury. If fuel is swallowed, call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are immediately apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours. ² Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases, excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious illness and permanent injury. ² Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could lead to permanent injury. ² Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation. ² Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors, or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse reaction. When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never smoke while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions. Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes. The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an ungrounded fuel container. 215
  • 216. Maintenance and Specifications Use the following guidelines to avoid static build-up when filling an ungrounded fuel container: ² Place approved fuel container on the ground. ² DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the cargo area). ² Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while filling. ² DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill position. Fuel Filler Cap Your fuel tank filler cap has an indexed design with a 1/8 turn on/off feature. When fueling your vehicle: 1. Turn the engine off. 2. Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise 1/8 of a turn until it stops. 3. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe. 4. To install the cap, align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the filler pipe. 5. Turn the filler cap clockwise 1/8 of a turn until it stops. “Check Fuel Cap” illuminates when the ignition is turned to the ON position to ensure your bulb is working. When this light turns on, check the fuel filler cap. Continuing to operate the vehicle with the Check Fuel Cap light on, can activate the Service Engine Soon warning. When the fuel filler cap is properly re-installed, the light(s) will turn off after a period of normal driving. It may take a long period of time for the system to detect an improperly installed fuel filler cap. If you must replace the fuel filler cap, replace it with a fuel filler cap that is designed for your vehicle. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the correct genuine Ford or Motorcraft fuel filler cap is not used. 216
  • 217. Maintenance and Specifications The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may spray out and injure you or others. If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive pressure or vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible personal injury. Choosing the right fuel Use only UNLEADED FUEL. The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law and could damage your vehicle. Do not use fuel containing methanol. It can damage critical fuel system components. Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic compounds, including manganese-based compounds containing MMT. Repairs to correct the effects of using a fuel for which your vehicle was not designed may not be covered by your warranty. Octane recommendations Your vehicle is designed to use 87 “Regular” unleaded gasoline with pump (R+M)/2 METHOD (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87. We do not recommend the use of gasolines labeled as “Regular” that are sold with octane ratings of 86 or lower in high altitude areas. Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel with the recommended octane rating, see your dealer or a qualified service technician to prevent any engine damage. 217
  • 218. Maintenance and Specifications Fuel quality If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation driveability problems during a cold start, try a different brand of “Regular” unleaded gasoline. “Premium” unleaded gasoline is not recommended (particularly in the United States) because it may cause these problems to become more pronounced. If the problems persist, see your dealer or a qualified service technician. It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane rating. Aftermarket products could cause damage to the fuel system. Repairs to correct the effects of using an aftermarket product in your fuel may not be covered by your warranty. Many of the world’s automakers issued the World-wide Fuel Charter that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle. Gasolines that meet the World-wide Fuel Charter should be used when available. Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the World-wide Fuel Charter. In Canada, look for fuels that display the Auto Makers’ Choicey logo. Cleaner air Ford endorses the use of reformulated “cleaner-burning” gasolines to improve air quality. Running out of fuel Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse affect on powertrain components. If you have run out of fuel: 218
  • 219. Maintenance and Specifications ² You may need to cycle the ignition from OFF to ON several times after refueling, to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to the engine. ² Your “Service Engine Soon” indicator may come on. For more information on the “Service Engine Soon” indicator, refer to the Instrument cluster chapter. Fuel Filter For fuel filter replacement, see your dealer or a qualified service technician. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the appropriate intervals for changing the fuel filter. Replace the fuel filter with an authorized Motorcraft part. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel system if an authorized Motorcraft fuel filter is not used. ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY Measuring techniques Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or fuel gauge readings are NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1,600 km (1,000 miles) of driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more accurate measurement after 3,000 km–5,000 km (2,000 miles-3,000 miles). Filling the tank The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Refill capacities section of this chapter. The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the empty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the amount of 219
  • 220. Maintenance and Specifications fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty. Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty. The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank. For consistent results when filling the fuel tank: ² Turn the engine/ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling, an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running. ² Use the same filling rate setting (low — medium — high) each time the tank is filled. ² Allow no more than 2 automatic click-offs when filling. ² Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating. ² Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand. ² Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the same direction each time you fill up. ² Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time. Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent. Calculating fuel economy 1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading (in kilometers or miles). 2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (in liters or gallons). 3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record the current odometer reading. 220
  • 221. Maintenance and Specifications 4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer reading. 5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel economy: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total kilometers traveled. Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used. Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel economy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy. Driving style — good driving and fuel economy habits Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change a number of variables and improve your fuel economy. Habits ² Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel. ² Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel economy. ² Idling for long periods of time (greater than one minute) may waste fuel. ² Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop. ² Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy. ² Slow down gradually. ² Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 88 km/h [55 mph] uses 15% less fuel than traveling at 105 km/h [65 mph]). ² Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy. 221
  • 222. Maintenance and Specifications ² Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy. ² You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if unnecessary shifting between third and fourth gear occurs. Unnecessary shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel economy. ² Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may reduce fuel economy. ² Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel economy. ² Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving. Maintenance ² Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size. ² Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel economy. ² Use recommended engine oil. Refer to Lubricant specifications in this chapter. ² Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow the recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks found in your vehicle scheduled maintenance guide. Conditions ² Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy at any speed. ² Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately 0.4 km/L [1 mpg] is lost for every 180 kg [400 lb] of weight carried). ² Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example bug deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski/luggage racks) may reduce fuel economy. ² Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy. ² Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first 12–16 km (8–10 miles) of driving. 222
  • 223. Maintenance and Specifications ² Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to driving on hilly terrain. ² Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal. ² Close windows for high speed driving. EPA window sticker Every new vehicle should have the EPA window sticker. Contact your dealer if the window sticker is not supplied with your vehicle. The EPA window sticker should be your guide for the fuel economy comparisons with other vehicles. It is important to note the box in the lower left corner of the window sticker. These numbers represent the Range of L/100 km (MPG) expected on the vehicle under optimum conditions. Your fuel economy may vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions. EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic converter and other emission control components continue to work properly: ² Use only the specified fuel listed. ² Avoid running out of fuel. ² Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at high speeds. ² Have the items listed in your scheduled maintenance guide performed according to the specified schedule. The scheduled maintenance items listed in the scheduled maintenance guide are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system. If other than Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts are used for maintenance replacements or for 223
  • 224. Maintenance and Specifications service of components affecting emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability. Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire. Illumination of the “Service Engine Soon” light, charging system warning light or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke or loss of engine power, could indicate that the emission control system is not working properly. Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment. Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services, sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the engine. This decal identifies engine displacement and gives some tune up specifications. Please consult your Warranty Guide for complete emission warranty information. Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an I/M test of the on-board diagnostics system. If your “Check Engine/Service Engine Soon” light is on, refer to the description in the Warning lights and chimes section of the Instrument cluster chapter. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test with the “Check Engine/Service Engine Soon” light on. 224
  • 225. Maintenance and Specifications If the vehicle’s powertrain system or its battery has just been serviced, the on-board diagnostics system is reset to a “not ready for I/M test” condition. To ready the on-board diagnostics system for I/M testing, a minimum of 30 minutes of city and highway driving is necessary as described below: ² First, at least 10 minutes of driving on an expressway or highway. ² Next, at least 20 minutes driving in stop-and-go, city-type traffic with at least four idle periods. Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started, do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete. CHECKING AND ADDING POWER STEERING FLUID Check the power steering fluid. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the service interval schedules. If adding fluid is necessary, use only MERCONt ATF. If your vehicle is equipped with the 3.8L V6 engine, check the power steering fluid level with the engine at normal operating temperature. 1. Start the engine and let it run until it reaches normal operating temperature (the engine coolant temperature gauge indicator will be near the center of the normal area between H and C). FILL HOT 225
  • 226. Maintenance and Specifications 2. While the engine idles, turn the steering wheel left and right several times. 3. Turn the engine off. 4. Check the fluid level on the dipstick. It should be within the FULL HOT range. Do not add fluid if the level is within this range. 5. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking the level until it reaches the correct operating range. Be sure to put the cap back on the reservoir. If your vehicle is equipped with a 4.6L V8 engine, check the power steering fluid level with the engine at ambient temperature. Allow at least one-half hour after driving for the power steering fluid to cool. 1. Start the engine and allow the engine to idle. MAX 2. Turn the steering MIN wheel left and right several times. 3. Turn the engine off. 4. Check the fluid level in the reservoir. It should be between the MIN and MAX lines. Do not add fluid if the level is within this range. 5. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking the level until it reaches the correct operating range. Be sure to put the cap back on the reservoir. BRAKE FLUID Checking and adding brake fluid Brake fluid should be checked and refilled as needed. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the service interval schedules. 226
  • 227. Maintenance and Specifications ² 3.8L OHV V6 engine ² 4.6L SOHC V8 engine 1. Clean the reservoir cap before removal to prevent dirt or water from entering the reservoir. 2. Visually inspect the fluid level. 3. If necessary, add MAX brake fluid from a clean un-opened container until the level reaches MAX. Do not fill above this line. 4. Use only a DOT 3 brake fluid certified to meet Ford specification ESA-M6C25–A. Refer to Lubricant specifications in this chapter. Brake fluid is toxic. If brake fluid contacts the eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Seek medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately. 227
  • 228. Maintenance and Specifications If you use a brake fluid that is not DOT 3, you will cause permanent damage to your brakes. Do not let the reservoir for the master cylinder run dry. This may cause the brakes to fail. CLUTCH ADJUSTMENT (IF EQUIPPED) Check the clutch adjustment. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the service interval schedules. The clutch on your vehicle is operated by a cable. As necessary, adjust the clutch as described below. 1. Turn the engine off and shift into 1 (First). 2. Put your foot under the clutch pedal and gently pull it up until the pedal stops. 3. Push the clutch pedal down slowly. You will hear a click as the clutch adjusts itself. TRANSMISSION FLUID Checking automatic transmission fluid (if equipped) Refer to your scheduled maintenance guide for scheduled intervals for fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not consume fluid. However, the fluid level should be checked if the transmission is not working properly, i.e., if the transmission slips or shifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage. Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an accurate fluid check, drive the vehicle 228
  • 229. Maintenance and Specifications until it is at normal operating temperature (approximately 30 km [20 miles]). If your vehicle has been operated for an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic during hot weather or pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be turned off for about 30 minutes to allow fluid to cool before checking. 1. Drive the vehicle 30 km (20 miles) or until it reaches normal operating temperature. 2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake. 3. With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal, start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear ranges. Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage. 4. Latch the gearshift lever in P (Park) and leave the engine running. 5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean with a clean, dry lint free rag. If necessary, refer to Identifying components in the engine compartment in this chapter for the location of the dipstick. 6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube. 7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level. The fluid should be in the designated area for normal operating temperature or ambient temperature. Low fluid level Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid level is at the bottom of the dipstick and the ambient temperature is above 10°C (50°F). Correct fluid level The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating temperature 66°C-77°C (150°F-170°F) on a level surface. The normal operating temperature can be reached after approximately 30 km (20 miles) of driving. 229
  • 230. Maintenance and Specifications You can check the fluid without driving if the ambient temperature is above 10°C (50°F). However, if fluid is added at this time, an overfill condition could result when the vehicle reaches normal operating temperature. The transmission fluid should be in this range if at normal operating temperature (66°C-77°C [150°F-170°F]). The transmission fluid should be in this range if at ambient temperature (10°C-35°C [50°F-95°F]). High fluid level Fluid levels above the safe range may result in transmission failure. An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and/or engagement concerns and/or possible damage. High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition. Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type of fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick and also in the Lubricant specifications section in this chapter. Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid may cause internal transmission component damage. If necessary, add fluid in 250 ml (1/2 pint) increments through the filler tube until the level is correct. If an overfill occurs, excess fluid should be removed by a qualified technician. 230
  • 231. Maintenance and Specifications An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and/or engagement concerns and/or possible damage. Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission operation and result in damage to internal transmission components. Checking and adding manual transmission fluid (if equipped) 1. Clean the filler plug. 2. Remove the filler plug and inspect the fluid level. 3. Fluid level should be at bottom of the opening. 4. Add enough fluid through the filler opening so that the fluid level is at the bottom of the opening. 5. Install and tighten the fill plug securely. Use only fluid that meets Ford specifications. Refer to Lubricant Specifications in this chapter. 231
  • 232. Maintenance and Specifications INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING New vehicles are fitted with tires that have a rating on them called Tire Quality Grades. The Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: ² Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United States Department of Transportation has set. Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic tires for use on passenger cars. They do not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2). U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S. Department of Transportation requires Ford to give you the following information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it. Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climates. 232
  • 233. Maintenance and Specifications Traction AA A B C The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics. Temperature A B C The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades A and B represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. 233
  • 234. Maintenance and Specifications SERVICING YOUR TIRES Checking the tire pressure ² Use an accurate tire pressure gauge. ² Check the tire pressure when tires are cold, after the vehicle has been parked for at least one hour or has been driven less than 5 km (3 miles). ² Adjust tire pressure to recommended specifications found on the certification label on the driver side door latch pillar. Improperly inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, possibly resulting in loss of vehicle control. Tire rotation Because your vehicle’s tires perform different jobs, they often wear differently. To make sure your tires wear evenly and last longer, rotate them as indicated in the scheduled maintenance guide. If you notice that the tires wear unevenly, have them checked. ² 15 or 16 inch four tire rotation 234
  • 235. Maintenance and Specifications ² 17 inch four tire rotation Replacing the tires Replace the tires when the wear band is visible through the tire treads. When replacing full size tires, never mix radial bias-belted, or bias-type tires. Use only the tire sizes that are listed on the tire pressure decal. Make sure that all tires are the same size, speed rating, and load-carrying capacity. Use only the tire combinations recommended on the label. If you do not follow these precautions, your vehicle may not drive properly and safely. Make sure that all replacement tires are of the same size, type, load-carrying capacity and tread design (e.g., “All Terrain”, etc.), as originally offered by Ford. Make sure that all replacement tires are of the same size, type, load-carrying capacity and tread design (e.g., “All Terrain”, “Touring”, etc.), as originally offered by Ford. 235
  • 236. Maintenance and Specifications Failure to follow these precautions may adversely affect the handling of the vehicle and make it easier for the driver to lose control and roll over. Tires that are larger or smaller than your vehicle’s original tires may also affect the accuracy of your speedometer. SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS Driving too fast for conditions creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control. Driving at very high speeds for extended periods of time may result in damage to vehicle components. Snow tires must be the same size and grade as the tires you currently have on your vehicle. The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow tires and chains. Use chains on the tires only in an emergency or if the law requires them. Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains: ² Chains may damage aluminum wheels. ² Use only Cable Type chains with size P225/55R16 or 245/45ZR17 tires. Use of SAE Class S chains may damage your vehicle. ² SAE Class S chains may be used on P205/65R15 tires. ² Install chains securely, verifying that the chains do not touch any wiring, brake lines or fuel lines. ² Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains rub or bang against your vehicle, stop and re-tighten the chains. If this does not work, remove the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle. 236
  • 237. Maintenance and Specifications ² If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle. ² Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed. Do not use tire chains on dry roads. ² The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when using snow tires and chains. MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS Component 3.8L OHV V6 engine 4.6L SOHC V8 engine Air filter element FA-1611 FA-1634 Fuel filter FG-986 FG-986B Battery BXT-59 BXT-59 Oil filter FL-400S FL-820S PCV valve EV-152 EV-98 Spark plugs* AWSF-42EE** AWSF-32P * Refer to Vehicle Emissions Control Information (VECI) decal for spark plug gap information. **If a spark plug is removed for inspection, it must be reinstalled in the same cylinder. If a spark plug needs to be replaced, use only spark plugs with the same service part number suffix letter as shown on the engine decal. 237
  • 238. Maintenance and Specifications REFILL CAPACITIES Fluid Ford Part Name Application Capacity Brake fluid Motorcraft High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid All Fill to line on reservoir Engine oil (includes filter change) Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil 3.8L OHV V6 engine 4.7 L (5.0 quarts) 4.6L SOHC V8 engine 5.7L (6.0 quarts) Engine coolant 1 Motorcraft Premium Engine Coolant (green-colored) or Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant (yellow-colored) 3.8L OHV V6 engine 11.2L (11.8 quarts) 4.6L SOHC V8 engine 13.3L (14.1 quarts) Power steering fluid Motorcraft MERCONt ATF 3.8L OHV V6 engine Keep in FULL HOT range on dispstick 4.6L SOHC V8 engine Fill to between MIN and MAX lines on reservoir 238
  • 239. Maintenance and Specifications Fluid Ford Part Name Application Capacity Rear axle lubricant 2 Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant 7 .5 inch axle 1.5L (3.25 pints) Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant 8.8 inch axle 2.0L (4.25 pints) Fuel tank N/A All 59.4L (15.7 gallons) Transmission fluid 3 Motorcraft MERCONtV ATF Automatic with 3.8L OHV V6 engine 13.1L (13.9 quarts) 4 Automatic with 4.6L SOHC V8 engine 12.0L (12.8 quarts) 4 Motorcraft MERCONt ATF Manual with 3.8L OHV V6 engine 2.6L (5.6 pints) 5 Synthetic MERCONt ATF Manual with 4.6L SOHC V8 engine 3.8L (8.0 pints) 5 Windshield washer fluid Ultra-Clear Windshield Washer Concentrate All 3.8L (4.0 quarts) 1Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle. 2Rear axle lubricants do not need to be checked or changed unless a leak is suspected, service is required or the axle assembly has been submerged in water. The axle lubricant should be changed any time the rear axle has been submerged in water. Fill 6 mm to 14 mm (1/4 inch to 9/16 inch) below bottom of fill hole. Add 118 ml (4 oz.) of Additive Friction Modifier C8AZ-19B546-A or equivalent 239
  • 240. Maintenance and Specifications meeting Ford specification EST-M2C118–A for complete refill of Traction-Lok axles. 3Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. Transmission fluid requirements are indicated on the dipstick or on the dipstick handle. MERCONt and MERCONt V are not interchangeable. DO NOT mix MERCONt and MERCONt V. Refer to your scheduled maintenance guide to determine the correct service interval. 4Indicates only approximate dry-fill capacity. Some applications may vary based on cooler size and if equipped with an in-tank cooler. The amount of transmission fluid and fluid level should be set by the indication on the dipstick’s normal operating range. 5Service refill capacity is determined by filling the transmission to the bottom of the filler hole with the vehicle on a level surface. LUBRICANT SPECIFICATIONS Item Ford part name Ford part number Ford specification Brake fluid Motorcraft High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid PM-1 ESA-M6C25-A and DOT 3 Door weatherstrips Silicone Lubricant F7AZ-19G208-BA and F5AZ-19553-AA ESR-M13P4-A Door latch, hood latch, auxiliary hood latch, door hinges, striker plates, seat tracks and fuel filler door hinge Multi-Purpose Grease XG-4or F5AZ-19G209-AA ESR-M1C159-A 240
  • 241. Maintenance and Specifications Item Ford part name Ford part number Ford specification Engine coolant Motorcraft Premium Engine Coolant (green-colored) VC-4–A (US) or CXC-10 (Canada) ESE-M97B44-A Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant (yellow-colored) VC-7–A WSS-M97B51–A1 Engine oil Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil XO-5W20-QSP WSS-M2C153-H with API Certification Mark Lock cylinders Penetrating and Lock Lubricant Motorcraft XL-1 none Power steering fluid and convertible top fluid (if equipped) Motorcraft MERCONt ATF XT-2-QM MERCONt Rear Axle Lubricant Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant 1 XY-80W90-QL WSP-M2C197-A Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant XY-75W140-QL WSP-M2C192-A Automatic transmission fluid Motorcraft MERCONtV ATF 2 XT-5-QM MERCONtV 3.8L Manual transmission fluid Motorcraft MERCONt ATF XT-2-QDX MERCONt 4.6L Manual transmission fluid Motorcraft Synthetic MERCONt ATF XT-2–QSM MERCONt and ESR-M2C163–A2 Disc brake caliper rails Motorcraft Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound XG-3 ESE-M1C171-A Windshield washer fluid Ultra-clear Windshield Washer Concentrate C9AZ-19550-AC ESR-M17P5-A 241
  • 242. Maintenance and Specifications 1Add 118 ml (4 oz.) of Additive Friction Modifier C8AZ-19B546-A or equivalent meeting Ford specification EST-M2C118-A for complete refill of Traction-Lok axles. Ford design rear axles contain a synthetic lubricant that does not require changing unless the axle has been submerged in water. 2Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. Transmission fluid requirements are indicated on the dipstick or on the dipstick handle. MERCONt and MERCONt V are not interchangeable. DO NOT mix MERCONt and MERCONt V. Refer to your scheduled maintenance guide to determine the correct service interval. ENGINE DATA Engine 3.8L OHV V6 engine 4.6L SOHC V8 engine Cubic inches 232 281 Required fuel 87 octane 87 octane Firing order 1-4-2-5-3-6 1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8 Spark plug gap 1.3-1.4 mm (0.052-00.056 inch) 1.3-1.4 mm (0.052-00.056 inch) Ignition system EDIS Coil on plug Compression ratio 9.4:1 9.4:1 VEHICLE DIMENSIONS Vehicle dimensions Coupe mm (in) Convertible mm (in) (1) Overall length 4653.3 (183.2) 4653.3 (183.2) (2) Overall width 1856.7 (73.1) 1856.7 (73.1) (3) Overall height 1348.7 (53.1) 1351.3 (53.2) (4) Wheelbase 2573.0 (101.3) 2573.0 (101.3) (5) Track - Front 1534.2 (60.4) 1 1534.2 (60.4) 1 (5) Track - Rear 1539.2 (60.6) 2 1539.2 (60.6) 2 1 1521.5 mm (59.9 in) for Mustang GT 2 1526.5 mm (60.1 in) for Mustang GT 242
  • 243. Maintenance and Specifications 2 5 3 4 1 IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE Certification label The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration Regulations require that a Certification label be affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where the Certification label may be located. The Certification label is located on the front door latch pillar on the driver’s side. MFD. BY FORD MOTOR CO. IN U.S.A. DATE: XXXXX GVWR:XXXXXXXXXXXX FRONT GAWR: XXXXXX/XXXXXXX REAR GAWR: XXXXXXX/XXXXXXX THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY, BUMPER, AND THEFT PRE-VENTION STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF XXXXX XXXXX MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE. EXT PNT: XXXXXX XXXXXX RC: XX DSO: XXXX BAR INT TR TP/PS R AXLE TR SPR X XX XXX X XX X XXXX UPC ÑF85B-1520472-AB VIN: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX TYPE: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 243
  • 244. Maintenance and Specifications Vehicle identification number (VIN) The vehicle identification number is attached to a metal tag XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX and is located on the driver side instrument panel. (Please note that in the graphic XXXX is representative of your vehicle identification number.) Engine number The engine number (the last eight numbers of the vehicle identification number) is stamped on the engine block and transmission. 244
  • 245. Accessories FORD ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE A wide selection of genuine Ford accessories are available for your vehicle through your local authorized Ford, Lincoln, Mercury or Ford of Canada dealer. These quality accessories have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs; they are custom designed to complement the style and aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle. In addition, each accessory is made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Ford’s rigorous engineering and safety specifications. Ford Motor Company will repair or replace any properly dealer-installed Ford accessory found to be defective in factory-supplied materials or workmanship during the warranty period, as well as any component damaged by the defective accessory. The accessory will be warranted for whichever provides you the greatest benefit: ² 12 months or 2,000 km (12,000 miles) (whichever occurs first), or ² the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty. This means that genuine Ford accessories purchased along with your new vehicle and installed by the dealer are covered for the full length of your New Vehicle’s Limited Warranty — 3 years or 60,000 km (36,000 miles) (whichever occurs first). Contact your dealer for details and a copy of the warranty. Not all accessories are available for all models. Vehicle Security Air bag anti-theft locks Styled wheel locks Vehicle security systems Comfort and convenience Ash Cup Cargo nets Cargo organizers Cargo tray 245
  • 246. Accessories Dash trim Electrochromic mirror with compass Electrochromic mirror with compass and temperature display Engine block heaters Remote keyless entry system Remote start system Travel equipment Auto headlamps with daytime running lights (DRL) Daytime running lights (DRL) First aid kit Fog lights Highway safety kit Removable luggage rack Removable luggage rack adapters (Bike, ski, snowboard) Speed control Protection and appearance equipment All-weather vinyl floor mats Car cover Cargo liners, interior Carpet floor mats Door edge guards Door sill scuff plates, stainless Flat splash guards Front end covers (full and mini) Gearshift knob Leather steering wheel Molded splash guards Pedal covers Seat belt extenders 246
  • 247. Accessories Side air deflector Spoiler Styled hood deflector Tonneau cover (mini, for convertible top) Universal floor mats Wheels (chrome and painted) For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle: ² When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety compliance certification label). Consult your dealer for specific weight information. ² The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile communications systems - such as two-way radios, telephones and theft alarms - that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service technician. ² Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your vehicle, particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive use or are not properly installed. When operated, such systems may cause the engine to stumble or stall or cause the transmission to be damaged or operate improperly. In addition, such systems may be damaged or their performance may be affected by operating your vehicle. (Citizens band [CB] transceivers, garage door openers and other transmitters with outputs of five watts or less will not ordinarily affect your vehicle’s operation.) ² Ford cannot assume responsibility for any adverse effects or damage that may result from the use of such equipment. 247
  • 248. A ABS (see Brakes) ... 140 Air bag supplemental restraint system .............. 114–115 and child safety seats ....................... 116 description ............ 115 disposal .................. 119 driver air bag ........ 117 indicator light .................. 11, 119 operation ............... 117 passenger air bag .................... 117 Air cleaner filter ..... 237 Air conditioning manual heating and air conditioning system ..................... 63 Antifreeze (see Engine coolant) ................... 206 Anti-lock brake system (see Brakes) .... 140–141 Anti-theft system warning light ........... 11 Audio system (see Radio) .......... 19, 43 Automatic transmission ............ 144 driving an automatic overdrive ............... 146 fluid, adding .......... 228 fluid, checking ...... 228 fluid, refill capacities ............... 238 fluid, specification .......... 242 Auxiliary power point ........................... 78 Axle lubricant specifications ... 240, 242 refill capacities ...... 238 traction lok ............ 144 B Battery ..................... 203 acid, treating emergencies .......... 203 charging system warning light ........... 11 jumping a disabled battery ................... 170 maintenance-free .. 203 replacement, specifications ........ 237 servicing ................ 203 voltage gauge .......... 16 BeltMinder ............... 109 Brakes .............. 138, 141 anti-lock ......... 140–141 anti-lock brake system (ABS) warning light ... 13, 141 brake warning light .......................... 14 fluid, checking and adding ............ 226 fluid, refill capacities ............... 238 fluid, specifications ... 240, 242 lubricant specifications ... 240, 242 parking .................. 139 shift interlock ........ 144 Break-in period ........... 5 Bulbs .......................... 71 Index 248
  • 249. C Capacities for refilling fluids .......... 238 Cargo net ................... 78 CD player .................. 43 CD-single premium ... 19 Certification Label .. 243 Changing a tire ....... 165 Child safety restraints ................. 120 child safety belts ....................... 120 Child safety seats .... 123 attaching with tether straps ......... 127 in front seat .......... 125 in rear seat ............ 125 Cleaning your vehicle engine compartment ......... 188 instrument panel .. 190 interior ................... 191 plastic parts .......... 190 washing .................. 187 waxing ................... 187 wheels .................... 188 wiper blades .......... 190 Climate control (see Air conditioning or Heating) ................ 63 Clock .............. 24, 34, 48 Clutch adjusting ................ 228 operation while driving ................... 150 recommended shift speeds ........... 151 Index Console ...................... 84 Controls power seat ............. 100 Convertible ................ 85 cleaning ................. 192 installation of the boot ................... 86 lowering the convertible top ........ 85 raising the convertible top ........ 87 Coolant checking and adding .................... 206 refill capacities ....... 212, 238 specifications ... 240, 242 Cruise control (see Speed control) .. 80 Customer Assistance ................ 157 Ford accessories for your vehicle .... 192 Ford Extended Service Plan .......... 178 Getting assistance outside the U.S. and Canada ........... 183 Getting roadside assistance .............. 157 Getting the service you need ............... 176 Ordering additional owner’s literature . 184 The Dispute Settlement Board . 179 Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration Program ................. 183 249
  • 250. D Daytime running lamps (see Lamps) .............. 67 Defrost rear window ............ 66 Dipstick automatic transmission fluid ........................ 228 engine oil ............... 199 Doors lubricant specifications ........ 240 Driving under special conditions through water ....... 153 E Emergencies, roadside jump-starting ........ 170 Emission control system ...................... 223 Engine ...................... 242 check engine/service engine soon light .... 11 cleaning ................. 188 coolant ................... 206 idle speed control .... 203 lubrication specifications ... 240, 242 refill capacities ...... 238 service points ............. 197–198 starting after a collision .............. 159 Engine block heater ....................... 137 Engine oil ................ 199 checking and adding .................... 199 dipstick .................. 199 filter, specifications ... 202, 237 recommendations .... 202 refill capacities ...... 238 specifications ... 240, 242 Exhaust fumes ........ 137 F Floor mats ................. 85 Fluid capacities ....... 238 Foglamps ................... 67 Fuel .......................... 214 calculating fuel economy ................ 219 cap ................... 12, 216 capacity ................. 238 choosing the right fuel ................ 217 comparisons with EPA fuel economy estimates ............... 223 detergent in fuel ... 218 filling your vehicle with fuel ......... 214, 216, 219 filter, specifications ... 219, 237 fuel pump shut-off switch .................... 159 gauge ....................... 16 improving fuel economy ................ 219 low fuel warning light .......................... 13 octane rating ............. 217, 242 quality .................... 218 Index 250
  • 251. running out of fuel ......................... 218 safety information relating to automotive fuels ... 214 Fuses ........................ 160 G Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ... 12, 216 Gas mileage (see Fuel economy) ........ 219 Gauges ....................... 15 battery voltage gauge ....................... 16 engine coolant temperature gauge ....................... 15 engine oil pressure gauge ....................... 16 fuel gauge ................ 16 odometer ................. 17 speedometer ........... 17 tachometer .............. 17 trip odometer .......... 18 GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) ........ 154 definition ............... 154 driving with a heavy load ............. 154 location .................. 154 GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) ........ 154 calculating ............. 154 definition ............... 154 driving with a heavy load ............. 154 location .................. 154 Index H Hazard flashers ....... 158 Head restraints ......... 99 Headlamps ................. 67 aiming ................ 68–69 bulb specifications .. 71 daytime running lights ........................ 67 flash to pass ............ 68 high beam ......... 10, 68 replacing bulbs ....... 72 turning on and off .. 67 warning chime ........ 15 Heating heating and air conditioning system ..................... 63 Hood ........................ 196 I Ignition ............. 133, 242 removing the key .. 153 Infant seats (see Safety seats) ........... 123 Inspection/maintenance (I/M) testing ............ 224 Instrument panel cleaning ................. 190 cluster ...................... 10 lighting up panel and interior ............. 68 J Jack .......................... 165 positioning ............. 165 storage ................... 165 251
  • 252. Jump-starting your vehicle ...................... 170 K Keys ..................... 95–97 key in ignition chime ....................... 14 positions of the ignition .................. 133 removing from the ignition ............ 153 L Lamps bulb replacement specifications chart ........................ 71 cargo lamps ............. 68 daytime running light .......................... 67 fog lamps ................. 67 headlamps ......... 67, 72 headlamps, flash to pass ..................... 68 instrument panel, dimming ................... 68 interior lamps ... 70, 72 replacing bulbs .................. 71–75 Lane change indicator (see Turn signal) ...... 70 Lights, warning and indicator .................... 10 air bag ...................... 11 anti-lock brakes (ABS) .............. 13, 141 anti-theft ................. 11 brake ........................ 14 charging system ...... 11 fuel cap light ........... 12 high beam ............... 10 low fuel .................... 13 overdrive off ............ 13 safety belt ............... 10 service engine soon ......................... 11 traction control active ....................... 13 turn signal indicator .................. 10 Limited slip axle (see Traction Loc) .. 144 Load limits ............... 154 GAWR .................... 154 GVWR .................... 154 trailer towing ........ 154 Locks doors ........................ 89 Lubricant specifications ... 240, 242 Lug nuts, anti-theft .................. 169 Lumbar support, seats ......................... 100 M Manual transmission ............ 150 fluid capacities ...... 238 lubricant specifications ........ 242 reverse ................... 152 Mirrors side view mirrors (power) ................... 80 Motorcraft parts ................. 219, 237 O Octane rating .......... 217 Index 252
  • 253. Odometer ................... 17 Oil (see Engine oil) ............... 199 Overdrive ........... 84, 146 P Panic alarm feature, remote entry system ........................ 92 Parking brake .......... 139 Parts (see Motorcraft parts) ....................... 237 Power distribution box (see Fuses) ...... 163 Power door locks ...... 89 Power mirrors ........... 80 Power point ............... 78 Power steering ........ 142 fluid, checking and adding ............ 225 fluid, refill capacity ................. 238 fluid, specifications ... 240, 242 Power Windows ......... 78 R Radio .................... 19, 43 Radio reception ... 61–62 Rear window defroster .................... 66 Relays ...................... 160 Remote entry system .................. 91–92 illuminated entry .... 94 Index locking/unlocking doors .................. 89, 92 opening the trunk ... 93 panic alarm ............. 92 replacement/additional transmitters ............. 94 replacing the batteries .................. 93 Roadside assistance ................ 157 S Safety belts (see Safety restraints) ..... 14, 102, 104–107 Safety defects, reporting .................. 186 Safety restraints ... 102, 104–107 belt minder ........... 109 cleaning the safety belts ............ 113 extension assembly ................ 113 for adults ....... 104–107 for children ... 119–120 warning light and chime ............... 10, 14, 108–109 Safety seats for children .............. 123 Seat belts (see Safety restraints) ................ 102 Seats .......................... 99 child safety seats .. 123 SecuriLock passive anti-theft system .................. 95–97 253
  • 254. Servicing your vehicle ...................... 194 Spare tire (see Changing the Tire) .................. 165 Spark plugs, specifications ... 237, 242 Specification chart, lubricants ......... 240, 242 Speed control ............ 80 Speedometer ............. 17 Starting your vehicle ...... 133–134, 136 jump starting ........ 170 Steering wheel controls .............. 77, 80 tilting ....................... 77 T Tachometer ............... 17 Tires ......... 165, 232–234 changing ........ 165–166 checking the pressure ................. 234 replacing ................ 235 rotating .................. 234 snow tires and chains .................... 236 tire grades ............. 233 treadwear .............. 232 Towing ..................... 156 recreational towing .................... 156 trailer towing ........ 156 wrecker .................. 175 Traction control ...... 142 active light .............. 13 Traction-lok rear axle .......................... 144 Transmission automatic operation ............... 144 fluid, checking and adding (automatic) ........... 228 fluid, checking and adding (manual) ............... 231 fluid, refill capacities ............... 238 lubricant specifications ... 240, 242 manual operation .. 150 Trip odometer ........... 18 Trunk ......................... 89 remote release .. 85, 93 Turn signal .......... 10, 70 V Vehicle dimensions . 242 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ......... 244 Vehicle loading ........ 154 Ventilating your vehicle ...................... 138 W Warning chimes ... 14–15 Warning lights (see Lights) ............... 10 Washer fluid ............ 199 Water, Driving through .................... 153 Index 254
  • 255. Windows power ....................... 78 Windshield washer fluid and wipers checking and adding fluid ........... 199 Index checking and cleaning ................... 76 operation ................. 76 replacing wiper blades ...................... 77 Wrecker towing ....... 175 255
  • 256. 256